The best hiking sandals liberate your feet in the baking summer heat. With tough and grippy outsoles as well as durable uppers, chunky walking boots are no longer the only option for tackling off-road terrain.

In theory, summertime and hiking are a match made in heaven, like jam and cream or fish and chips. However, reality is never so simple. It just isn't possible to enjoy a rewarding hill climb and a beautiful view when your walking boots are roasting your feet well past medium rare! Hence, this simple yet underrated fix.

If the terrain you're walking on isn't that technical then sandals can instantly transform your summer adventures, keeping your feet cool while keeping you upright and protected on trails.

So, over the last year, we've been testing the latest and best hiking sandals from leading outdoor brands. We're looking for ultra-protective, technical sandals that can handle all kinds of terrain while still facilitating good airflow and a lightweight feel. That's a lot to ask, and we've only included the very strongest contenders in this roundup. Take a look at our picks and see which style suits your approach.

Jump to: How we test | Best hiking sandal reviews | Buying advice

Shortlist: Best hiking sandals at a glance

Best hiking sandal overall: Teva Terra Fi 5 Universal

Runner-up best in test: Keen Newport H2 Sandal

Best value hiking sandal: Columbia Peakfreak Rush Shandal

Editor's note: This group test of the best hiking sandals was updated on 26 June 2026 to ensure our award-winning lineup is current and available for purchase. In this update, we removed discontinued items or sandals that don't score very highly.

How we tested

These sandals were tested by LFTO's team of summer-loving hikers: Matthew Pike, Evie Nichols, Milo Wilson and Lauren Baker. As committed gear testers, they've together amassed a large collection of reviews for LFTO, Country Walking and Trail magazine.

Each sandal was worn on hikes covering different terrain types, including rocky trails, muddy paths and river crossings. We evaluated grip by walking across both dry and wet surfaces.

For support and comfort, we examined arch support, cushioning and how the sandals felt after extended wear. Adjustability and fit were also key criteria, with testers noting how secure they felt and whether any blisters developed.

After compiling both subjective feedback and objective metrics, we ranked each pair of hiking sandals based on their performance, comfort, durability and value.

Find out more about how we test here.

The best hiking sandals in detail

How to choose hiking sandals

Material

Any decent hiking sandal needs to be crafted from quick-drying materials that won’t wear out after a handful of adventures. You also want the outsole to grip well even when wet; sandals and water go hand-in-hand. The excellent traction offered by Vibram rubber soles is used in some of the best models, while padded neoprene and leather are also popular thanks to their comfort and durability.

Good walking sandals can be costly, but you're mainly paying for the quality of the materials. If you plan on picking up a pair for anything remotely challenging, we think it's well worth the cost. Cheaper models sold for casual beach trips simply don’t stack up.

Style

It's worth considering the type of hiking sandal that best suits your needs. Even at the top level, there's a lot of variation in how much support and protection different sandals offer. Minimalist models may just feature a grippy sole and a y-strap to hold your foot in place, which may be all you need. If you're going to be hitting some harder terrain, you'll need something much tougher.

The most rugged sandals all look like a hiking shoe's skeleton. The rib-cage design excellently serves a dual purpose, providing the breathability and freedom of a sandal with the protective shield and toe box of a trail shoe. You won't find better – but you will have to come to terms with not caring how you look.

Fit

It's important for hiking sandals to fit securely, meaning your feet don't move around in them. Loose sandals are more likely to lead to blisters, muscle strains or even a rolled ankle on uneven terrain.

What does a secure fit mean, though? Well, it's personalised to your foot shape. Your heel is locked-in and your feet don't slide forward or side-to-side. Look for sandals with three points of adjustment, ideally round the heel, forefoot (toe area) and instep (top of the foot). Quick-lace systems also tend to work well, if you can adjust them to fit securely.

To avoid blisters, it's best to choose sandals with straps that are padded with soft materials. Even better if these materials are quick-drying, as when straps stay wet they can become abrasive, causing blisters over time.

Is it okay to wear sandals for hiking?

Many people prefer to wear sandals for hiking as they're more breathable and quick-drying than most hiking shoes or boots. Sandals are particularly handy for warm weather and hikes with water crossings.

There's a caveat here, though. Your sandals need to be purpose-built for hiking, with a grippy outsole which won't slip on any rocks. One of the worst things that can happen on a hike is your footwear falling apart, so make sure that your sandals are durable and high-quality, with a stiff outsole, strong straps and solid stitching.

There are a few instances where you might want to think twice before wearing sandals. On rugged terrain, you won't get much ankle support or foot protection. Cold or unpredictable weather is also a no-no. For multi-day hikes, where you're going long distances with a heavy pack, many hikers prefer the protection and stability of walking shoes or boots.

Do you wear socks with hiking sandals?

Plenty of people wear socks with hiking sandals, and for good reason. While they may be a fashion faux-pas, socks can help to cushion hiking sandals, especially if the straps rub. They'll also give you a little bit of extra warmth and protect from debris.

If you do wear socks, it's best to avoid basic cotton ones as they'll retain moisture and can lead to blisters. For more guidance, check out our favourite walking socks.

More kit for surviving summer

The below recommendations come from our tough-as-nails Gear Editor, Ben Weeks. There is nobody else on the LFTO team who would even dream of facing down the amount of midges that Ben deals with on a regular basis.

The guy is like Superman, but rather than being born with ultra-strong skin, he makes use of specialised outdoor kit to become impervious to damage. Here are the essential bits of gear that Ben won't go through summer without:

About the authors

Matt Pike is a content creator for our duo of outdoor titles (LFTO and Country Walking magazine). He's been writing about the outdoors and testing gear for well over a decade.

Milo Wilson is a digital content writer for LFTO and an all-around swell chap. Put him outside and he's happy, much like a golden doodle. Milo is massively into hiking, trail running, camping, and kebabs.

Evie Nichols is the newest member of the LFTO team and spends her working days testing and writing about gear. She's been exploring the outdoors since childhood, with her family holidays usually involving something like bikepacking or hammock camping in the Cambodian jungle.

Due to easy access from Scotland’s Central Belt, combined with an outstanding array of mountains and walking, it’s no surprise that the Arrochar Alps are incredibly popular.

This superb traverse summits one Corbett and two Munros and is perhaps the finest walk in the area. The Cobbler (or Ben Arthur, to give this unique Corbett its Sunday name) is one of Scotland’s most distinctive and distinguished mountains – its triumvirate of peaks unlike anything in the Highlands.

Yet to attain its true summit means threading the exposed ‘Eye of the Needle’, a section not necessarily for the faint-hearted. The summits of Beinn Ime and Beinn Narnain are much easier to reach although the Bealach a’ Mhaim, which sits beneath all three mountains, is a little boggy as is the ascent onto Beinn Ime.

However, both Munros, as well as The Cobbler, offer incredible vistas, including, on a clear day, Jura and the mountains of Glen Coe. This route also passes the enormous Narnain Boulders.

These two glacial erratics provide clues to the momentous geological events that helped form this topographical masterpiece. They also played a central role in the great outdoor movement of the 1930s.

Men and women, looking to escape Glasgow’s industrial backdrop, would head north, after finishing work on a Saturday, to spend Sunday climbing the Alps and camping beneath the Narnain Boulders. After the walk, Ben Arthur’s Bothy is on Arrochar Main Street and this pub bestows an incredible view of Loch Long and The Cobbler.

How hard is walking this Arrochar Alps route?

DIFFICULTY: Challenging

DISTANCE: 18.15km (11 3/4 miles)

TIME: 8 hours

TOTAL ASCENT: 1,751m

Terrain and navigation: Clear paths mostly, but path to Beinn Ime can be sketchy or non-existent. Beinn Ime can be wet and boggy, as can the Bealach a’ Mhaim. There are steep ascents/descents, and reaching the true summit of The Cobbler means traversing a very exposed ledge.

What's the best map for the Arrochar Alps?

Best physical maps:

- OS Explorer (1:25,000) 39

- OS Landranger (1:50,000) 56

- Harvey Superwalker (1:25,000) Arrochar Alps

The Arrochar Alps: Step-by-step route guide

1. From the car park at Succoth – which sits at the northern edge of Loch Long – exit left and carefully cross the busy A83. Enter the Argyll Forest Park and follow a path up a series of zigzags, through lovely birch woodland. It rises all the way to a track beside a bench where there is a spectacular view over the fjord-like Loch Long to Ben Lomond. Turn left then, after a few metres, just before a radio mast, go right onto a path. This again rises steeply through denser mixed woodland, soon climbing above the treeline onto open hillside.

2. Now you get the first heart-stopping view of The Cobbler, its unique profile dominating the aspect ahead. A superb path continues on a gradual ascent, allowing you to catch your breath and enjoy the fabulous surroundings. Keep on north-west above the fast-flowing Allt a’ Bhalachain. Beside a weir the path splits, so keep right and continue on, in due course reaching the enormous Narnain Boulders. Soon afterwards the path forks and again keep right, cutting a course through Coire a’ Bhalachain in-between the slopes of The Cobbler and Beinn Narnain. The main path ends at the head of Bealach a’ Mhaim beside a marker post. It is a marvellous spot with a real sense of wildness and views extending to Beinn Ime, Beinn Luibhean and Beinn an Lochain.

3. Make a left from where an excellent, but steep, path rises south up the northern shoulder of The Cobbler. Fabulous views open out to the west. Eventually the gradient relents to reach a col in-between the North and Central Peaks. Go left and climb onto the North Peak with the final metres crossing awkward rocky slabs, which are tricky, especially on the descent. When on top the view is exceptional, with the Central Peak drawing the eye towards the Firth of Clyde, Arran and Ailsa Craig.

4. Carefully return to the col then make the final, steady ascent onto the Central Peak with only the intrepid ‘threading the eye’ to gain the true summit. Another wonderful view extends to Ben Lomond and Beinn Narnain.

5. Return to Bealach a’ Mhaim then head north along a rough path, across boggy ground towards Beinn Ime. The path becomes faint but soon reaches a gate. Once through, the path rises over open hillside, on a tough ascent, eventually running right of a burn, to reach a junction beside a small marker cairn. Turn left over the burn. The path improves as it climbs steadily north-west to gain Beinn Ime’s rugged 1011m top, the highest point of the walk. The stunning view extends to Ben Lomond, Loch Arklet, Loch Katrine and mighty Ben Cruachan.

6. Return to the gate near the base of Beinn Ime. Once through keep straight on, heading south-east-east along a faint path, which becomes clearer as ground rises towards Beinn Narnain. Around the 750m contour pass a path on the right (marked with a very small cairn), which is for the descent. Now a well-worn path rises steeply east, bestowing fabulous views back towards Beinn Ime. Soon the path runs along Beinn Narnain’s southern slopes before veering north-east, through bouldery ground, to reach the summit plateau. A trig sits just east of the large summit cairn. The view of Ben Lomond, The Cobbler and along the length of Loch Long is stunning.

7. Return to the path marked with the small cairn and turn left.

8. Contour the lower slopes of Beinn Narnain, dropping south-west back to the outward-bound path at the base of The Cobbler. Turn left and retrace steps back to Succoth.

What walking gear do I need for this route?

This is a rough and rocky route, with a lot of elevation, so we'd recommend investing in robust kit. Walking boots are an obvious essential, as is a good hiking daypack, a reliable waterproof jacket (essential in Scotland!), an insulating layer, and a pair of quick-drying walking trousers with some packable waterproof overtrousers in your bag.

Depending on the season you walk this route you may need some extra essentials, so check out our hiking gear section for our latest reviews and recommendations.

About the author

Keith Fergus was a passionate walker, writer and photographer whose work has been published across a wide range of national magazines and newspapers. He was also a long-term contributor to LFTO, Trail magazine, Country Walking magazine, the author of his own photographic books, and a renowned cycling tutor.

Keith lived on the outskirts of Glasgow with his family and ran his own photographic business, Scottish Horizons, before he sadly passed away at the age of 49 in 2022.

This route originally appeared in the December 2018 issue of Trail magazine.

Beyond essential pieces of equipment, there are the few luxuries and gadgets we allow ourselves, such as camping chairs. What is a simple amenity of home life becomes an expendable luxury on a camping trip or at a festival, and the task of the humble chair is usually relegated to a log or patch of ground.

In line with outdoor gear brands' ability to make camping equipment ever lighter and compact, some camping chairs have now reached the point where they can quite happily fit inside your big rucksack without ejecting your backpacking stove and camping cutlery.

Thanks to developments, it's also a lot easier to pack camping chairs into your boot alongside your family tent or luxuriously comfy camping mattress.

But how do you pick the right one? Well, we've been testing camping kit for decades and on this page you'll find our pick of the best camping chairs on the market right now – with all of them having gone through extensive testing by our review team.

Best camping chairs at a glance:

Best in test: Kelty Low Loveseat

Best value camping chair: Robens Pathfinder

Best lightweight camping chair: Helinox Ground Chair

Best for wild camping and backpacking: Crazy Creek Hex 2.0 Longback Chair

How we test

The camping chairs recommended here have all been tried and tested by various members of the LFTO team over several months – years in some cases. The humble camping chair may seem a bit, well, humdrum but it's a camping staple so it's important to get right.

Our team is made up of people who venture on camping trips with their families and wild camping trips, during which time the chairs in this list have been put through thorough testing. Both types of camping bring their own type of intensity and also demand different types of camping chairs.

So, what we've done here is recommend the very best camping chairs from across the spectrum – from lightweight folding stools to reclining luxury chairs.

Each chair has been tested against four key criteria: comfort, durability, portability and value for money.

Find out more on how we test here.

Editor's note: This article was last updated on 25 June 2026, when we checked our picks were still relevant and removed any products that are no longer available.

The best camping chairs reviewed:

Table: Compare camping chairs

What type of camping chair is best for me?

Camping chairs come in many different designs, so what could suit one person might not suit another. Much of this will come down to whether or not you want something to sit on while backpacking, car camping or at a festival.

If you're wild camping you'll want something as light and compact as possible, given the limitations on space in your backpacking rucksack.

How much you're willing to carry is entirely up to personal preferences, but you certainly wouldn't want to go over 1kg. Sub-500g would be more feasible, but at this weight you're probably going to be looking at a frameless option.

If you're car camping, you've got a lot more space to play with, especially if you're not road tripping as a family. If there's just one or two of you, then you can really go for comfort, as space is of limited concern (depending on car size!).

However, if you're packing the family tent, camping mattresses, kids and everything else, you're once again limited on space (unless you have a roof tent).

In these circumstances you'll need to prioritise what's most important to your trip and how much space you're prepared to hand over to camping chairs. My advice? If you're going for more than a couple of nights, consider investing the money and space in something that's going to increase your comfort.

And then there's festival camping (see our list of the best festival tents here). This can be particularly brutal on kit, so I recommend picking something robust or something that's not so expensive that you'll cry if it breaks.

What to look for in a camping chair

Packed size

Rucksacks still have a finite amount of space, and what sounds like compact may turn out to be not compact enough for you. Rather than simply checking whether a certain chair will fit in your pack, check to see if it'll fit after your rucksack is packed with all your gear. Though, you may be happy attaching the folded chair to the daisy chains on your pack.

If you're car camping, think about how packed your boot was the last time you went camping and consider how much space is going spare – or what you'd be prepared to sacrifice to fit in your fancy new chair.

Weight

As mentioned, we recommend keeping the weight of your chair to less than 1kg (ideally 500g) if you're on a multi-day hike.

If you're car camping then the weight isn't really so important, but consider whether or not you have to park up away from your pitch and carry kit over to it.

Materials

Some lightweight camping chairs still have reasonably durable fabrics and frames. It's important to stick to these because there are plenty of models out there that are lightweight but very flimsy.

The denier of the fabric (written as 400D, for example) denotes how thick a fabric is. The higher the number the more durable it should be, but also the heavier and warmer it becomes.

A lot of brands are now using recycled fabrics in their camping chairs, which is always nice to see, but read the small print to check it's not just a brand's attempt at greenwashing by including 5% recycled materials.

When it comes to frames, you'll typically find steel and aluminium options, both of which can be very strong and durable.

Comfort

This is an important one. After all, it's why you're buying a camping chair in the first place, right? When you're camping there's no sofa to relax on, yet you do a lot of hanging around.

Given that, pick an option that will let you chill out in comfort. There's a bit of a tradeoff between weight and comfort, but try to pick something that's roomy, supportive and cushioned enough for you.

Tight seams can cause pressure points, while thick fabrics can make for a sweaty sit down in the height of summer, so keep your eyes peeled for sections of mesh, which boost ventilation.

Stability

What good is a camping chair if you keep falling off of it? That shouldn't really happen if you're sat still, but options lacking in stability can spit you out into the dirt when reaching for items.

A stable platform helps avoid this from happening and will also deal better with sloping ground.

Pay attention to the feet on the bottom of the frame, too, as narrow ones can sink into soft ground, which you really want to avoid.

Weight limit

All of the camping chairs featured here have a stated weight limit, which gives you an idea of what they can handle.

Most have plenty of capacity, but some cheaper options can have less, so be sure to check. It's probably wise not to push it too close to the limit, either.

About the authors

Deputy editor Rob Slade (above) and former senior writer Chris Williams did the majority of testing and reviewing of the camping chairs featured in this test.

Rob has been spending all of his spare time outdoors for over half of his life, which has seen him camp everywhere from New Zealand (for four weeks) and the Lake District to the Wadi Rum desert in Jordan. Before joining LFTO, he was content editor at 220 Triathlon and editor at Adventure Travel magazine.

Chris spent his childhood doing almost every outdoor sport under the sun. He grew up and trained as a journalist in New Zealand, and was LFTO's senior writer between 2021 and 2024.

Mercifully, the best walking boots for women are no longer just the men's version that has undergone the 'shrink and pink' process. There's now an abundance of female specific hiking boots on the market, which we're pleased to see, as it means wider accessibility to the outdoors for more people.

The reason for the distinction is that generally, women have shorter, narrower feet than men, which means a women's size 7, for example, is a different shape to a men's size 7.

And of course, there are plenty of women who fit men's walking boots better, and vice versa: the specification is a general one. It's all to do with what fits your foot shape best.

Once that's sorted out, there's only the small questions of weight, materials, grip, price and features to get right (see our detailed buying advice for more info).

Luckily, here at Live for the Outdoors we have a team of expert female gear testers who are always keen to test women's specific products.

These are their heartfelt recommendations from years of hiking experience, taking into account all of the above factors.

Keep scrolling down to find the reviews, or you can jump ahead to our comparison table of the best products for an overview of the results.

Best women's walking boots at a glance:

Best women's walking boot overall: Lowa Randir GTX Mid

Runner-up best women's walking boot: Helly Hansen Ascender Mid

Best value women's walking boot: Quechua MH500 Mountain hiking boots

Best lightweight budget boot: Keen Hightrail

Editor's note: This article was last updated on 25 June, when we checked stock and removed two boots that are no longer available.

Best women's walking boots in detail:

Best women's walking boots compared

Take a look below to compare the key stats on the best five women's walking boots we've tested to date.

What to look for in women's hiking boots

Upper material

Good-quality leather boots are typically the most durable and hard-wearing walking boots. But they're often more expensive to buy and take some breaking in.

Synthetic materials provide a lighter, more breathable alternative that dries quickly and often costs less, but they may not stand up as well to rough, abrasive terrain.

Split-leather and fabric hybrids sit in the middle, offering some of the durability of leather without all the weight.

As always, there are exceptions: premium synthetics can be remarkably robust, while some leathers are surprisingly light.

Fit

Fit is arguably the most important factor when buying boots. Your toes should have room to spread naturally and not touch the end of the boot – especially when descending. A thumb’s width at the front is often recommended.

Your heel should stay secure and cupped, with minimal lift. The boot should feel snug but not tight, allowing for sock thickness and any swelling during long walks. Always try boots with the socks you plan to wear, and if possible, walk up and down an incline in-store.

Toe bumper and rand

These components protect both your foot and the boot. A toe bumper shields the front of the boot from impacts with rocks and roots, and they're vital for rocky or technical terrain.

A full rand (a rubber strip around the boot) increases durability and helps prevent delamination and scuffing. It also improves water resistance where the upper meets the sole.

If you walk in rocky areas, scramble, or venture into mountains, these features significantly extend the boot’s lifespan.

Lacing

Lacing determines how effectively you can fine-tune the fit. Look for features like locking eyelets, which let you tighten one part of the boot without affecting the other.

Designs that extend further toward the toes or higher toward the ankle let you customise tightness in different zones. This helps prevent heel lift (a major cause of blisters), and allows swelling room on long days.

Tongue

The tongue is your first line of defence against discomfort and trail debris. On trekking or winter boots, look for tongues that sit high and wrap securely to reduce the chances of snow or water ingress. Good padding protects against lace pressure and keeps the top of the foot comfortable.

Ankle cuff

Higher ankle cuffs are better at keeping out water, mud, and debris. They also aid ankle support. However, lower cuffs are better for boot flexibility, lightness, and agility.

Midsole

The midsole provides the bulk of your boot’s cushioning, shock absorption and underfoot protection. It also plays a major role in how stiff or flexible the boot feels.

More flexible midsoles allow for a natural foot roll, which is better for faster-paced walking. They prioritise agility and comfort over heavy-duty protection.

Stiffer (rigid) midsoles are ideal for uneven, rocky, or mountainous terrain where you need stability and protection underfoot. They help prevent foot fatigue on long days because they don’t bend excessively over sharp edges, scree, or boulders.

Outsole

The outsole is the grippy rubber layer that meets the ground. Its design dramatically changes how well the boot performs in different conditions.

Tread patterns vary: tightly packed, shallow lugs are better for hard-packed paths, while widely spaced, aggressive lugs shed mud efficiently and offer more bite on soft ground.

A blocky heel step helps with downhill braking and stability. This is a key feature for hillwalkers who tackle steep descents regularly.

Rubber compounds differ: softer rubbers grip wet rock well but may wear faster; harder rubbers are durable but can slip on smooth or wet surfaces. Premium brands like Vibram often balance both.

Hiking boot cleaning and care

Despite the intense demands we put on our walking boots, they will last you many years. But only if you know how care for them properly. If you keep the fabrics clean after use, and rejuvenate the waterproofing every so often, your boots will perform better and for longer.

This is good for you because you get better use from your boots and saves you money. And it’s much better for the planet.

About the authors

Fliss Freeborn is a former LFTO staffer who's been on an adventure for her whole life. She lives in Scotland and probably spends more time outdoors in the hills and mountains than she does under a roof.

LFTO digital writer Evie Nichols has been chasing trails around the world since childhood, and has learned the difference between average kit and great kit the hard way. She takes a forensic approach to gear testing from her home on the edge of the Peak District.

Sian Lewis is an award-winning travel and outdoors journalist and author. She writes about her adventures for Lonely Planet, The Telegraph, The Guardian, and the Sunday Times, and edits award-winning blog The Girl Outdoors. Sian has been testing outdoor kit for a decade.

Long days in the hills can be brutal on your knees and ankles – especially when the terrain’s rocky, muddy or just plain unpredictable. Every steep descent sends more strain through your lower joints, and by the time you’re back at the car, you feel the toll. Enter: walking poles (often called trekking poles or hiking poles).

Studies have shown that walking poles can take up to 25% of the weight off your lower joints, when used properly. They also improve balance, help you keep a steady rhythm and can even double as tent poles for ultralight shelters.

That's a big plus on long, steep mountain days. And even for shorter walks, we're complete converts – they're an extremely useful part of your hiking kit, alongside a hiking daysack and walking boots or shoes.

But finding the right trekking poles shouldn’t feel like a full-time job. The market’s crammed with dozens of models that all look vaguely similar but vary wildly in weight, grip shape, locking mechanisms and price. And with some walking poles costing as much as a decent pair of boots, getting it wrong isn’t just annoying – it’s expensive.

So, to help you make the most informed decision possible, we’ve tested and reviewed the best walking poles for 2026 – including carbon, aluminium, collapsible and shock-absorbing models. Read on to find out our top picks.

Jump to: How we tested | Best walking pole reviews | Comparison table | Buying guide

Shortlist: Best walking poles at a glance

Best walking poles overall: Leki Skytera FX Carbon SL

Highly rated: Black Diamond Pursuit Carbon Z

Best budget walking poles: Lifesystems Trekking Poles

Best women's walking poles: Leki Cressida FX Carbon Lady

Best walking poles under £50: Trekology Trek-Z 2.0 Cork

Editor's note: This article was last updated in April 2026, with six new reviews added and the order of products moved around, with the best at the top. We also added a comparison table under the reviews so you can quickly see the results at a glance.

How we tested

The walking poles recommended here were reviewed by two of regular gear testers Matt Jones and James Forrest, with additional reviews from our experienced outdoors team.

Based in Snowdonia National Park, Matt has walked several long-distance backpacking trails in New Zealand, the USA and throughout the UK. James is an experienced hiker, gear tester and published author who's climbed all 1,001 mountains in the UK and Ireland.

To evaluate each pair of walking poles thoroughly, we use them across a wide variety of terrain and conditions. This includes short, steep, and technical trails where balance and precision matter, as well as longer hillwalks and full-day mountain outings that test endurance and reliability.

By using the poles in real outdoor environments rather than controlled test settings, we observe how they perform under genuine load, impact, and fatigue. This approach allows us to identify the situations in which the poles excel, and where their limitations become evident.

When testing these poles, our main criteria were: features, comfort, construction, performance and value. To break this down, we examined: adjustability and length, material, grip type, shock absorption, weight, tip type, straps and packability.

Read more about how we test here.

The best hiking poles in detail

Comparison table

Here you can see a side-by-side comparison of our best-rated hiking poles.

How to choose a set of hiking poles

Length

With pole in hand your elbow should be at a 90° angle. In this position, measure the distance from your hands to the ground and you have your optimum pole length. Opt for a pole that will lengthen 5-10cm up or down either side of this for when you’re ascending or descending.

Materials

Carbon poles are lighter and stiffer, but more expensive and can be prone to snapping when put under horizontal pressure. Aluminium poles are generally cheaper and more durable, but heavier. Some poles combine both materials.

If you're hiking over rocky mountainous terrain, it's probably best to go for a pole which has more aluminium than carbon – especially if you're carrying a large rucksack and really depend on your poles. But if you're fastpacking on less rugged ground and not carrying so much, then a carbon pole might be more well-suited to your needs.

Locking mechanisms

Some walking poles use a twist-lock mechanism, while others have a flip-style lock. A twist-lock normally works by tightening the lower end of the pole. A flip-lock, on the other hand, uses levers to hold the pole in place.

The latter is generally more secure, longer lasting, easier to use and less prone to slippage. They are, on the other hand, slightly heavier. Twist-locks are lighter but more prone to slipping over time, especially in wet weather. They can also be a pain to adjust, needing a lot of tightening to remain in place.

Overall, flip locks are best for heavy use on rugged terrain, whereas twist-locks are suited to lightweight hiking and occasional use.

Collapsing mechanisms

A Z-shaped pole is best for compact travel. Rather than poking out of your hiking backpack, it'll use up space inside the pocket or inner compartment. But make sure that the pocket is actually large enough to hold a collapsed pole.

On the other hand, a telescopic pole is potentially harder to transport – but not if you have a pole holder on the outside your rucksack (as many do). Just be aware that if you're flying somewhere, they'll need to fit in your hold luggage.

Weight

The ideal weight of a walking pole depends on your intended use. An ultralight pole typically weighs between 110-230g (per pole), perfect for trail running or fast hiking.

A standard weight pole weighs around 250g, suiting general use. A heavy duty pole weighs 270g+ and is less likely to let you down on rugged terrain with a heavy load.

Handgrips

There's three main options: foam, cork or rubber designs. Foam is the lightest option, but performs badly in wet weather as it absorbs water. It's soft to touch, but will also absorb moisture from sweaty hands.

Cork is heavier but it's excellent for moisture management, as it wicks sweat or rain and won't become slippery. Rubber is the heaviest option and things can get pretty sticky if it's hot, but it's a durable choice.

Other features

Pole tips are usually made of hardened metal such as tungsten or carbide, housed in a plastic body. You can also get steel tips, which are slightly stronger and more durable.

If you’re walking on roads or very rocky terrain, you can use rubber feet over the tips (these will often come with the poles). Rubber tips also help for avoiding damage to your backpack if you're travelling by plane, but equally you could just tape the tips up for transport.

Wrist straps or slings help prevent poles being dropped. Look out for straps that are padded and adjustable for a boost in comfort.

Baskets are the little round discs near the tip which stop the pole from plunging in the ground. Wider baskets are a good strategy if hiking in snow.

Shock absorption – poles with anti-shock systems use a spring or internal cushioning system to absorb the impact of striking the ground. This is super handy for avoiding overloading your joints, making steep downhills a lot more comfortable.

Make sure there's an on/off switch though, otherwise there'll be less energy transfer when going uphill.

{#h-is-one-or-two-walking-poles-best}

About the author

James Forrest is a prolific peak bagger and long-distance walker who’s one of the most high-profile outdoor writers in the UK. He has been one of our main gear testers for the last few years and has climbed every mountain in the UK and Ireland.

As the former editor of Walk magazine and Scouting magazine, Matt Jones is one of the most respected names in the UK outdoor industry. Now a freelance journalist based in the heart of Snowdonia National Park, he’s a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek.

Running on a sunny day is a thing of beauty, but squinting for several hours because of the sun can be damn annoying. And on the flip side, so is water streaming into your eyes when running in the rain. That's where running caps come in, as they can protect your face from both troubles.

We all know that getting the right gear can be a total game changer in the trail running world. The first time you actually fall in love with a pair of trail running shoes is just an awesome feeling. We've had a similar experience testing out these running caps.

While running caps are crucial for protecting your eyes (our list of the best running sunglasses will help with that too) and face from harmful sun rays, they're also an excellent aid for temperature regulation and sweat wicking. We found that the best caps were able to draw plenty of moisture away from our foreheads, keeping our skin cool and our eyes free of evil salty sweat invasions.

If it fits well, a running cap can also increase comfort – as many of us found it preferable to wear one over having ever-increasingly wet hair become more and more annoying. Oh, and if it rains, as it usually does, they keep water out of your eyes, too.

Shortlist: Best running caps and hats at a glance

Best running cap overall: The North Face Summer Lt Run

Runner-up: Rab Talus 5 Panel Cap

Best value running cap: Buff CoolNet UV Pack Speed Cap

Best waterproof running cap: Montane Phase Lite

Best for face coverage: Inov8 Active Cap

Best running visor: Compressport Ultralight Visor

Editor's note: This article was updated on 24 June 2026, where we checked products were still available to buy and added in eight new reviews.

How we tested

These caps were tested by digital writer Milo Wilson, the current steward of LFTO's trail running section, and LFTO deputy editor Rob Slade.

Milo has been a full time gear tester since he graduated uni in 2021, and has been through more hats than you've had hot dinners. As a runner, he prioritises distance over speed and often spends entire summer Sundays plodding trails.

Rob has been testing and reviewing gear professionally for over 11 years, but has been running and hiking for double that. He went bald in 2019, so running caps couldn't be more important to him.

The caps featured here have been tested extensively in real-world conditions, including blazing sunshine and rain. When testing we consider a specific set of criteria, which in this case is: construction (including build quality, weight, peak design), comfort, performance (such as sun protection and moisture wicking) and value for money.

Each criteria get's scored out of five and then we take a mean average to work out the overall rating.

For more detailed insight on how we review, see our how we test page.

The best running caps and hats reviewed:

What should I look for when choosing a running cap?

When choosing a running cap, focus on three key aspects: fit, fabric, and functionality. The fit is crucial because a cap that's too tight will be uncomfortable, while one that's too loose may shift around or even fly off in windy conditions. Look for adjustable options like buckle or hook-and-loop closures that allow you to fine-tune the fit on the go.

Fabric is another important factor. Opt for lightweight, moisture-wicking materials like polyester or polyamide blends, which help keep sweat at bay and dry quickly after a long run. Many caps also incorporate mesh panels for added breathability, which can be a lifesaver during those hot summer runs.

Functionality includes features like a dark underbrim to reduce glare, reflective details for low-light visibility and a packable design if you want to stow your cap mid-run.

Some caps also offer UV protection or insect-repellent fabric, which can be particularly useful for trail running in exposed or buggy areas. Ultimately, choose a cap that matches the conditions you’ll be running in most often.

Are running caps useful?

Absolutely, running caps are more than just a stylish accessory – they're a functional piece of gear that can enhance your running experience.

A good running cap shields your eyes from the sun, reducing glare and helping you maintain focus on the trail ahead. It also offers protection against harmful UV rays, which is particularly important on long runs where sunscreen alone might not suffice.

Beyond sun protection, running caps help with sweat management. Many are designed with moisture-wicking fabrics and built-in sweatbands to keep sweat from dripping into your eyes, which can be a real nuisance during a tough run. Caps with mesh panels offer additional ventilation, helping to keep you cool when the temperature rises.

In cooler weather or light rain, a running cap can also provide some insulation and protection, keeping your head warm and dry without the need for a heavier hat. All in all, a running cap is a versatile tool that can enhance comfort and performance in various conditions.

Which material is best for a running cap?

The best material for a running cap is typically a lightweight, moisture-wicking fabric like polyester or a polyester-elastane blend. Polyester is popular because it’s durable, quick-drying, and does a great job at pulling sweat away from your skin, keeping you dry and comfortable during your run.

A touch of elastane in the fabric mix adds stretch, enhancing the fit and making the cap more adaptable to different head shapes.

Polyamide, also known as nylon, is another excellent option. It’s similarly lightweight and breathable, and it often feels softer and more comfortable against the skin.

Can I use a regular cap for running?

While you can use a regular cap for running, it’s not ideal. Regular caps, like those made from heavy cotton, lack the moisture-wicking and quick-drying properties that make running caps so effective. They tend to absorb sweat, becoming heavy and uncomfortable as your run progresses. Cotton caps also hold onto heat, which can make you overheat on a hot day.

Running caps, on the other hand, are specifically designed to handle the demands of running. They’re lightweight, breathable, and typically feature fabrics that manage moisture better, keeping you cool and dry. They also tend to have adjustable fits and functional features like reflective details, mesh panels, and UV protection, which you won’t find in a standard cap.

So, while a regular cap might do in a pinch, investing in a good running cap will make a noticeable difference in your comfort and performance.

About the authors

Milo Wilson is a digital content writer for LFTO. Put him outside and he's happy, much like a golden doodle. As a full-time gear tester, he's always getting stuck in and making sure we only recommend the best kit. He's been testing outdoor kit for four years.

Rob Slade is LFTO's deputy editor. He's been running and hiking for two decades and reviewing gear professionally since 2015. He previously worked at 220 Triathlon as content editor and was editor of Adventure Travel magazine before that.

The Coleman Galiano 4 looks, at first glance, like a fairly low-slung pop-up tent. But step inside and it has a little more going on than its stout exterior suggests.

This is a four-person FastPitch pop-up tent built for festivals, quick campsite stopovers and warm-weather weekends where faffing about with poles is absolutely not the vibe. It springs into shape almost instantly, has a surprisingly roomy floorplan and, best of all, comes with a large mesh roof panel that makes it one of the airiest pop-up tents I’ve tested this summer.

It’s not perfect, of course. The four-person capacity is optimistic, the pegs are thin, there’s no porch and the adjustable roof cover feels more summer-friendly than stormproof. But if you’re after a quick, spacious tent for fair-weather camping, this is a really likeable option.

Let’s get into the full review.

Pop-up pitching and packing away

Pitching the Coleman Galiano 4 is about as easy as pop-up pitching gets. Remove it from the circular carry case, unhook the elasticated strap that holds everything together and the whole thing springs into its finished shape almost immediately.

I knew it would be quick, obviously, but I was still impressed by how instantly it went from big round disc to actual shelter. There are no loose poles to insert, no sleeves to feed and no colour-coded clips to ponder while your friends stand nearby making unhelpful comments.

Once it has popped into shape, you simply peg it down and tension the guylines. The tent comes with its own pegs, but these are very thin and light. That helps keep the overall package fairly manageable, but I’d be wary of bending them in hard or stony ground.

The main roof cover is separate from the mesh roof beneath. It attaches on one side using thin elasticated bungee cords, then hooks down on the opposite side using plastic hooks, also on bungee cord. This makes the setup extremely simple, but it doesn’t give you much scope for fine-tuning the tension.

There are two guylines at either end of the roof cover and an internal Velcro tab that wraps around the pole frame to help hold everything in place. It’s an easy system and, in calm summer weather, it works well. But it doesn’t feel like the sort of setup I’d want to trust in a proper storm.

Packing the Galiano 4 away is, inevitably, the more mysterious part of the process. Like most pop-up tents, it requires a little faith, a bit of twisting and at least one moment where you wonder whether you’re about to snap the whole thing in half.

That said, this one folds away fairly smoothly once you know the basic technique. It helps to have a second person keeping one side pinned down while you twist and fold the footprint back into its circular shape. Once folded, the elasticated strap attached to the underside of the tent can be hooked over the disc to keep it under control while you fetch the carry case.

For a more detailed walkthrough, take a look at our guide on how to fold a pop-up tent.

Internal space and tent shape

From the outside, you might not expect the Coleman Galiano 4 to have much headroom. It looks extremely stout, but that’s mostly because the familiar pop-up tent shape has been scaled up for a four-person model.

Inside, the 100cm (39.4in) peak height is surprisingly usable. I’m 6ft 1in and could sit up comfortably in the middle of the tent, even when attempting my best over-eager pupil in assembly posture. It’s still a tent for sleeping and lounging rather than standing, but for a pop-up design it feels nicely open.

The official internal dimensions are 280cm (110.2in) long and 200cm (78.7in) wide. Coleman’s diagrams show four campers lying widthways across the tent and, at 6ft 1in, I found this just about achievable in the centre. The problem is that the footprint narrows towards either side, so fitting four adults in that way would be a squeeze.

You could top and tail more creatively, Charlie Bucket’s grandparents style, and I don’t think four people is impossible. But four people plus four people’s worth of gear is a more complicated question. That will depend on the campers, the size of the bags and everyone’s tolerance for being packed in like soft, snoring luggage.

Realistically, I’d use this as a roomy two-person tent or a serviceable three-person tent, then keep the spare space for kit. It’s not designed for backpackers carrying 50L packs into the hills, but for a summer festival or casual campsite trip, there’s a useful amount of internal room. For more purpose-built three-berth options, see our guide to the best three-man tents.

There’s no porch, so wet shoes, backpacks and general camping clutter all have to come inside with you unless the weather is good enough to leave them outside. That’s fairly normal for this style of pop-up tent, but it does reduce the practical living space.

The structure itself feels more robust than many pop-up tents I’ve tested. The sewn-in groundsheet feels particularly reassuring under bare feet and doesn’t have the same flimsy, crinkly feel you sometimes get from cheaper festival tents. The walls also feel surprisingly substantial.

The roof cover has elasticated ends, a little like a fitted sheet, which are designed to wrap over the sides of the tent. I found these slightly fiddly and had to adjust them a few times after they pinged back out of position. But when everything is hooked properly, the tension lifts the pole frame slightly and gives the tent a touch more height and shape.

Waterproofing, wind resistance and breathability

Coleman gives the Galiano 4 a 2,000mm hydrostatic head waterproof rating, and the tent has taped seams, a PU-coated polyester fabric and a fully integrated welded PE groundsheet. On paper, that’s a decent set of stats for a pop-up tent aimed at festivals and weekend camping.

In practice, I’d still describe this as a fair-weather tent. The roof cover gives you protection over the huge mesh panel, but it isn’t the same as a fully tensioned, storm-ready flysheet. It attaches easily and creates useful coverage, but the fabric feels thin and the elasticated fixing system leaves plenty of space for wind to get underneath it.

That creates a bit of a double-edged sword. In warm, calm conditions, the design is excellent. Even with the roof cover in place, air can still move beneath it and through the mesh roof, helping the tent feel fresh and breathable. In unsettled weather, that same openness could make the cover vulnerable to being lifted or pulled around by gusts.

The roof panel is still my favourite feature, though. With the cover removed or rolled back, the large mesh skylight makes the whole tent feel extremely airy. I tested it during the June 2026 heatwave and could actually enjoy sitting inside it, which is not something I can say for every pop-up tent I’ve used this summer.

On a dry, hot night, I’d be very tempted to leave the roof cover off entirely for maximum ventilation and potential stargazing. Obviously that’s a gamble you’d only want to take with a reliable forecast, and possibly not at a festival where the light pollution is doing its level best to erase the concept of stars altogether.

With the roof cover in place, the way it sits over the pole frame also creates useful de facto vents. It doesn’t clamp down tightly against the tent body, which would be a problem in a storm, but in warm weather it helps the Galiano 4 retain its standout airiness.

The seams are a mixed picture. Some are smoothly taped, while other areas still show exposed stitching. That shouldn’t be a huge issue in the kind of dry, settled conditions this tent is best suited to, but it reinforces the sense that this is not a tent for sustained poor weather.

Wind resistance is also limited by the shape and roof setup. The tent feels structurally sound once pegged and guyed, but the high, broad surface area and separate roof cover mean I wouldn’t be rushing to use it on a blustery campsite. For calm festivals, garden camping and sunny weekends away, it makes much more sense.

Weight and packed size

The Coleman Galiano 4 has a listed packed weight of 3.3kg (7lb 4.4oz), which is pretty reasonable for a four-person pop-up tent. It’s not hiking kit, and nobody is strapping this to a pack for a long walk into the hills, but it’s manageable enough for short carries from the car to the pitch.

As with most pop-up tents, the packed shape is more of an issue than the weight. The Galiano 4 folds into a large circular disc with a listed packed size of 90cm (35.4in) in diameter. That’s awkward rather than heavy.

In a car, it’s simple enough. You can slide it into a boot or lay it flat with the rest of your camping kit. On public transport, it becomes a more annoying proposition. You could take it to a festival by train or coach, but you’d be very aware of the big circular thing hanging off your shoulder at every turnstile, doorway and crowded platform.

The carry case is useful, and the attached elasticated strap on the tent itself makes the final packing stage less chaotic. Once you’ve wrestled the tent back into its circular form, it’s relatively easy to hold everything together and get it back into the bag.

Features

The standout feature here is the adjustable roof system. The Galiano 4 has a large mesh roof panel that can be covered using the separate roof sheet, giving you the choice between maximum ventilation and extra weather protection.

It’s a brilliant idea for warm-weather camping. With the cover open or removed, the tent feels noticeably more breathable than most simple pop-up designs. With the cover attached, you still get a good amount of airflow thanks to the gap between the cover and the tent body.

The main entrance uses a roll-up door, with a double-layer design that lets you balance privacy, ventilation and insect protection. That’s exactly what you want from a festival or summer campsite tent, especially when hot weather can turn a sealed-up tent into a polyester punishment chamber.

Inside, there’s a hanging pocket with enough room for valuables, snacks, a head torch or the other small bits you inevitably lose in a tent. The only downside is the enormous warning label hanging from it, which slightly dominates the feature visually, but that’s hardly a dealbreaker.

The Galiano 4 also has Coleman’s usual practical tent features, including fibreglass poles, fire-retardant fabric, taped seams and a sewn-in groundsheet. The construction feels better than the cheapest pop-up tents, particularly underfoot, where the groundsheet has a sturdier feel than some rivals.

The pegs are less impressive. They’re light, thin and easy to carry, but I’d consider swapping them out or at least taking spares if I expected hard ground or a busy campsite where guyline tension actually mattered.

Verdict

The Coleman Galiano 4 is a spacious, breathable and impressively quick-pitching pop-up tent that feels better made than many festival-style rivals.

Its four-person capacity is optimistic, and I wouldn’t choose it for rough weather, but for hot summer weekends, festivals and casual campsite trips, it’s a really appealing option. I’d use it for two or three people, keep the extra space for kit and enjoy the excellent ventilation.

If you need more living space, better storage and more forgiving family-camping comfort, take a look at our guide to the best family tents. For smaller, more technical options, take a look at our list of the best two-person tents.

See how the Coleman Galiano 4 compares with the other models in our guide to the best pop-up tents.

About the author

Milo Wilson is a staff writer at Live for the Outdoors and a regular outdoor gear tester. He spends most of his working life testing trail running, hiking and camping kit, often in conditions that make him question his career choices, his footwear choices and occasionally the entire concept of weather.

What does your perfect day out look like? For some, it’s an epic all-day hike over multiple mountains. For others, it’s getting a few miles in and then heading back to town for some downtime with friends or family.

Whichever category you fall into, you’ll probably want your gear and clothing to look as good as it performs. And who can blame you?

The lines between town and trail are blurring, with down jackets and outdoor shoes starting to pop up in our towns and cities almost as often as they do in the countryside.

This brings a lot of benefits. For one, outdoor brands are putting more effort into making their kit look better. But they’re also making sure practicality works just as well around town as it does on the mountain.

If you like kit that can effortlessly work in both environments, you’ll be pleased to hear that this sort of gear has a new home: Blacks. I say new, but the truth is Blacks has been helping people get kitted out for adventure for over 160 years.

The outdoor retailer began by crafting sails, before progressing into tents and expedition kit. This summer it’s gone through a reawakening. It’s still home to reliable outdoor kit, but it’s also evolved into a place where you can find a curated selection of gear that blends style, comfort and practicality.

You’ll see that evolution on the website, but also across reimagined Blacks Pinnacle stores in Glasgow, Harrogate, Aintree, Meadowhall and Brighton. These are now dedicated spaces where technical innovation meets the best of modern design – somewhere you can get a boot fitting one minute and browse clothes for your weekend away the next.

Blacks’ purpose is simple – ‘to help people reconnect with the feeling of stepping outside’. Having the right kit definitely helps with that, and it’s even easier when you have experts curating it for you.

To help turn that message into something tangible, the Blacks team sent over a box of hand-picked kit. Opening it up gave me a glimpse into how style and performance can work together effortlessly. Below, I’ll take you through some of that kit and make some additional recommendations of gear that works in both worlds.

Key kit for going from town to trail

New for spring and summer 2026, SILVA has released new foldable, telescopic and fixed-length poles – as well as two new colourways in its Strive running vests

The Swedish brand behind the world's first liquid-filled compass is continuing to expand and innovate premium gear for outdoor enthusiasts, launching new adventure-ready equipment for spring and summer 2026. Here’s everything you need to know about SILVA’s new launches.

New running vest colours

For the past few years, SILVA’s Strive running vest collection has built a loyal customer base among trail, mountain and ultra runners. Available in 3L, 5L and 10L versions, the Strive vests deliver streamlined comfort, a secure bounce-free fit, top-notch breathability and intuitive storage solutions – or, in other words, everything you could possibly need for your running exploits.

And now, new for 2026, SILVA has released two new on-trend colourways across the full 3L, 5L and 10L range. There are no plain blacks or muted greens with this new line. Instead it’s all about bright and confident styling.

The first new colour, Butter Yellow, taps into “one of the biggest lifestyle trends of the past year”. As one of the most popular shades of the past 12 months, SILVA believes the bold yellow colourway will be a “natural choice for runners who want performance kit that also feels design‑led”.

The second new colour, Sky Blue, reflects the rise of calm, nature‑inspired tones dominating athleisure and outdoor styling, offering a fresh, versatile option for everyday training.

Both new shades give runners more ways to colour match their vest with clothing and footwear, while enjoying the same lightweight, breathable performance the Strive series is known for.

New poles for hiking and running

When it comes to SILVA’s range of outdoor poles, it’s not just new colour schemes that land in 2026. Instead, the brand has launched a complete new range of foldable, telescopic and fixed-length poles designed for running, speed trekking, alpine adventures and walking. The new collection focuses on lightweight materials, compact foldable designs and ergonomic cork handles.

It also focuses on SILVA’s innovative Blueberry glove and strap system. In essence, this system is a quick-release glove and wrist strap attachment designed for trail running and trekking poles. It allows users to instantly click their hands on or off their poles without removing their gloves, optimising energy transfer and easing technical trail transitions as terrain and intensity varies.

Designed for competent performance across all terrains, from steep alpine slopes to day hikes, SILVA confidently promises the new SS26 pole collection “combines performance, durability and convenience for every outdoor enthusiast”.

Top 6: SILVA’s best new products

Let’s say you’re hiking somewhere remote, say in the Highlands, and you’ve broken your foot, cut yourself on your walking pole or slipped with your penknife. There’s a deep gash; it’s a life-threatening bleed.

You've only got one of those little red first aid kits with you. But a plaster isn’t going to help much now. Tim Bradshaw – former military Intelligence Officer, Everest summiteer and first aid professional – asks me to guess how long you’d have until you become, in his words, "unrecoverable". 15 minutes? “You’ve got two and a half minutes easy,” he says.

It sounds unlikely – and it’s definitely grisly – but according to Tim, these situations happen more than we expect. "It actually happens all the time," he says. "Mountain biking, it happens weekly." And everyone thinks 'that won't happen to me', until it does. But, as Tim explains, we need to be more self-reliant: mountain rescue could be hours away. “There’s not a mountain rescue team in the country that’s getting to you in two and a half minutes”, he tells me.

So what should hikers actually know – and do – about wilderness first aid? As the operations director of the Vango Save a Life Programme, Tim has spent a lot of time thinking about this question. Here are some dangerously common myths – and how to get it right.

First aid myths debunked

Myth 1: Your standard first aid kit will save your life

That little red kit available in most outdoor shops is designed for minor scrapes, burns and blisters – not life-threatening emergencies. "There is nothing in there that would save your life. Nothing." It's not that the kit is wrong, Tim says – it’s still worth carrying. But it's solving the wrong problem. "It's the wrong tool for the wrong job. Like trying to undo a bolt with a screwdriver."

Myth 2: Mountain rescue will always get to you in time

A life-threatening bleed becomes non-recoverable within minutes – two and a half minutes is Tim's lower estimate. The average mountain rescue response time is difficult to verify as this isn't publicly available information, but Tim's claim that "there's not a mountain rescue team in the country that's getting to you in two and a half minutes" is almost irrefutable. That means we need to be a lot more self-reliant than we might expect.

Myth 3: It’s guaranteed that a helicopter can pull you off the side of a mountain

Depending on where you are, and which services are called, it may not be possible to be winched off the mountainside by a helicopter. "There's no winchman on an air ambulance," Tim explains. They can only carry a paramedic or doctor to your location. It’s a different service that does the winching – and their availability is never guaranteed. That means that in a wilderness emergency, it may take a lot longer to get to a hospital than you think. Again, this shows the importance of having the right first aid kit – and knowing how to use it (more on this below).

Myth 4: You could be sued for attempting first aid

A fear of legal liability stops some people from acting in an emergency. But "nobody has ever been sued for doing first aid. Never. It's a myth,” Tim says. The British Red Cross confirms "it is highly unlikely that you will be sued for doing first aid". Tim puts the cost of inaction bluntly: "If you don't have a go, they're gonna die".

What Tim actually recommends

The following reflects Tim Bradshaw's advice as a qualified first aid professional. We'd encourage anyone who wants to act on it to do so via a proper course rather than relying on an article alone – which is exactly what Tim would tell you himself.

Get the right first aid kit. Tim recommends that every hiker should carry a proper pressure bandage and a tourniquet. Both are inexpensive, lightweight and effective. You should also have the training to know how to use them (more on this below). A good survival blanket or emergency shelter is also essential; even if you've managed the first aid correctly, you may be waiting hours for help to arrive. Check out the Save a Life kit for a full list.

Think about where you carry it. This one is easy to overlook. Tim's advice, informed by both military practice and personal experience, is to carry your kit somewhere on your body that you can reach with one hand, alone, if you're injured. "Where's my kit, and how am I carrying it?" he asks. "If I had to get it on my own, could I?"

Know your location. Getting help quickly depends on being able to communicate exactly where you are. Tim recommends the OS Maps app or what3words, and registering your phone to send emergency signals. "The more accurate you can be in transmitting your location to somebody," he says, "that's gonna save your life."

Do a proper course. This is Tim's main recommendation. “People spend loads of money on their camper vans, their Gore-Tex jackets and their boots… I'm not suggesting they shouldn't, but nobody thinks twice about upskilling themselves,” he says. The Vango Save a Life course runs for half a day, takes place outdoors in real scenarios, and focuses on the three skills Tim identifies as life-saving: stopping a bleed, performing CPR, and managing hypothermia.

La Sportiva has always been one of the more off-the-beaten-track brands. I reach for their hiking boots when I'm heading somewhere high up, horrible and slippery, and probably dangerous.

The Italian mountain brand makes climbing shoes, approach shoes, walking boots and trail running shoes, and you can often feel that crossover in its trail footwear. Even when its shoes are designed for running, they rarely feel like road or even road-to-trail shoes; they feel like mountain kit.

The La Sportiva Mutant is a perfect example. This is not a soft, cruisy trail shoe for gentle towpaths, dry woodland tracks or easy park loops. It’s a stable, aggressive mountain running shoe designed for technical terrain, loose ground, mud, steep climbs and awkward descents. It has a recycled AirMesh upper, La Sportiva’s wraparound lacing system, an integrated gaiter, an injection-moulded EVA midsole with a TPU stabiliser and a really aggressive outsole with 6.5mm lugs.

In other words, there’s a lot going on here.

I’ve been testing the Mutant across the Surrey Hills for several months, starting back in winter and carrying on through spring into summer. That gave me a good spread of conditions: soaked clay, claggy woodland mud, steep sandy climbs, damp rooty descents, and enough dry ground to work out whether these things completely lose their charm once the worst of winter is over.

Get this - they don’t! But they are absolutely happiest when the ground is soft and steep. Let's take a closer look.

Upper

The upper is one of the most interesting things about the La Sportiva Mutant. It looks overbuilt at first glance, but it’s much cleverer than that. Rather than a straightforward tongue and lace set-up, the upper pulls apart into overlapping sections, then wraps back around the foot as you tighten it. That makes the shoe nice and easy to step into, despite how secure it feels once it’s on.

It’s a brilliant system. I could open the shoe right up, get my foot in easily, then gradually pull and jiggle the upper into the exact fit I wanted. The FusionGate lacing system uses structural overlays to draw the shoe around the foot, while the integrated tongue/gaiter combo hugs the lower ankle and helps keep debris out. There’s also a small lace garage, which keeps everything tidier once you’re cinched in.

What I like most is how adjustable the whole thing feels. The upper is malleable enough that you can fine-tune pressure across the foot, rather than just yanking the laces tighter and hoping for the best. I found that especially useful on longer runs, where my feet were changing shape slightly with heat, fatigue and terrain. It’s secure, but the material is soft so it doesn't feel like a clamp à la Scarpa.

The laces themselves are slightly elasticated, so you do need to give them a proper tug if you want a firm lockdown. I don’t think that’s a problem, though, because the shoe’s security doesn’t come from the laces alone. The whole upper is built around foot hold. Once the overlapping sections are wrapped into place, the foot feels cradled from the sides, top and rear.

That also makes the fit more accommodating than some La Sportiva shoes like the unforgiving Bushido III. This still isn’t a roomy, sloppy trail shoe, and wide-footed runners should try before they buy if possible. But the adaptable upper means it doesn’t feel as brutally narrow as you might expect from such a precise mountain shoe.

Midsole

The midsole reminds me of my Year 11 PE teacher – really firm, not very flexible, and constantly reminding me to adjust my running gait.

If you’re coming from a modern max-cushioned trail shoe like the new Kailas Fuga EX 330, with a big bouncy slab of superfoam underfoot, the Mutant will feel almost blunt at first. There’s no plush sink, no obvious spring and no easy rolling momentum on flat ground.

On hard-packed paths, it can feel a bit joyless. It doesn’t give you that soft, forgiving ride you might want for long steady miles, and there's no real 'rocker' to speak of. There is cushioning here, but it’s protective and controlled rather than soft.

That sounds like a criticism, but it’s also the point of the shoe. The Mutant’s injection-moulded EVA midsole and TPU stabiliser create an extraordinarily stable platform. The shoe feels planted, precise and resistant to twisting, which matters far more when you’re moving quickly over awkward ground than it does when you’re jogging down a canal path.

That makes it particularly good on technical climbs. On steep, muddy or sandy gradients, I felt like I could dig in and keep moving rather than fighting the shoe. The higher 8mm drop also suits that mountain-running feel. Combined with the firm midsole and aggressive outsole, it helps create a strong, forward-driving platform on climbs and descents.

It doesn’t smooth everything out, and you’re not isolated from the trail in the way you might be in a Hoka Speedgoat or another high-stack shoe. But that closeness is part of the Mutant’s approach – you can feel the ground, trust the platform and make quick adjustments without the shoe feeling tall or vague.

Outsole

Naturally, this is the star of the show. La Sportiva uses its FriXion XF 2.0 rubber here, paired with an Impact Brake System and deep V-Groove tread. In plain English, it's some very sticky rubber with aggressive lugs in a pattern designed to bite on climbs and slow you down on descents.

The lugs are brilliant. They’re deep, widely spaced and shaped a bit like little U-shaped claws, which makes them excellent at grabbing loose mud, soft dirt and sandy trails. They really come alive on climbs. You can feel them biting into the ground as you push off and up, which gives the whole shoe a sharp, attacking feel.

The Impact Brake System is also well suited to descending. The rear-facing lug geometry helps the shoe bite when you’re braking downhill, which adds a lot of confidence on slippery slopes. On steep 'n' slippy descents in the Surrey Hills, the Mutant felt composed and secure, with enough bite to keep me moving properly rather than tiptoeing my way down.

At first, I wondered whether the outsole would be too specialised for anything except constantly undulating fell-style terrain. It isn’t. Provided the ground is soft underfoot, the Mutant actually runs more smoothly over flatter sections than I expected. It’s not silky or relaxed, but the tread doesn’t feel as clunky as it does on the road, which, it does suck on the road.

The lugs and shoe overall are much happier when they’re on the move. Walking around or even hiking in the Mutant feels a bit uncomfortable - landing on your heel always feels like you've got the breaks on. Start running and leaning forward, though, and the whole package makes sense. The upper locks you in, the midsole keeps you stable and the outsole lets you cut and push as hard as you can.

The rubber grips well on rock too, particularly damp or mixed rock where the sticky compound can do its thing. But I wouldn’t call the Mutant especially comfortable underfoot on rocky tracks. It’s secure rather than forgiving. If your route involves long stretches of hard stone, slab or compacted rocky path, a softer or more cushioned shoe will feel kinder.

Price and competition

The La Sportiva Mutant has an RRP of £155 ($185), which puts it in a competitive but fairly normal place for a premium technical trail shoe. It isn’t cheap, but it doesn’t sit in the eye-watering super-shoe bracket either. Given the construction, outsole and mountain-specific design, the price feels reasonable.

The obvious comparison is the Salomon Speedcross 6. Both shoes are aggressive, grippy and well suited to soft ground, but the Mutant feels more mountain-focused and more secure through the upper. The Speedcross is the more familiar mud-shoe option, and it’s probably easier to recommend to a wider range of runners. The Mutant feels more specialised and more technical.

In La Sportiva’s own range, the Bushido III is the neater, lower-profile technical option, while the Jackal II is a better choice for longer runnable days where cushioning and comfort matter more. You can compare more options for long-distance terrain in our guide to the best ultra trail running shoes. The Mutant sits between those ideas. It’s more aggressive and rough-ground-ready than the Jackal, but more run-focused and mud-hungry than many approach-shoe-adjacent technical models.

Verdict

The La Sportiva Mutant is a brilliant trail running shoe for difficult terrain, adverse conditions and runners who want to move fast when the ground gets messy. It’s firm, secure, aggressive and incredibly confidence-inspiring on mud, loose climbs, steep descents and varied mountain-style terrain.

It doesn’t make you faster by bouncing you forward or saving your legs with luxurious cushioning. It makes you faster by letting you trust your feet. You can cut harder, climb more decisively and descend with more confidence.

For technical trail running, winter training, muddy hill sessions, fell-style routes and rough off-road adventures, the La Sportiva Mutant is an absolute weapon.

See how the La Sportiva Mutant compares with the other models in our guide to the best trail running shoes.

About the author

Milo Wilson is our self-styled trail running guru and the man who decides which shoes make it into the roundups. When he's not at his desk, he's crashing into cows on the winding trails of the Surrey Hills where he has made his home. Milo's been writing for LFTO since the spring of 2023.

If you’re a glass half-empty hiker, you may see the Northern Fells as featureless, grassy slopes. If you’re a glass half-full walker, you’ll see them for what they are; rolling, colourful hills of remote paradise. Alfred Wainwright dedicated his pictorial guide to the Northern Fells to ‘the solitary wanderers on the fells, who find contentment in the companionship of the mountains.’

As the Lake District grows in popularity, the fells are becoming busier places, with the National Park receiving over 18 million visitors each year. This statistic is positive to most, yet daunting to the lover of secluded walks. As selfish as it may sound, there are days where we desire mountain tops to ourselves.

The Northern Fells are a sanctuary to escape the crowds, hidden gems for the lone wanderer. A barren place like no other in Lakeland, where you can drift across the hills without passing another soul. There are parts of the Northern Fells that offer something Blencathra and Skiddaw cannot in this modern day… solitude.

As I drive down the A66 into the northern Lake District, Blencathra dominates the view. It’s easy to understand how by-passers may be unaware of the hills that hide behind. It takes over the landscape, demanding to be seen. Like many others, I’m guilty of sticking to my comfort zone when walking and hiking primarily in the central, popular fells.

Yet today, there’s something exciting about trying a new place. I turn behind Blencathra, following a signpost for Mungrisdale. It is instantly clear, driving down deserted and winding roads towards Back ‘o’ Skiddaw, that this is desolate territory. A place undiscovered by many and explored by few. I don’t experience my usual problem of finding a parking spot, because there are no other cars in sight. Even my little Honda looks lonely here.

Purple peaks

Our route starts at Mosedale. It is quiet. To some, the silence and isolation may be unsettling. To others, it’s perfect for a mind-clearing walk. It’s an escape. An escape from society, everyday pressures and a chance to disappear from the world for a day or two.

The main thing that instantly strikes me is how amazingly vibrant the scenery is. Colours of fall dominate the landscape, with flowering, purple heather blanketing the slopes. Trees are dotted with autumn red berries and the grass folds between green and golden brown.

I don’t want to return to reality. High up in these hills, you feel free

The immediate and steep ascent to our first destination of Carrock Fell is rewarded, as the beauty of the Northern Fells is instantly revealed through a narrow waterfall meandering down to the valley below. The further I explore, the more I feel this place doesn’t get the credit it deserves. The hills are packed with picturesque gills, quaint wooden footbridges, wide views and silent summits. The sheep are our only companions, and muddy footprints are the only evidence of walkers here before us.

Historic hills

The sun is blazing strongly. The day is bright and clear; the cloudless blue sky treating us to big views. As the summit becomes closer, we roam through scattered pieces of stone, as if a wall has fallen across our path. Carrock Fell turns out to be quite historic, with the stone pieces thought to be part of an old Iron Age hill-fort. Archaic remains and rubble are prominent features in these fells due to the smelt mining industry once present here. It’s hard to imagine this now so desolate area being filled with industry.

The sight of the first summit cairn gives me that inspiring push to the top. Made it. And what a view. Unique to the Northern Fells, the best view is away from main Lakeland. Cross Fell in the Northern Pennines, the Eden valley, the hazy Solway Firth… you can see it all from here.

As much as I probably could, the big walk ahead means I can’t stand gawking at these views all day. The route we follow ticks off four Wainwrights, yet as we saunter through these hills, the tick-list becomes irrelevant. Enjoying the journey and immersing into the landscape all of a sudden seems a better aim. Take your time here; some of the most rewarding views are gained when you look back.

Wet feet

As we approach High Pike, the dry walk takes a turn as I hear the dreaded ‘squelch’ of bog beneath my feet, the ground adamant not to release my shoe. Making the best of pesky terrain, I discover jumping from one spongy moss to another is the best way forward (and good fun too). Back on a rocky gravel path surrounded by wild, untamed tufts of grass, the terrain becomes much more comfortable. Conveniently, the Cumbria Way cuts through these mountains, appearing from time to time.

A most-loved peak of local Sir Chris Bonington, the most northerly fell of High Pike holds a unique prize at its summit. Much to our surprise, the hilltop provides the luxury of admiring the surroundings with a seat. The evidence of man looks almost out of place here. The slate seat is a memorial, reading ‘Mick Lewis, who loved all these fells.’ A touching sentiment, which I’m sure relates to everyone who has experienced that mountain moment, wherever it may be.

En route to Knott, we stop and enjoy another luxury of eating our sandwiches with shelter and a view, sat inside the newly refurbished Great Lingy Hut bothy. It may be basic, but the same cannot be said about the view. At 600m high, the hut window looks over the beautiful Mosedale valley, almost like a painting hung up on the wooden walls. A perfect scene to wake up to in the morning and the perfect out-in-the-sticks sanctuary to spend the night on this outback adventure.

We reach the summit of Knott, spotting our first human companion, with whom we share our highest point of the day. We share little conversation though, as he lies back on the summit cairn with headphones on and head buried in a book. His aim probably like ours; to cut off from the world. The views open up here, through to Bassenthwaite Lake and the standalone fell Binsey in the distance.

End in sight

Our final destination is in sight; the suitably named Great Calva. It really does look great from here, probably the most prominent, pointed peak of the day. Thirlmere Reservoir makes an appearance to the south, nested between the mountains as we approach the summit. Great Calva’s cairn is a messy mixture of rock and twisted metal. Looking past the summit structure over to Skiddaw, I see the famous mountain at a brilliant angle exclusive to the Northern Fells.

The end is approaching, and I don’t want to return to reality. High up in these hills, you feel free. The worries of the world below cannot reach you. As I (reluctantly) begin to descend, the walk back reveals one of the most beautiful parts of the day. Following the meandering River Caldew back through the valley, I look back into the sun beginning to disappear behind the mountains. The hillside turns golden, the river glistens and I feel warm inside. Until next time.

Northern Highlights

Three icons of the Northern Fells you have to visit

Bowscale Tarn

From the start of our route at Mosedale, you can take a short walk along to the hamlet of Bowscale, following the signpost up towards Bowscale Tarn. The water rests in a tranquil bowl hidden below Bowscale Fell. An easy walk up to a perfect spot for a relaxing, lazy day in the mountains.

Bakestall and Dash Falls

Tick off another Wainwright peak in the north by hiking up featureful Bakestall. From Peterhouse Farm, the Cumbria Way path winds around this mountain, passing the beautiful cascades of Dash Falls (above). The walk towards this fell can be considered more rewarding than the summit itself. You can hear the waterfall roaring through the silent valley miles before you see it. The falls descend from Skiddaw Forrest and Wainwright ever so rightly describes this scene as ‘the finest spectacle of its kind in the district.’

Skiddaw House

The Cumbria Way footpath meanders over a quaint stone footbridge at the top of Dash Falls, leading to YHA Skiddaw House (though we should point out the hostel can be accessed from numerous routes). Live amongst the wilderness for a night, high up at 1550ft, in the highest hostel in England. Surrounded by mountains in a landscape with an almost Scottish-like atmosphere, this 1800s lodge hides away in the folds of Skiddaw Forrest. Without signal and limited electricity, you can completely cut off from the world here.

The all-new SunGod Forty2s might have launched on 13 May, but eagle-eyed spectators may well have seen them in the coverage of the London Marathon.

That’s because they were worn by fastest Brit Mahamed Mahamed, plus elite runners Anya Culling and Phil Sesemann, to name a few.

If they’re good enough for the pros, they should be good enough for us, right? Well, I’ve been testing them for the past couple of weeks to find out if they truly belong among the best running sunglasses.

Sungod itself is still a relatively young brand, having only launched in 2013, but in the 12 years since it’s gone from strength to strength. The brand’s range covers everything from running and cycling sunglasses, right the way through to casual styles.

You’ll also spot them on the faces of some of the world’s best athletes, including the McLaren F1 team, some of England’s cricketers and world-class cycling teams such as the INEOS Grenadiers.

Design

As for the Forty2s themselves, well, SunGod says they’re “inspired by the marathon distance yet designed for every runner”. They’re named after the length of a marathon in kilometres and are slated to “buck the modern industry trend of bigger and bolder lens shapes”, too.

Admittedly, that last claim feels a bit of a stretch to me. I’ve reviewed dozens of performance sunglasses from the worlds of triathlon, cycling and running, which have come in all shapes and sizes.

Yes, there are a lot of oversized options, but they’re not actually that much taller than the height of the Forty2s. The latter are roughly 5mm shorter than some of those (such as the Oakley Sutro), which isn’t exactly a huge difference.

That being said, the SunGods don’t necessarily feel or look particularly large when worn. They’re certainly not small or slimline by any standard, but do they feel oversized.

The one-piece lens is held in place by the upper frame, which is made from 100% recycled material. This, SunGod says, reduces the carbon impact by seven times compared to virgin plastic. The packaging is also recycled and recyclable, so bonus points there.

In the top of corners of the lens, you’ll also find small-ish vents to help avoid any fogging while working hard. Do they work? Well, I’ve not had any issues to date,

On my scales they weigh in at 27g. That’s the same as the more casual, full-framed SunGod Tempests and more or less equal to the SunGod Ultras, too.

Fit and comfort

One thing that I’ve always appreciated about SunGod products is that they normally come with alternative nose pieces, and that’s the case here.

During my first few test runs I found the rubber nose bridges sat very close to the corner of my eyes. In fact, I think it sat on the corner of my eye, as it felt like it was touching my tear duct.

A switch to the medium-sized nose piece helped a bit, but I needed to use the smallest nose piece to really solve this issue.

With this in situ, and the glasses pushed as far back as they went, my eyes were clear but my eyelashes would occasionally graze the back of the lens. A minor readjustment solved this, though, leaving me with a trouble-free experience from then on.

Given that we all have different shaped faces, you may not experience any of that yourself, but it’s something to keep in mind. It also shows just how useful interchangeable (or adjustable) nose pieces are.

Aside from that, the fit felt pretty perfect. I experienced zero movement on my test runs (even during pacier sets), there was no need for readjustment mid-run and nor were there any pressure points after prolonged use.

Each arm turns down toward the back, while grippy TPU pads help boost that grip we’ve already spoken about.

And for what it’s worth, SunGod class these as unisex sunglasses best suited to medium-sized heads. As someone who wears medium-sized bike helmets, I’d have to agree.

I’d also say that, while you might get away with it if your head is smaller than average, I’d suggest larger heads will end up with unwanted pressure from the arms, which grip onto the side of your head as if they’re spring loaded.

Lens performance

On test here we have the ‘Limited Edition Neon Blue’ frame design, which comes with SunGod’s 8KO smoke lens. This nylon lens delivers 100% UV protection and a visible light transmission of 14%, making it are the darker end of the scale.

The brand rates it at 10/10 for sunny days, 9/10 for intermittently sunny days, 6/10 for cloudy days and 4/10 for rainy days.

After testing them through all types of weather, I’d largely agree with that. As with most sunglasses, you’ll find yourself squinting slightly if running toward a low-slung sun, but aside from that they were ideal on cloudless, sunny days.

The Forty2s also coped diligently with overcast days or when running under trees with dappled light, but they can feel too dark if running under dense, leafy canopies. Things can also feel a bit too dim when those dark, foreboding clouds roll in overhead.

Clarity is very good, though and the size and shape of the lens ensured my eyeballs were free from gusts on breezy days. They even coped better than some cycling sunglasses I’ve previously tested when I wore them on a couple of rides.

The lens wraps around to the side of the eyes to good effect, protecting you from the sunshine even when it’s dropping toward the horizon and hitting you from the left or right.

I should probably also mention that the lens itself is made from precision-engineered 2mm nylon, which SunGod says delivers “unmatched” shatterproof protection. Now, I’ve not been throwing these sunnies on the floor, but the lenses certainly don’t feel flimsy.

Build quality

As the Forty2s come with an upper frame, they’re already going to be more durable than totally frameless designs. That frame feels robust, too,

The arms feature SunGod’s ‘Pop-Lock Screwless snap hinges’, which the brand says are “engineered for exceptional durability and a secure fit”. We’ve already covered that latter point, while nothing so far has suggested to me that the hinges represent a weak point.

They snap in and out of two positions – open and closed – with very minimal movement present when in either state.

Additional features

Aside from the interchangeable nose pieces, which we’ve already covered, there’s not much else in the way of additional features.

You don’t get a case (it costs extra), which always feels like a bit of a miss when you’re spending in excess of £100 on your sunglasses.

Instead, you get a (recycled) cloth storage bag and the cardboard box that they’re shipped in, which I guess you could use when transporting the glasses if you wanted to.

At this point, I’ll also note that you can also swap out the lens for an alternative if you so wish, which start from £30 for a clear lens, £50 for a tinted lens or £90 for a photochromic option.

So, not all that cheap then, but handy if you’ve badly scratched yours and want to replace it and hang onto the frames. Alternatively, a clear option might be handy for dreary days when you want to keep wind/bugs/drizzle out of your eyes.

Verdict

If you want a wraparound style of running sunglasses, the Forty2s have to be up there as a top-tier consideration. They demonstrate exceptional security and so far feel incredibly durable.

The coverage from the lens is ideal and the clarity is also very good, with a reliable field of vision.

While £110 (or £120 for this limited edition option) isn’t exactly cheap, it does keep it priced below many other SunGod models, and it’s also less than some offerings from other premium brands.

Looking for some additional shade? Check out our list of the best running caps.

About the author

Rob Slade is LFTO's deputy editor. Before joining us in 2024, Rob was content editor at 220 Triathlon and, before that, editor of Adventure Travel magazine (now known as Wired for Adventure).

He's been running, hiking and camping ever since he was at school, and has been testing performance sunglasses (among other kit) for years.

Picking one running jacket as a winner in our 2026 LFTO Gear Awards involved so many hours of rainy running, and so many jackets that left us sweating and red-faced. Thankfully, one jacket stood out above the rest.

The Rab Phantom Mountain Waterproof Jacket won us over thanks to its low weight, breathability, packability and rare ability to feel like a proper mountain waterproof without making you boil after 10 minutes of running.

Read on for the full story of why this lightweight mountain waterproof shell fully deserves its accolade as LFTO's 2026 running jacket of the year...

Why the Rab Phantom Mountain is our running jacket of the year

Some mountain running jackets win you over with hardcore weather protection. The Rab Phantom Mountain wins because it solves a much trickier problem: making a waterproof mountain running jacket that you can easily grab, carry and throw on while staying fast and comfortable.

We're extraordinarily picky when it comes to waterproof running jackets. In fact, our group editor Oli Reed has long refused to wear them altogether, on the entirely reasonable grounds that he's never found one that doesn't leave him boiling hot after 10 minutes of running.

The best waterproof mountain running jacket is the one you can wear for miles without boiling in

That is, until he tried the Rab Phantom Mountain in all its lightweight, breathable glory. It didn't just impress us as a bit of mandatory race kit. It changed how often we'd reach for a waterproof shell on mixed-weather runs, fast hikes and summer mountain days.

Our waterproof mountain running jacket manifesto

So consider this our waterproof mountain running jacket manifesto: the best waterproof mountain running jacket is not necessarily the one that builds the most impenetrable fortress between you and every single raindrop. There's no point trying to do that, because you will get a bit wet on a rainy run. Plus, you sweat, so it's not like you can ever fully escape the scourge of moisture.

For a good experience, you want to be able to open zips, loosen hems, push up sleeves and let air flow through your mountain jacket, or you'll end up just throwing the whole thing in a dog poo bin because it's become unbearably hot and sticky.

So, for running specifically, a great waterproof running shell has to prioritise comfort, breathability and low weight as much as, we'd even say more than, outright rain protection. It needs to stop your T-shirt, phone, headphones and running belt from becoming saturated in constant rain. If it manages that, everything else should be about breathability.

Lightweight, breathable and genuinely wearable

A few years ago, it felt like outdoor brands were locked in a competition to see who could make the lightest possible thing that technically looked like a mountain jacket. We saw running shells as light as 50g, but many lacked the feeling that they were proper, functional jackets. No proper adjustment. Flimsy zips. No useful articulation. No real comfort. Sometimes not much meaningful weather protection either.

The Rab Phantom Mountain feels like a correction to that whole idea. Instead of designing a wafer-thin emergency layer and hoping runners would never actually need to wear it, Rab seems to have started with a functional mountain waterproof jacket, then stripped it back as much as it could without losing the things that make it useful.

On paper, the numbers are impressive. The Phantom Mountain uses 30D Pertex Shield 2.5-layer fabric with Diamond Fuse technology and a fluorocarbon-free DWR, plus a 20,000mm hydrostatic head and a 20,000g/m²/24hrs breathability rating. In a men's medium, it weighs 222g. That is not as featherweight as the standard Rab Phantom, but it still feels extremely light for a more mountain-ready waterproof with proper pockets and a tougher 30D fabric.

Every feature earns its place

Because the Phantom Mountain is still a minimal jacket, every remaining feature feels carefully considered. The secure elasticated cuffs are a perfect example. They keep the sleeves sitting where they should, while still offering enough stretch to vent your forearms or check a sports watch without feeling restrictive in the way fully locked-down cuffs often can.

The lightweight single-sided rear hem adjustment is similarly simple and genuinely useful. On longer runs, I found I could actually be bothered to use it, which is always the true test of a tiny jacket feature. Pull it in when the rain gets heavier, loosen it when you want more airflow. No faff, no fiddly cord-management and crucially, no stopping on the trail.

The hood follows the same logic. It's lightweight, minimally adjustable, has a stiffened peak for extra protection and doubles as the jacket's storage pocket when you want to pack the whole thing down. The full zip is thin, as you'd expect on a shell this light, but the protective internal guard feels precise and effective rather than flimsy.

All this contributes to it feeling genuinely plug-and-play. The Rab Phantom Mountain is easy to pull out of a running vest or running belt and throw on without feeling like you need to set the whole thing up. The regular fit helps here too. It isn't the most race-cut, aerodynamic waterproof in the world, but if you're trail running in bad weather, aerodynamics isn't always your priority.

Packable enough to carry anywhere

It almost feels a shame to say that a mountain jacket this good is partly brilliant because of how easily it can be packed away and forgotten about. But with running jackets, packability is a central concern.

Most of us don't head out hoping to wear a waterproof jacket for the entire run. We carry one because the forecast is uncertain, because we're heading into higher elevation or because we're doing a race with mandatory kit requirements.

The Phantom Mountain packs into its own hood and is small enough to disappear into a hydration vest or lightweight pack. It can also fit into some larger running belts like Rab's own Veil 1L, which I gave high praise to earlier this year. It's easy to grab and bring with you wherever you're going, and its performance matches its diversity of use cases. Spring showers, summer mountain days, windy ridge lines, changeable forecasts – we'd reach for this running jacket for any one of those conditions.

Crucially, it's comfortable

The Rab Phantom Mountain wins a 2026 LFTO Gear Award because it won over people who don't really like waterproof running jackets, and it totally subverted our expectations from when we called it in to test.

We expected another fragile ultralight shell designed for runners trying to satisfy mandatory kit requirements with something they'd never actually wear. Instead, the Phantom Mountain proved far more useful than that. It works for running, fast hiking and even those meteorologically temperamental summer mountain days when rain is a real threat, but carrying a full winter hardshell would feel ridiculous.

Most importantly, the shining jewel of this mountain jacket is that it's comfortable to wear. The fabric doesn't rustle like a family bag of Tyrrells. It doesn't feel like one of those massive waterproof ponchos you get at Alton Towers. The inner face is comfortable against skin, the outer fabric moves smoothly against itself and the whole thing feels like a properly designed garment rather than a bare-bones membrane with sleeves.

Who should buy the Rab Phantom Mountain Jacket?

If you want a lightweight waterproof running jacket for trail runs, mountain races, fast hikes, summer hill days or changeable forecasts, the Rab Phantom Mountain is a straightforward recommendation.

It's especially well suited to runners who usually hate waterproof jackets, but still need reliable rain and wind protection that won't dominate a running vest. If you want the absolute lightest possible emergency layer, the standard Rab Phantom is lighter. But if you want something packable, breathable, protective, more durable than a true bare-bones running shell and comfortable enough to wear at running effort, this is the one we'd recommend first.

Verdict

The Rab Phantom Mountain is our running jacket of the year because it strikes the balance most waterproof mountain running jackets miss. It's light enough to carry when you might not need it, protective enough to wear when you do, tough enough to feel useful beyond race-day emergencies and comfortable enough that you won't melt minutes after putting it on.

About the author

Milo Wilson is LFTO's full-time trail running tester and has spent the last few years testing shoes, packs, jackets and accessories across the Surrey Hills, the Lake District, Eryri and beyond. He's based in the Surrey Hills and loves nothing more than a long, ploddy run over undulating trails. He also runs our #Run1000Miles challenge.

When it comes to testing and recommending tents, our LFTO testing team are the best in the business. We're a bunch of hikers, backpackers, mountaineers, outdoor enthusiasts and – crucially for family tents – people with families who spend many of our spring and summer weekends pitching all manner of camping tents with our partners, kids and friends.

We know that searching for a new family tent is exciting but can also be a headache, even for those who have owned one before. There are so many excellent tents with never-ending ranges of features all vying for your attention… and hard-earned money.

Each year we undertake the substantial task of testing and reviewing the latest tents ranging from four to eight-person models, so we can find the very best models for family camping trips. And trust us, it isn't easy. But pitching, sleeping in and then packing away all those tents allows us to compare them on everything from features, living space and price, to how easy they are to stuff back into the bag once we've taken them down.

A family tent is a great investment that should last you for many years to come, so scroll down for our shortlist of the best family tents for 2026, then keep reading for our full reviews.

Jump to: How we tested | Best family tent reviews | Buying guide

Best family tents at a glance

Best family tent overall: Robens Klondike Tent

Best value family tent: Quechua Arpenaz 4.1 F&B

Best inflatable family tent: Outwell Colorado 5 Air

Best roof tent for families: TentBox Lite XL

Best 4-person family tent: Berghaus Air 400 Nightfall

Editor's note: This article was updated in March 2026 when we removed any tents that are no longer available and checked our award-winners were still representative of the market right now.

How we tested

The LFTO team is made up of true outdoor gear experts and enthusiasts (you could even call us geeks) who not only spend many days and nights on mountain treks, but also have lots of experience using and testing family tents and all the latest camping gear and gadgets.

Many members of our team have young children, and all of us camped with our parents as kids so have plenty of opinions on what makes the best family tents.

The tents recommended below were tested by our group editor Oli Reed, freelance outdoor journalist Alex Foxfield and former senior writer Chris Williams (above).

Our picks of the best family tents have each been included here on their own merit, with many having standout assets, be it value for money, clever design or space. If you want to learn more about which tent is right for you, scroll to the bottom of this article to find our buying advice.

When camping as a pair, we often like to be cheeky and pitch a three-person tent for that extra room. The same idea can also apply for a large group – some of these five- or six-person options are also brilliant picks for a family of four with a load of gear and a giant cool box to store.

When assigning ratings to the tents below, we considered a range of key criteria, including: weatherproofing, comfort/living space, features, weight, pack size (if has to fit in your car, after all!) and value for money.

For more detail on our review process, see our 'how we test' page.

Best family tents reviewed:

Ratings comparison table

This ratings table gives you a quick overview of how each family tent performed across the key areas we tested, including weather protection, comfort, features, weight, pack size and value.

The Robens Klondike is the clear leader on score, with top marks for weather protection, comfort and features. However, the rest of the field is surprisingly tight, with most tents landing on an overall score of 4 out of 5. That makes the individual category scores more useful than the overall ratings alone, especially if you know whether you care most about space, value, easy transport or wet-weather performance.

The biggest takeaway is that there’s no single “best” tent for everyone. The Quechua Arpenaz 4.1 F&B stands out for value, the Robens Klondike is the strongest all-round performer, and the likes of the Vango Savannah, Outwell Sacramento, Outwell Colorado and OLPRO Blakedown Breeze are particularly strong if living space and comfort are high priorities.

How to choose your family tent

What sort of camper are you?

Consider your aims and experience level. If you're a first-time camper, it's worth purchasing a beginner's tent that isn't too complicated or pricey, just in case the camping life isn't for you.

On the flip side, if you do have some outdoor experience, then be sure to go for a tent that suits the way you and your family like to camp. If you prioritise space or luxury, there are plenty of tents to suit.

Similarly, if you're the type of camper who takes the bare essentials, keep things simple with a more basic option.

The comparison tables below are a useful reminder that bigger and more comfortable tents are not automatically better for every family. A huge inflatable tent can be brilliant for long campsite stays, but a lighter pole tent may make far more sense if you camp more casually, move around often or need to keep car space under control.

This portability table compares each tent by structure, sleeping capacity, total weight, weight per berth and packed size. It’s worth looking at weight per berth as well as total weight, because a large six-person tent can sometimes be more efficient to transport than a smaller inflatable model.

Weight and packed size

Are you a camping minimalist or more of a glamper? Will your tent go up right by your car, or will you have to carry it a distance? These are all good questions to answer before looking for your family tent.

No family tents are particularly small or lightweight, but there is a huge weight and size range. In this test, the lightest option is the 11.5kg Quechua Arpenaz 4.1 F&B, while the heaviest is the 31kg Outwell Sacramento Air 6. The OLPRO Blakedown Breeze is also worth noting, as its 30kg weight is spread across four berths, making it the heaviest tent here relative to sleeping capacity.

Air tents can be wonderfully convenient to pitch, but they are often heavy and bulky when packed. Pole tents tend to perform better for outright portability here, with the Robens Klondike, Quechua Arpenaz and Coleman Rocky Mountain all offering relatively low weight per berth.

The weight and packed size are important to check as you'll need your tent to fit in the car alongside your other gear, and you'll want to avoid lugging around an excessively large tent if you're walking any distance from the car park to the pitch.

What type/shape of tent is best for a family tent?

This size comparison shows how each tent stacks up for sleeping capacity, footprint, headroom and comfort. It’s a handy way to see which tents feel more generous on paper before you start comparing features, price and pitching style.

The Robens Klondike scores highest for comfort and spaciousness, helped by its huge 270cm internal peak height. The Vango Savannah 600XL and Outwell Sacramento Air 6 are the biggest conventional family-camping options here, while the OLPRO Blakedown Breeze offers a large footprint for a four-berth tent.

However, the table also shows why dimensions alone don’t tell the full story. A tent can have a large footprint but still feel less practical depending on bedroom layout, living space, headroom and how easy it is to move around inside.

To start narrowing down your options, consider what kind of outdoor adventures you're hoping to have, then pick the type of tent that best suits your needs.

Tunnel tents are great for weekend and summer camping as they offer lots of space, are easy to pitch and can use traditional or inflatable poles. However, they are often heavier than other shapes, especially if you opt for a large air-beam model with multiple bedrooms and a big living area.

Dome tents are good for hikers and trekkers because small dome tents are quite stable and lightweight. They are also cheap and work well in moderate wind, though family-sized dome tents often offer less standing room and living space than tunnel tents.

Geodesic tents have crisscrossing support poles, making them much more capable of dealing with high winds and harsh weather. Geodesic tents sacrifice space and are a little more complex to pitch than other styles, but are great for camping in extreme environments. They’re less suitable for casual campers and families.

What waterproof rating should a family tent have?

Next, make sure you're familiar with waterproof ratings:

– 1000mm HH: Will keep out light rain. We'd call this rating more water-repellent than waterproof.

– 2000mm HH: Enough to fend off some rain and is the bare minimum you'd want for family tents.

– 3000mm HH: Waterproof and will keep out rain.

– 5000mm HH: Will keep out heavy rain.

– 10,000mm+ HH: These ultra-durable tents deal with driving rain and snow and the extra pressure applied onto tent floors by people and equipment.

In our ratings table, several tents scored well for weather protection, but the Robens Klondike was the only model to receive full marks in that category. The Vango Savannah 600XL, Outwell Colorado 5 Air, OLPRO Blakedown Breeze and Berghaus Air 400 Nightfall also performed strongly, making them good options to prioritise if poor weather is high on your list of concerns.

How easy is it to set up a family tent?

Given that most family tents are quite large, it's best to have at least two people to pitch them.

Air tents can make setup feel more straightforward because you inflate the beams rather than threading long poles through sleeves. However, as the portability table shows, that convenience often comes with a trade-off in weight and packed bulk.

And in order to have the best family camping experience, make a list of items you need to take before you pack.

What materials are best for a durable family tent?

Most family tents use polyester for the main fabric, a thicker groundsheet made from polyethylene, and poles either made from fibreglass or inflatable beams.

Perhaps unsurprisingly, the thicker materials offer the best durability, though they also make the tent weigh more. For the best durability, look for tents that have a polycotton main fabric and, although not essential, aluminium poles.

The main compromise is clear across the comparison tables: more robust, spacious and feature-packed tents usually become heavier and bulkier. If you’re buying for long family holidays, that trade-off can be worthwhile. If you’re buying for quick weekends away, it may be better to choose something lighter, simpler and easier to pack.

How do I ensure my family tent is weather-resistant?

In addition to good waterproof ratings, which we've covered above, weather-resistant tents are stable with good anchorage to the ground. You can also boost underfloor waterproofing by using a footprint, which is an additional groundsheet in the shape of your tent, or a tarpaulin.

It’s also worth balancing weather resistance against your usual camping conditions. If you mostly camp on sheltered summer sites, you may not need the burliest tent here. If you regularly camp in exposed places, or want something that feels secure in foul weather, prioritise models with stronger weather protection scores, good pegging points, reliable guy lines and a robust groundsheet.

Extra equipment for family tents:

In order to improve your camping experience, there are some valuable extras that you might want to consider so everything will run smoothly.

How do I clean a tent?

This is pretty easy. Simply get Grangers Tent + Gear Cleaner or Nikwax Tent & Gear SolarWash and clean the fabric as instructed. This helps rid the tent of muck that may hinder its performance and degrade it if left uncleaned. You can follow a step-by-step guide in our article on how to clean a tent.

Periodically, you'll want to reproof the fabric, too (see our guide on how to waterproof a tent for more on that), to maintain its water repellency and protect against UV damage. You can do this with Grangers Tent + Gear Repel UV or Nikwax Tent & Gear SolarProof.

About the authors

The reviews you read in this article have been written by group editor Oli Reed, freelancer journalist Alex Foxfield and former senior writer Chris Williams.

Oli spends many (if not most) of his spring, summer, and early autumn weekends camping with his two young boys, and Chris spent most summers on family camping trips when he was growing up in New Zealand.

For his part, Alex is a qualified Mountain Leader, avid wild camper and a family man, who's spent far too many evenings fighting with others for space in the tent.

The award-winning Sacramento Air 6 from Danish camping brand Outwell is a superb family tent, combining premium materials, solid design and the ease of pitching that only inflatable air beams provide. In fact, it's even won 'family tent of the year' at the 2026 LFTO Gear Awards!

It’s just shy of 7m in length and a whopping 4m wide, so those who value their living space will find plenty of it here. As we’ve come to expect from Outwell, the build quality is strong and there are several nice little touches, which we’ll come to in due course.

As a classic, tunnel-shaped air tent designed for large families, it’s a similar product to Outwell’s Colorado 5 Air, a shelter we very much enjoyed getting to grips with last summer. The Sacramento 6 is even better, offering more space and a much more pleasant experience when packing away. The Colorado was quite an ordeal to get back into its stuffsack, whereas the Sacramento 6 packs away easily.

What’s the catch? Well, it has an RRP of £1,050, though you can usually find it considerably cheaper than this. Nevertheless, it’s at the higher end of the price range, so campers on a budget will be better suited elsewhere.

It’s also large and heavy when packed away, so if car space is at a premium, it’s a no-go. I weighed it at 31kg (68.3lb) and it’s a bit of a beast to lug around if you’re on your own with the kids.

The dimensions and layout of the bedrooms don’t offer as much flexibility as they might have, as they don’t provide the option of creating two decent-sized rooms. Other than these qualms, it’s a fantastic tent. Let’s unzip this one and get beneath the flysheet.

Pitching

One of the main selling points of any air tent is the fact you don’t have to faff around with poles when pitching and packing out.

For the uninitiated, an air tent uses inflatable, pre-shaped air beams rather than poles to provide the tent with its structure. Inflating the beams using the included hand pump is far from effortless, though most would agree that it’s preferable to threading poles through their sleeves, cursing every time they snag.

In the case of the Sacramento 6, there are four beams and, once I’d pegged out the main corners, it took no time at all to have them fully inflated at around 8psi. I never tire of seeing an air tent suddenly spring up as the beams win their battle with gravity. Unlike many family tents, the bedrooms are already attached the first time you pitch, which saves quite a bit of time during that first acquaintance.

There is one minor pole to assemble, and it slots into the internal roof to provide additional stability. I’m 172cm (5ft 8in) tall and I found doing this a bit tricky, given that the inner roof is 205cm high. I had to stand on a cool box to provide me with a little extra height. I managed to have the tent in a habitable state after around 13 minutes and fully pegged out after around 25 minutes.

One of the things that I’ve always appreciated when dealing with Outwell’s tents is the quality of the materials and components.

Many brands clearly share the same suppliers when it comes to things like pegs and toggles, in the same way many clothing manufacturers call in reputable suppliers like YKK for the zips, to give an example. In tents, you end up seeing the same relatively rudimentary bits and bobs across different brands and models. Not so here.

As an example, the pegs are chunky and robust, giving an impression of first-rate durability that you simply don’t get with most pegs, which bend all too easily. I reckon even Uri Geller would have issues trying to bend these ones.

The guy lines are easy to adjust, a process helped by circular adjusters branded with the Outwell logo. As an aside, another thing you’ll notice about Outwell’s tents is that its logo is everywhere, particularly on the fabrics, where they seemingly dot every square inch.

Shape, structure and internal liveability

The shape of the Sacramento is nothing new. It’s a classic tunnel tent with a large front porch entrance and a side entrance into the main living space, with the sleeping quarters at the back. You’ll immediately notice its ample 400cm width and how wonderfully spacious it feels to walk around in. As mentioned, it’s 205cm high, so provides more than enough headroom for most.

The large front door, which can be rolled back completely, opens to the sizeable porch, great for kicking back on sunny days. It’s also the ideal spot for storing wet gear when the weather gods don’t play ball. Side windows make the porch area a bright space regardless.

The central living space is 250x400cm, providing plenty of room to kit your tent out like an Instagrammer showing off at Coachella. For those that missed this particular cultural phenomenon, what I mean is that it provides the luxury of creating a glamping vibe with fancy furniture and an array of accessories, should you wish.

One side wall is occupied almost entirely by a large window, while the other hosts the side entrance. The internal door between the porch and living space can also be opened almost completely to create a nicely free-flowing space.

Now to the bedrooms, of which there are three, side by side at the back of the tent. The central room is a good size, at 140cm wide, though the two flanking it are just 120cm wide. These smaller bedrooms are not large enough to take Outwell’s very own Dreamboat Double, which raises a question mark over whether labelling the tent as a six-person shelter is a little optimistic.

The dividers between the bedrooms are fixed in place at the top but can be rolled up if you want to create two bedrooms instead of three, or even one huge sleeping space. However, I feel that Outwell has missed a trick by having the large room in the centre rather than off to one side, as this limits the width of any second bedroom to 120cm, which is still not big enough for many double camping mattresses.

Had the larger bedroom been off to the side, I could have chosen to have a 140cm-wide room plus a 240cm-wide room. This would have been perfect for a family of five.

As it is, the bedroom proportions are a little bit awkward and don’t provide the flexibility that they might have, which seems a shame.

Weather protection

It’s natural to question whether air tents are as resilient when faced with adverse weather as a pole tent. The answer to this is that, yes, they’re just as resilient, particularly where the conditions that you’re likely to encounter during family camping holidays are concerned.

Admittedly, in high winds the tent will be buffeted and move around a bit. However, an air beam, unlike an aluminium or fibreglass pole, won’t snap if subjected to a sudden violent gust. So, if it has been pegged out correctly, the Sacramento 6 will be fine – just don’t pitch it during a named storm.

Pretty much everything here is made of polyester, from the outer to the bedrooms and the carry bag. The exception is the double-coated polyethylene used in the rugged groundsheet for supreme protection against the wet earth below.

The polyester used in the flysheet has a hydrostatic head (HH) rating of 4,000mm. This is basically a measure of how much water pressure the fabric can take before leaking. On paper, this actually isn’t quite as strong as some of the other family tents we’ve tested this year.

However, 4,000mm is still an impressive level of water resistance, more than enough for British campsite conditions. For additional protection, a PFAS-free water-repellent coating has also been applied.

Condensation

The large panel at the rear of the tent joins forces with polyester mesh in the bedrooms to provide a well-ventilated sleeping area. This is key when it comes to preventing condensation build-up.

There’s also a long panel beneath the side window in the main living space, while the opposite door has a mesh layer for when you want to let air in and out but don’t want midges invading the inner sanctum.

Weight and packed size

There’s no getting away from the fact that the Sacramento is a heavy tent. As mentioned, I weighed it at 31kg (68.3lb), placing it at the heavier end of the family camping tent spectrum. Of course, it’s not a package you’d ever attempt to move considerable distances but be warned that it’s a bit of a brute to budge on your own even from the car boot to the pitch.

Similarly, it’s large when packed down. I measured it at 86x52x42cm. If car boot space is limited, this isn’t good news. On the positive side, its carry bag is more than ample when it comes to rolling the tent up and stuffing it away at the end of a trip.

Outwell seems to favour stuffsacks that open from one end rather than something that opens up at both sides and along the top, which would admittedly make packing the tent away easier. Nevertheless, wrangling it into the oversized pack was straightforward enough.

The carry bag features carry handles along its length, though I reckon it would benefit from durable carry handles on either side too, like the ones you get on a duffel bag. It’d make lugging the thing around a much easier task, especially if you have to get it up stairs. Remarkably, it has a shoulder strap, but the only individual I know who’d attempt to shoulder a tent this heavy is called Hercules.

Features

All the curtain and mesh fabrics throughout the tent can be rolled up and held in place thanks to some nicely adjustable toggles and rings. Strangely, the design is different in the porch area, where Outwell has favoured eyelets stamped into fabric tags over the plastic rings found elsewhere in the tent. I found that these ones could be a bit fiddly.

The central living space is a great blank canvas to create the sanctuary of your choosing. There’s the usual power access point, of course, and then there’s the hook track, which runs along the inside of one of the air beams. This enables you to attach hooks to hang lightweight accessories like storage units or lanterns. Five hooks are included with the tent and you can always buy more too, if needed.

As has become an expectation with family tents, the bedrooms have blackout fabric to keep the morning sun out for longer lie-ins. Chance would be a fine thing where kids are concerned. This is Outwell’s Dark Premier fabric and, while it’s good, it’s not quite as black hole-esque as Decathlon’s Fresh and Black or Coleman’s BlackOut.

There’s an innovative magnetic opening between the central bedroom and the right-hand bedroom, which enables silent entry in the dead of night. It seems a shame the same feature isn’t present between the left-hand room and the central room too.

There are handy gear pockets on either side of the bedroom doors and in the side bedrooms too. However, as the walls on either side of the central bedroom are partition walls, there are no gear pockets here.

Verdict

The Sacramento 6 is an excellent family air tent that’s easy to pitch and wonderfully liveable. There are nice design touches throughout, while the quality and durability of the materials and components mean that it’s a tent you’ll be using for many, many years.

With an RRP of around £1,000, it’s something of an investment but it’s worth it if you’re serious about camping holidays with your tribe. It’s just a shame the bedroom customisation options are a little limited and that it’s so large when packed away.

If you're considering a smaller option, check out our roundup of the best three-person tents.

About the author

Your tent reviewer today is Alex Foxfield. As a qualified Mountain Leader, avid wild camper and family man, Alex enjoys camping in all its forms. An outdoor gear expert, he’s been testing and reviewing camping kit and tents – from solo backpacking shelters to palatial family car camping tents – for several years.

Two-person tents are probably the most popular size of camping tent chosen by hikers, backpackers and even bikepackers. This is because, while they're obviously designed to sleep two people, solo backpackers also often favour them for the extra space on offer.

Granted, there are one-person tents if you want an even lighter, more compact shelter, or bivvy bags for the ultimate low-weight overnight experience. But for often less than 2.5kg, you can have it all with a two-person tent – sturdy weather protection, superb liveability and excellent features.

But picking the right tent for you is fraught with risk. Choose wrong and you could be carrying unnecessary weight or getting damp and cold on a rainy night.

So, we’ve done the hard work for you by testing a range of two-person tents on the UK's hills and whittled them down to our few favourites. We’ll be stunned if one of these doesn’t match the requirements of you and your tent-mate – whoever they may be.

Jump to: How we tested | Two-person tent reviews | Comparison table | Buying advice

Shortlist: Best two-person tents at a glance

Best two-person tent overall: Nemo Dagger Ridge OSMO 2P Tent

Best budget two-person tent: Vango Apex Compact 200

Highly rated: MSR Hubba Hubba NX

Most lightweight option: Big Agnes VST String Ridge 2.5

Editor's note: This article was updated on 7 May 2026, when we removed an outdated Nordisk tent and added in the MSR Hubba Hubba LT, Big Agnes VST String Ridge 2.5 and Wechsel Exogen 2.

How we tested

Over the decades (and it really has been decades) our outdoor writers and gear testers at LFTO and Trail magazine have used and abused hundreds of two-person tents in real-world, often gnarly conditions in the British hills and mountains.

We take our test tents out on proper excursions (usually in the Lake District and Snowdonia) and spend many hours pitching and reviewing them. We, of course, use them for sleeping in on our trips, but we also spend a lot of time examining every detail about them, from living space and ease of pitching to material quality and sustainability.

After extensive testing, we rate them against a set of criteria, including: weather protection, comfort and liveability, features, weight and pack size, and value for money.

We then crunch the numbers using our gear database, before selecting our final award winners.

The two-person tents recommended here were tested by James Forrest and Matt Jones – two of the UK's leading and most experienced outdoor writers. James is our Lake District-based freelance writer who is a highly experienced backpacker and wild camper.

Matt is a former outdoor magazine editor and now a freelance journalist based in the heart of Snowdonia National Park. He is one of the most well known and experienced outdoor writers in the UK.

Read more about how we test.

The best two-person tents reviewed:

Table: Best two-person tents compared

What to look for in a two-person tent

What tent shape is best?

Tunnel tents and geodesic tents are the most stable shapes and best for dealing with stroppy weather. The latter are the best for use in winter and the harshest conditions but are also the least spacious inside and heavier thanks to more poles and often tougher fabrics. Tunnel tents are very popular because they can be compact and lightweight, yet quite spacious and weatherproof too.

Dome tents are a common sight too, and vary quite a lot in design. They benefit from being freestanding and some are very stable. That said, there are certain dome tents that are less suited to strong winds because they have more upright walls to boost internal space, but at the expense of some stability.

What is the ideal weight and packed size for a two-person tent?

When it comes to lightweight tents, users often size up especially for longer trips because of the extra space available in return for a marginal size and weight increase. So, a solo backpacker will often treat themselves to a two-person tent; a pair upgrade to a three-person tent, and so on.

Ultimately, consider your rucksack size and volume, and be sure to check dimensions of a tent's packed size before committing to it. For a good quality, 3-season tent, 1kg or under is extremely light, 1.5kg is good, and more than 2kg is a tad on the heavy side.

How much internal space should a two-person tent have?

For two people to fit, you want a minimum of 60cm of shoulder width per person and a length of at least 2.1 metres. Some tents are asymmetric and are narrower at one end than the other. In terms of height, at least a metre allows you to sit upright, and for vestibule space, well, the more the better.

Do two-person tents pitch differently?

Some tents, particularly from US brands, are pitched inner first because they are best suited to warmer conditions and often used without the flysheet. But, it isn't ideal if it's raining. Others are pitched outer first or all-as-one, enabling the inner to be kept dry while the flysheet is pegged out.

Whichever design you opt for, rest assured that tents these days are all easy to pitch thanks to simple innovations like colour coded poles. It's been a few years since we've come across a backpacking tent that was tricky to pitch.

How do I ensure my two-person tent is weatherproof?

In addition to the overall shape, which we've mentioned above, for an indication of how waterproof a tent really is, check the hydrostatic head of the flysheet and groundsheet. A lot of lightweight tents' waterproof ratings may seem disappointingly low. However, many other factors, including silicone or PU coatings, the tent's shape, sealed seams, and the tightness of a fabric's weave, affect waterproofing.

As a rule of thumb, however, 2,000mm HH for the flysheet and 4,000mm HH for the groundsheet are good baselines for a tent if you're expecting to encounter heavy rain on your adventures. You can also boost underfloor water resistance with the use of a tent footprint.

Another key component of a tent's weather resistance is the flysheet.

For maximum weatherproofing, a tent's flysheet – the waterproof outer – should peg out flush to the ground and be easily adjustable via tension straps so that it's taut, stable and well-shaped. Some flysheets don't quite reach the ground, which aids ventilation but risks water ingress and draughtiness.

Why is ventilation important?

Condensation can be difficult to avoid in humid and wet climates, so good ventilation is key. Mesh vents on the inner and vent windows on the flysheet will help increase airflow, as will mesh panels on the inner's walls. Good clearance between the inner and outer is very important too.

What other features should I consider?

Other important features include: a good-sized porch for stashing your backpack and boots, a wide door for easy entry and exit, sufficient length and width for lying down (check carefully if you're 6ft+), a stormflap over the main zipper, internal pockets for gear organisation, an easy-to-fill carry bag, strong poles, good pegs, sturdy pegging out loops and robust guy lines.

How do I clean my tent?

To maintain the performance and waterproofing of your tent, you need to care for and clean them properly. You wouldn't reasonably expect longevity out of anything that isn't cared for.

Tent cleaning and care is easy and primarily involves cleaning them after use with the correct cleaning products and making sure they're completely dry before storing them away.

If your tent is in need of a repair, get in touch with a specialist repair agent such as Lancashire Sports Repairs, or the retailer/manufacturer. Outdoor gear repair services are continually improving as both brands and customers aim to be more sustainable (repair is also much cheaper than replacing).

You can also waterproof a tent yourself if the seams or fabric starts leaking.

About the authors

James Forrest is a prolific peak bagger and long-distance walker who’s one of the most high-profile outdoor writers in the UK. He writes regular features and route guides for us and has been one of our main gear testers for the last few years.

Matt Jones is a dedicated long-distance walker who's also a very respected voice in the outdoor industry. He's previously edited both Walk and Scouting magazines, and has been reviewing gear for years, including for Trail magazine and LFTO.

Meet the winner of 'sleeping mat of the year' at the 2026 LFTO Gear Awards. The Nemo Eclipse undercuts most of the best sleeping mats on price, outperforms them on warmth, and still manages to be the comfiest I've ever slept on.

That last point is largely down to the fact it puts 10cm of air between you and the ground. That's not bad for something that packs into a stuff sack and goes in a rucksack.

I've tested the Nemo Eclipse over several nights in the Lake District, including a wild camp, as well as a week in northern Spain, in varied enough conditions to get a proper sense of what it can do.

Before diving in, it's worth noting that the Nemo Eclipse is available in three different sizes: long wide, regular and regular wide; I'm reviewing the regular-wide version here.

Comfort

This is a hugely comfortable sleeping pad. I don’t mean "comfortable for a backpacking mat", it’s actually comfy in its own right. It feels closer to a proper air bed than anything I've backpacked with before.

At around 10cm of loft, that probably shouldn't come as a complete surprise. But the baffle design also comes into play here. Baffles are tubes of air that run either vertically or horizontally, and in this case they’re vertical.

When I’m in the centre of this pad, the outer edge baffles receive extra inflation pressure, which prevents me from rolling sideways. The result is a moulded, hugged-in feeling that you don't often get from sleeping mats.

I find it comfy sleeping on my side on this mat, as the vertical baffles are good at supporting the hips and shoulders. The regular wide version gives me plenty of room without feeling excessive.

However, 10cm of loft does come with a practical quirk. The extra height can eat into headroom in low-profile tents or tight bivvy setups, so it's worth checking your shelter's internal dimensions before committing.

Inflation and deflation

Like most sack-pump mats, there's a knack to getting the Eclipse inflated efficiently, but once you've done it a couple of times it becomes second nature. The pump sack is more spacious than rivals, which makes it harder to inflate fully but also, if you get the hang of it, more efficient. For me, it takes around four pumps to inflate.

Nemo is known for its innovations, and the ‘Laylow valve’ is a case in point. Protected by an outer lid, the valve has a small bump you can press in order to fine-tune the firmness. That means you can let a little air out in the middle of the night without worrying about it all suddenly escaping.

Deflation is blissfully simple. Open the valve and the air whooshes out, rapidly and completely. The subsequent pack-away is quick and straightforward, and the wide mouth of the stuff sack means you're not fighting to get it back in.

Warmth and R-value

The Eclipse has an R-value of 6.2. For reference, most three-season pads sit around R3-4, while anything above R5 is considered suitable for UK winter conditions. That means this mat should, in theory, be able to handle all seasons, including serious winter camping.

I haven’t tested this pad in sub-zero temperatures yet, so I can’t confidently speak for performance in these conditions, but I found that on cooler autumn nights there weren’t any cold spots or chill seeping up from damp ground.

However, if you’re planning a serious winter trip, it's worth knowing that in some cases, thicker pads lose more heat from the sides through convection than a slimmer profile would, which slightly undermines the R-value.

Weight and packability

While it’s not the best in its class, the Eclipse's warmth-to-weight ratio is still top-end, and a little extra weight isn’t necessarily a bad thing if you prioritise comfort. It is bulky, mind you, so if you're struggling for space then it might not be the best option for you.

The version I tested, regular wide, weighs 628g on my scales, while the regular and long wide are stated to weigh 550g and 680g respectively. The stuff sack is on the larger side, and as a result the packed size is bulkier than rivals (48cm diameter x 33cm length).

There are lighter and more packable 4-season pads out there and, of course, many 3-season pads are even lighter (see below for comparison). But that’s not to say the Nemo Eclipse isn’t acceptable for multi-day adventures; I’d happily choose a mat that’s slightly heavier for significant comfort gains.

Price and competition

At £180 for the regular wide version, the Eclipse sits at the premium end of the market. It’s actually cheaper – and warmer – than several of its closest rivals, so it’s a good value option if warmth is important to you.

However, there are a few rivals worth considering. Within the four-season pad category, the Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XTherm has a higher R-value, while also being lighter, making it the better call for serious winter use.

Another key option here, the Nemo Tensor All-Season, has a lower R-value, making it suited to milder winter camping, but it’s slightly lighter. However, it’s not as lofty or plush; the Eclipse is the more indulgent option.

Stepping down to the three-season mark, the Sea to Summit Ether Light XR, another popular option, is a close match in weight, but has a quilted surface, which some campers may find comfier. Even lighter still, the Therm-a-Rest NeoAir XLite is a top option for three-season ultralight camping.

Verdict

For backpackers who want all-season warmth without crossing into expedition-weight territory, or sacrificing too much comfort, the Nemo Eclipse is more convincing than most alternatives.

About the author

LFTO writer and gear tester Evie Nichols loves nothing more than getting outside, preferably in the mountains, and she's not fussy whether that's in trail running shoes, climbing shoes, walking boots or on two wheels.

Evie is a big fan of multi-day hikes, her favourites being the GR20 in Corsica, Mallorca's GR221 and the GR52 in the Alps.

The Saucony Xodus Ultra is back with its fourth edition, and it's the most significant redesign these much-lauded trail running shoes have undergone since their inception. It's a smash, and we've awarded it trail running shoe of the year at the 2026 LFTO Gear Awards.

The toe box is slightly narrower, the upper feels tougher than ever, and the outsole has been upgraded from Saucony’s proprietary PWRTRAC rubber to a full-length Vibram MegaGrip, giving it technical bite from toe to heel.

Despite losing the rock plate, the shoe is heavier than it has ever been at 309g (10.9oz). But the weight feels justified – the name of the game with the Xodus Ultra 4 is durability, foot protection, and cushioning that can carry you for miles (if not at break-neck speeds, then certainly in reliable comfort).

Upper

At first glance, the upper looks robust, thick, maybe even a bit overbuilt. But once you start running in it, the surprising breathability comes through. Saucony has gone for a slightly all-or-nothing approach here. Large ventilation holes over the forefoot and midfoot sides let air and water move freely, helping drainage after stream crossings, while the rest of the mesh is very tightly woven.

There's also plenty of reinforcements. At the toe, you get a TPU coating layered with extra Vibram rubber that creeps up from the outsole to make sure you can kick rocks in this thing.

Around the heel, there's a stiff collar made from what I assume is faux suede or leather. The shoe has vegan credentials, and also claims to use recycled materials, though Saucony stays pretty vague about exactly how much recycled material is used, and where.

Inside, the sock liner hugs the foot and feels snug. This, combined with extra-long laces and the option to tie a runner’s knot through the final eyelet, makes for a very secure lockdown. The fit is fairly narrow and precise, and that won’t be for everyone.

Personally, I love how close to the foot it feels. On tricky rock sections or steep descents, I felt totally confident placing each step.

The laces themselves are a small quirk. They’re soft to the touch and seem strong, but they do feel slightly slick – I suspect there’s a decent amount of nylon in them. After 15–20k runs I noticed them loosening, and once they even came undone when brambles hooked and tugged at my feet.

There are also neat touches for long-haul use. A metal D-ring and reinforced overlays allow gaiters to be attached securely. Combined with the multi-layered mesh, this makes the Xodus Ultra 4 feel built for serious endurance outings.

Midsole

The midsole design is where Saucony has made subtle but important changes. You still get the familiar PWRRUN PB foam, but this time there’s 8% more of it compared to previous editions. A PWRRUN frame has also been added around the core, giving extra stiffness and stability to balance out the soft cushioning. A PWRRUN+ sockliner sits on top, rounding out what’s now a taller and more protective platform.

On paper, the stack is 36mm in the heel and 30mm in the forefoot, giving a 6mm drop. That puts it in the “max cushioning” category, at least according to Saucony. But visually it doesn’t look like a massive, bulbous Hoka Stinson 7 style midsole. It looks relatively understated, but the feel is where it's at.

Straight out of the box, the shoe is plush and comfortable. After a 20k run, my feet still felt fresh, which is one of the biggest compliments I can give. Consistency is the word here. Some shoes feel great for the first hour and then tail off, but the Xodus Ultra 4 keeps the same level of comfort mile after mile.

It doesn’t have the spring or energy return you’d expect from a carbon-plated racer like the North Face Vectiv Pro 3, nor is it trying to. This is not a speed shoe. It’s clearly for long, consistent distance, and it leans into that identity with confidence. You can rack up dozens of miles and still feel supported.

What surprised me most was how much ground feel remained. Despite the big stack, I could still read the trail beneath me. That balance – soft protection without turning everything into a numb platform – makes this one of the best ultra trail running shoes I’ve tested recently. It gives control without sacrificing comfort, which is exactly what you need on long days.

Outsole

The outsole is perhaps the biggest – and certainly the most obvious – upgrade. Saucony has ditched their PWRTRAC rubber and gone with full-coverage Vibram MegaGrip. It’s a proven compound, and here it’s paired with 4mm chevron-shaped lugs. These point forward in the forefoot for climbing and backward under the heel for braking.

The lug design looks similar to older models, but Saucony has extended them full-length across the outsole. Previously, they got shorter at the toe and heel. That change makes a nice difference. Hairpin turns and choppy downhills feel more controlled, and braking on loose ground feels secure.

Grip on rock is superb. The tackiness of MegaGrip is obviously ideal on wet rock, but the trade-off is mud performance. With lugs placed fairly close together, the outsole can get clogged in thick woodland bogs, and it's not great for shedding. Still, durability is outstanding, and for most mixed-terrain running the outsole feels bombproof.

Price and competition

The Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 sits at the pricier end of the trail running shoe spectrum, but you get a lot of shoe for the money. With its 36/30mm stack and 4mm lugs, the natural comparison is the Hoka Speedgoat 6.

Both are designed for distance, but the Saucony feels stiffer and more protective, while the Hoka feels lighter and more cushioned. Which you prefer depends on whether your priority is soft comfort or rugged durability.

I also found parallels with the ASICS Gel-Trabuco 13. That shoe comes in cheaper and also aims for all-terrain versatility, but in direct comparison it lacks the Xodus Ultra 4’s toughness and outsole grip.

The Xodus Ultra 4 doesn’t use a waterproof membrane, instead relying on its drainage and ventilation holes to clear water quickly. That means wet feet are inevitable in heavy rain or river crossings, but the upside is that it dries out far faster than a Gore-Tex shoe.

If waterproofing is non-negotiable, you might want to look at something like the Inov8 Trailtalon GTX, which offers deeper lugs and a Gore-Tex lining.

Verdict

The Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 is an unassuming shoe that delivers more than it promises at first glance. It has a bombproof upper, reliable cushioning and a Vibram outsole that performs excellently across most surfaces.

It’s not the fastest shoe, and it doesn’t try to be. If you want something for racing short distances, there are better options. But if you’re heading out for long training runs, ultras, or big mountain days where reliability trumps speed, the Xodus Ultra 4 is a superb choice.

About the author

Milo Wilson is our full-time trail running tester and, coincidentally, the person in our office voted most likely to usurp Paul Mescal as king of the heartthrobs.

He's based in the Surrey hills and loves nothing more than a long, ploddy run through the undulating trails of his home on a sunny Sunday. He also runs our #Run1000Mileschallenge.

While hiking shoes may lack the ankle support and weather protection you get from walking boots, they certainly make up for it by feeling lightweight and nimble.

They're suited to countryside walks or nice days on well-maintained trails, but the fleet-footed among you may also choose them for more adventurous outings too. With that in mind, we’ve been busy out in the hills and mountains testing this year’s best models.

Just like walking boots, hiking shoes vary a lot in terms of design and construction, from more structured shoes for those who need maximum stability and support, to super lightweight, trail running shoe-inspired footwear.

This isn’t to say that hiking shoes work for everyone. Ultimately, a lot depends on where and when you go walking. Although many modern trail hiking shoes come with waterproof Gore-Tex linings, they still don’t provide as much protection as a lined leather boot, due to their lower flood height. Others might also prefer the extra ankle support and long-term durability of a high-quality pair of boots.

At Live for the Outdoors, we’ve certainly embraced the trend towards trainer-style hiking shoes because it’s superb for fast days in the mountains. But we also still enjoy using more sturdy, supportive, often leather hiking shoes for longer treks and technical routes.

Best hiking shoes at a glance

Best hiking shoes overall: La Sportiva Ultra Raptor II Leather GTX

Best town-to-trail walking shoes: Adidas Terrex Free Hiker 2.0 Low GTX

Best value hiking shoes: Inov8 Roclite GTX

Editor's note: This article was updated in May 2026, when we added the Danner N45 and the Lowa Ventierra GTX Lo.

The best hiking shoes reviewed:

How to choose a pair of hiking shoes

What features should I look for?

Tongue: A padded tongue will provide improved comfort, while a gusseted or bellows tongue – which is fully attached to the uppers – will provide better protection from water and debris.

Toe bumper: A toe bumper provides additional durability and protection for the front of the foot, particularly on rocky ground.

Heel counter: This is the stiffened cup that encloses the heel, providing protection and support. A firm heel counter helps to lock the foot in place and offers additional stability.

Ankle cuff: Unlike boots, walking shoes have a low cuff around the ankle. Some will be cut a little higher than others, helping to prevent water, mud and debris from entering the shoe, but all walking shoes generally prioritise comfort and flex over ankle support and protection.

Insole: For enhanced comfort and stability, you might prefer to switch out the shoe's supplied insole for a higher quality, specialist insole instead.

Midsole: The midsole – usually made from EVA or PU foam rubber – provides cushioning and stability, and its design will affect how rigid and energetic a shoe feels underfoot. Oversized and mega-cushioned midsoles are currently popular, providing a very springy, forward-propelling sensation as you walk.

Outsole: The outsole provides traction via a tread pattern of rubber cleats and lugs. Different rubber compounds are employed – softer compounds offer better grip, but harder compounds will last longer. In general, deep and widely-spaced lugs will provide improved grip and won't get clogged with mud.

How do I clean my hiking shoes?

Hiking footwear gets a hard life, and in order to keep it performing as well as it can for as long as it can, proper cleaning and care is key.

Fortunately, it's very easy. Head to our comprehensive guide to find out how to care for your hiking footwear, but it boils down to using a proper footwear and gear cleaner. We recommend either Nikwax or Grangers products.

About the author

Your kit testers for these reviews were Matt Jones, James Forrest and Chris Williams, with contributions from Ellie Clewlow. Matt and Ellie are our Snowdonia-based freelance writers and reviewers who have been testing outdoor kit for years and are among the UK’s most experienced, authoritative outdoor writers.

Our next gear tester, Chris, has extensive experience hiking in some of the world’s most far-flung mountains. He's also worked in the outdoor industry for several years as a journalist. James, who wrote five of these reviews, has been writing for us for years, is based in the Lake District and has climbed every mountain in the UK and Ireland.

For people who spend their days planning and dreaming about outdoor adventure, gear isn’t just 'stuff'. It’s part of the experience.

Anyone who hikes up mountains, runs trails, or camps in wild places knows the kit they use can make or break a day outdoors. The right waterproof can rescue a soggy hike. The wrong one might put you off for life.

That’s why at LFTO, we put gear through its paces in the environment it’s built for – testing it properly, pushing it hard, and only spotlighting the products we genuinely believe our audience needs to know about.

Our 2026 LFTO Gear Awards celebrate the standout products we’ve used, abused and rated. Seventeen winners across 17 key categories – each one earning its spot through real-world testing and honest evaluation.

Each product has been hand-picked by one or more of our team as a genuine recommendation – nobody buys their way into our Gear Awards. Some will be the best product we've ever tested in that categories, others have earned their place for doing things a bit differently. But all are genuinely brilliant.

So scroll down to see which kit we believe every hiker, runner and camper needs to know about this spring – and keep your eye on the LFTO website, as we'll be publishing full write-ups of each winner over the next two weeks.

Meet the testers

The LFTO team is made up of experienced gear testers with decades of experience between them.

Our group editor Oli is a lifelong hiker and former editor of Trail magazine, our deputy editor Rob has 11 years of gear reviewing under his belt, our digital writers Milo and Evie are both passionate runners and hikers, and our long-term contributors James, Kate and Matt live and work in outdoorsy locations, so are perfectly placed to test kit in the environment it's been designed for.

Every team member has chosen products and had a big say in this year's LFTO Gear Awards, which are the biggest of their kind we've ever done.

To make our final selection, we headed to Plas y Brenin National Outdoor Centre, which we then used as a base for final testing and photography around Eryri National Park.

LFTO Gear Awards 2026

Hiking boot: La Sportiva Aequilibrium Hike GTX

No matter the price, a properly brilliant boot will pay you back over and over, which is exactly the case here with the La Sportiva Aequilibrium Hike GTX. It's robust, grippy, protective, not too warm and, ultimately, just so damn reliable.

Matt says: "For me, what really sets this boot apart from the crowded 3-season market is the grip. The Vibram outsole’s combination of tacky rubber and seriously deep lugs is, simply, the best I’ve encountered on mixed terrain – broken rock, slick grass slopes, jumbled scree, boggy moorland or muddy approach paths."

For more info, take a look at our detailed explanation of why this is our walking boot of the year.

Hiking shoe: Oboz Katabatic LT GTX

The Oboz Katabatic LT GTX is light, nimble, responsive and encourages you to push the pace rather than plod. Comfort is high and stability is impressive for a hiking shoe, while grip on rocky mountain terrain is genuinely exceptional.

Matt says: "For the kind of hiker the Katabatic is designed for – one who thinks in multiples of 10 when it comes to mileage, who wants a shoe that can keep up with their ambitions – we reckon these are genuinely exceptional."

Read our full Oboz Katabatic LT GTX review for more analysis or read why we picked it as hiking shoe of the year.

Waterproof jacket: Mountain Equipment Lhotse/Manaslu

There's a reason this jacket keeps winning awards – it's simply brilliant, and the latest iteration continues the theme. It sports a new a new Gore-Tex ePE membrane that's free from forever chemicals yet still performs exceptionally well. The features are spot on, you get handy pit zips and the hood is one of the best we've used.

Matt says: "What separates the Lhotse from similarly specced rivals is the cut and articulation. Mountain Equipment’s alpine fit is generous enough for a full layering system underneath, while the pre-shaped sleeves and gusseted underarms mean you can move freely – arms overhead, even with ice axe in hand, scrambling up something steeper than anticipated – without the jacket riding up or bunching."

Take a closer look at this award-winning waterproof jacket.

Insulated jacket: Montane Fortes XT Hooded Jacket

The Fortes XT feels like it's built for terrible British weather. It uses 160g/m² of PrimaLoft Gold Active Vent around the torso and a lighter 60g/m² in the hood and underarms – high-quality synthetic fill that stays warm even in damp conditions. A strong feature set and excellent hood round out a winning combination.

Evie says: "Static warmth is the Fortes XT's niche – and within it, nothing we've tested comes close. There's a particular enjoyment in reaching for the Montane Fortes XT at the end of a cold day, when you just need to feel warm again. You pull it on, and within about thirty seconds you can feel it doing its job. It's the kind of jacket that makes you wonder how you ever managed without it."

Find our more in our explanation of why we picked this as our insulated jacket of the year.

Daypack: Osprey Talon/Tempest 22

This isn't the first time we've given the Osprey Tempest (or men's Talon) an award, and it may not be the last, because this is the crème de la crème of hiking daypacks. It absolutely nails the brief when it comes to features and comfort, and while it's not a lightweight pick, it simply oozes quality.

Evie says: "For hikers who've never quite found the right daypack, the Osprey Tempest 22 might just be a dream come true. If you walk on varied terrain, struggle with pack fit and want something that'll handle whatever you throw at it, it's a very easy recommendation."

Read Evie's full justification on why this is our hiking daypack of the year.

Backpacking pack: Gregory Baltoro 65

When comfort and organisation is at the top of your wish list for a backpacking pack, this is the option for you. The Gregory Baltoro 65 is stable, comfortable over long days and there's an embarrassment of riches when it comes to features and pockets.

Matt says: "The Gregory Baltoro 65 is the bit of kit that has played the biggest part in my shift in mindset away from 'light is always right'. It’s really comfortable. In fact, it might even be the most comfortable pack I’ve ever carried in the hills."

Want to know more? Here's why Matt picked the Baltoro as backpacking pack of the year.

Head torch: BioLite Range 300

This small, lightweight, quick-charging and powerful head torch made a huge impression on Matt Jones, who named it his standout choice for weight-conscious campers, backpackers and runners.

Matt says: "One of the lightest, most comfortable head torches I've worn – and the one that now lives in the lid of my rucksack. Fifty-one grams. Forget it's there. That's the whole review, really."

Read our full BioLite Range 300 review for more info or find out why exactly we picked this product as head torch of the year.

Trekking poles: Black Diamond Trail Vista FLZ

Functionality, packability and reliability are what we always look for when testing the best poles, which are such a crucial part of your kit list if you're hiking in the mountains or taking on multi-day treks. The Trail Vista FLZ may not be the most spectacularly featured poles out there, but when it comes to performance, we think they're unmatched.

Matt says: "Bottom line? Sometimes the best poles aren’t always the ones with the most impressive spec sheet. They’re the ones that stop being something you think about and become something you simply rely on. For me, the Trail Vista FLZ earned that status very quickly. Brilliantly packable, solid when it counts, and thoughtfully designed."

Read our full Black Diamond Trail Vista FLZ poles review for more or see Matt's shorter explanation on why he picked this product as our walking pole of the year.

GPS watch: Coros Pace 4

In a world where GPS watches are now costing four figures, the Coros Pace 4 feels like the perfect antidote. It costs a very reasonable £229, yet comes with a vibrant AMOLED screen, loads of handy training features and uses one of the most user-friendly interfaces we've seen on a watch.

Rob says: "Today's range-topping smartwatches offer huge screens and so much functionality that it’ll blow your mind. But the truth is, many of us don’t need all of that. And the Coros Pace 4 shows why. I’ve had it wrapped around my wrist for months, so it’s come with me on mountain hikes, cycle rides, gym sessions and plenty of runs. In that time, there’s not much I’ve really felt I’m missing out on."

For more from Rob, read why he picked the Coros Pace 4 as LFTO's GPS watch of the year.

Backpacking tent: MSR Hubba Hubba LT 2

Despite some low hydrostatic head numbers when it comes to waterproofing (which is usual for US brands), this tent held up well during soggy, gusty spring campouts. Ultimately, though, the reason it features here is because it has to be the most liveable lightweight two-person tent we've tested.

Matt says: "I’ve been pitching tents in the UK long enough to have strong opinions about what makes a good one. Peak height matters as much as floor area. Rectangular footprints beat tapered ones. Metal hardware outlasts plastic. Fast, fuss-free pitching beats clever but complex design. And good condensation management can be the difference between a pleasant night and a miserable one. The MSR Hubba Hubba LT 2 ticks every single one of those boxes – and it does it at 1.36kg."

Visit Matt's full MSR Hubba Hubba LT 2 review for more info or read his full explanation of why it's our backpacking tent of the year.

Family tent: Outwell Sacramento 6 Air

If we had to move out of our house and permanently live inside of a tent, this is probably the one we'd be picking, even if it is one of the more expensive options on the market. The quality is mightily impressive, it provides a luxurious amount of space and it oozes class with its many clever features. As an inflatable tent, it's pretty easy to set up, too!

Alex says: "It’s tempting to think of budget family tents as 'good value', but actual, proper value comes from durability and intelligent design. True value is a tent that you can rely on to be a comfortable home from home for many years. In a nutshell, that’s what Outwell’s Sacramento Air 6 offers. Take it from me, it’s a sound investment."

Read our Outwell Sacramento Air 6 review for more analysis or see Alex's full justification on why this is our family tent of the year.

Sleeping bag: Sea to Summit Spark Ultralight -1C

Take a look at the numbers around the Sea to Summit Spark Ultralight -1C and you'll begin to understand why we rate it so highly. Our women's version weighs just 584g and for that you get a comfort temperature of -1ºC and a limit of -7ºC. Throw in a pack size similar to a Nalgene bottle and you have a winner.

Evie says: "If you're an ultralighter, someone who's thought carefully about every gram in their pack and wants the best warmth-to-weight ratio money can buy, this is it. I don't know of anything else at this weight that will keep you this warm."

Want to know more? Find out why Evie picked this product as our sleeping bag of the year.

Sleeping mat: Nemo Eclipse

The Nemo Eclipse delivers on so many levels. It has an R-value of 6.2 (so can be used year-round) and is insanely comfortable, with around 10cm of loft. It's easy to inflate, reasonably packable and very good value for money.

Evie says: "The Eclipse is competitive on every single variable that matters to campers, without making any serious sacrifices. It undercuts many of the best sleeping mats on price, outperforms them on warmth, and still manages to be the comfiest I've ever slept on."

See our Nemo Eclipse review for more detail or see Evie's justification for awarding it sleeping mat of the year.

Camping stove: Jetboil Flash 1.0L

No, it won't be your first choice if you're religiously counting every single gram. And yes, it's at the pricier end of the market. But put that aside and you have a stove that will deliver for you time and time again. It's quick and easy to set up, boils 500ml of water in just over two minutes, packs down into itself, the lid has strainer holes for draining and there's an indicator on the side to let you know when your water is boiling.

Matt says: "This is the original all-in-one stove system, now refined to near-perfection – fast, efficient and foolproof in the field."

Get more detail in this Jetboil Flask 1.0L review or read Matt's full justification for making it our camping stove of the year.

Trail running shoe: Saucony Xodus Ultra 4

We love the Xodus Ultra 4 because it's versatile and inspires confidence. It's proved its mettle on technical trail terrain, wet, sloppy ground and hard road surfaces, expertly balancing cushioning and trail feedback in the process.

Milo says: "Some trail running shoes earn attention by doing one very specific thing brilliantly. The Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 earns its award by doing almost everything well. It's not the lightest, fastest or most specialised trail shoe I've tested this year, but it's the one I'd trust for almost everything."

See Milo's full analysis in his Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 review, or see why he picked it as our trail running shoe of the year.

Running pack: Osprey Dyna Pro 7L

Osprey has once again shown its pedigree with the Dyna Pro. This is a feature-packed running pack that combines comfort, quality and usability expertly. It does the basics brilliantly, yet goes much further than that.

Evie says: "The Osprey Dyna Pro is the kind of running vest you can forget you're wearing – stable, comfy, with very little bounce. But for me, what elevates it above the rest is the storage options; it's simply so well thought through for running."

For more detail, read Evie's full write-up on why this bag is our running pack of the year.

Running jacket: Rab Phantom Mountain

It's not the lightest, most packable running jacket we've ever used, but it's the one that we'd reach for on serious running adventures. It delivers brilliant weather protection, has great features and feels genuinely breathable, which makes for a winning combination.

Milo says: "The Rab Phantom Mountain is our running jacket of the year because it strikes the balance most waterproof mountain running jackets miss. It's light enough to carry when you might not need it, protective enough to wear when you do, tough enough to feel useful beyond race-day emergencies and comfortable enough that you won't melt minutes after putting it on."

For a longer explanation, read why we picked the Phantom Mountain as our running jacket of the year here.

About the authors

This article was put together by editor Oli Reed and deputy editor Rob Slade. Between them, they have 25 years of experience in outdoor journalism and have tested thousands of products in that time. The LFTO gear testing team have reviewed every product you see here after putting it to use in real-world environments. They include Matt Jones, Evie Nichols, Alex Foxfield and Milo Wilson.

GP and running coach Jenny Hartley has won the women’s Montane Summer Spine Race after converting a long-held lead and finishing in a time of 104:55:46.

The Army veteran started the event at 8am on Sunday 18 June and crossed the finish line at 4.55pm on Thursday 18 June, with second-placed runner Danielle Macgill currently around 11 miles behind.

Meanwhile, the men’s winner was crowned the day before, with Irish ultrarunner Ed Payne crossing the finish line in a time of 82:28:07.

The Montane Summer Spine Race is a non-stop 268-mile ultramarathon that sees runners compete on one of the country’s most iconic footpaths – the Pennine Way. The route takes the competitors through the Peak District, Yorkshire Dales and Northumberland, eventually finishing just over the Scottish border in Kirk Yetholm.

People often refer to it as Britain’s most brutal endurance race, with competitors running over multiple days, through day and night, choosing to grab fleeting moments of sleep whenever it feels absolutely necessary.

The fastest female finisher to date is Anna Troup, who completed the race in an incredible time of 78:57:49 in 2022. Troup was also the winner in 2025 and in the 2026 Winter Spine Race.

Years in the making

Hartley has been running since the age of 16, when she joined the Army. After 19 years of service she was medically discharged. An appearance at the 2023 Invictus Games then followed, where she won gold medals in the 100m and 1,500m races. She’s also previously ran a 3:03 marathon and podiumed at two ultramarathons.

However, this is the first time she’s ever ran further than 100 miles in one go. Along the way, she’s battled midges, sleep deprivation, illness and painful limbs.

Speaking in a video on her Instagram three days in, she said: “I’ve been running for so long that my sore throat’s got better, my foot’s healed, everything that was bad however many days ago is better.”

A brutal undertaking

While the Montane Winter Spine Race adds an extra layer of brutality due to the weather and sub-zero conditions, the Summer Spine Race is still up there as one of the most challenging events around.

The average finisher rate across all of the years that the event has been running is just 59.5%. The average finisher time is 131:25:50, or to put it in simpler terms five days, 11 hours and just under 26 minutes.

Before this year, only 657 athletes had lined up at the start line and 391 had finished.

Crossing the finish line is an unbelievable accomplishment for everyone, and it’s likely to feel even sweeter for Hartley due to past injuries.

“I’m now an injured runner with a knee that will never fully heal,” she writes on her run coaching website. Hartley has had a chronic knee injury for a while and was well aware of it when she lined up to take on the Dragons Back Race in 2024. By her own admission, it was both her greatest setback and one of her proudest achievements.

During that race, her knee held out until day four. From then on, she was only able to take downhills if she was going backward. Agonisingly, she timed out at the end of day five, just five minutes short.

There was no such heartbreak this week, though. And now she has another proud achievement that will live long in the memory.

Trail running has a habit of escalating quickly – one minute it’s a muddy local 10K, the next you’re eyeing up ultra marathons and convincing yourself running up mountains at night sounds fun.

And that progression can happen faster than you’d think. Across the UK, more runners are stepping beyond road marathons and into longer, tougher events – from fell races to all-day ultras crossing hilltops, valleys and forests. The appeal is obvious. Bigger scenery, bigger challenges and a greater sense of adventure than chasing a PB around city streets.

But as the distances grow, so does the importance of your kit. When you’re spending hour after hour on technical terrain, climbing through unpredictable weather and carrying mandatory gear on your back, the right equipment stops being a luxury and starts becoming part of your performance. Comfortable shoes, a dependable waterproof and a well-fitted running pack can genuinely make or break your day.

Trail running coach Gary House knows that better than most. Fresh from competing in the brutal Fellsman Dart ultra-marathon in the Yorkshire Dales – a race famous for steep climbs, exposed trails and rapidly changing conditions – Gary instinctively knows what kit could really make the difference when you reach the start line.

With so much gear on the market, it can be difficult to know what's genuinely worth spending your money on. So rather than listing every product he likes, we asked Gary to identify the five pieces of kit he'd prioritise if he was preparing for an ultra this year. These are the products he'd buy first, trust most and happily race with tomorrow.

1. Best ultra shoes

Gary's top pick: Hoka Mafete 5

“I first started using these shoes last August on the dry trails around Chamonix, where they felt absolutely perfect, but I’ve also found they cope really well with most UK trails through spring and summer. For long-distance running, they hit a really good balance between comfort, grip and protection without feeling overly bulky.

“What I like most is that you still get a really good feel for the terrain underneath you, which becomes important on technical trails when your legs are tired. They’re cushioned enough for huge days out, but still responsive and confidence-inspiring when the ground changes constantly.”

Slightly cheaper, still great: Merrell Agility Peak 6

2. Best trail running jacket

Gary's top pick: Montane Phase Lite GORE-TEX

“One bit of kit I’ll never compromise on is my waterproof jacket. In long mountain races, the weather can turn very quickly, so you need something you completely trust when conditions get rough.

“This jacket gets the balance right between weight, breathability and proper protection. Small details like the hood fit, zippers and overall cut make a huge difference over a full day in the hills, and it packs down small enough that you barely notice it’s there.”

Slightly cheaper, still great: Rab Phantom Mountain Jacket

3. Best running pack

Gary's top pick: Salomon Adv Skin 12 Running Backpack

“The kit list for races like the Fellsman is pretty extensive, so having a pack that carries everything comfortably without bouncing around is really important. It ended up being a hot day when I used this, and it never felt like it trapped heat the way some packs can.

“The pocket layout is spot on for long races because everything is easy to access while moving. Once it’s fitted properly, it almost disappears on your back, which is exactly what you want after 10 or 12 hours on the trails.”

Slightly cheaper, still great: Ultimate Direction Hydration

4. Best running poles

Gary's top pick: Mountain King SkyRunner Edge

“It was my first time racing with these poles after training with them for a few months beforehand. I’ve used poles in mountain terrain all over the world over the years, and the big thing for me is confidence – they need to feel lightweight, comfortable and strong enough that you never worry about them.

“In an ultra, poles can save a huge amount of energy on long climbs, especially later in the race when fatigue kicks in. These felt incredibly reliable the whole day.”

Slightly cheaper, still great: OMM Z-Lite Carbon

5. Best GPS running watch

Gary's top pick: Garmin Fenix 8 Pro

“This was the first time I’d used the Garmin Fenix 8 in a race environment, but it was incredibly straightforward to customise the data screens exactly how I wanted them. During a long ultra, being able to quickly access the information you actually need makes a huge difference.

“The ClimbPro feature was especially useful on big ascents and I’ll definitely use that more going forward. Even with maps running throughout the race, the battery life was more than enough, and most importantly, it kept me confidently on route all day.”

Slightly cheaper, still great: Suunto Race 2

The reality is you don’t need the absolute best and most expensive kit to get started in trail running. But once you take the step into longer races and more committing terrain, investing in reliable gear becomes part of enjoying the experience rather than simply surviving it.

So if you’re training for your first ultra this year, matching the right gear to the right terrain is essential.

To view the latest running releases for spring and summer 2026, visit sportsshoes.com

Picking one trail running shoe as a winner in our 2026 LFTO Gear Awards involved long runs, technical trails, muddy miles, hard road sections and dozens of shoes, but eventually one stood out above the rest.

The Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 won me over thanks to its rare mix of grip, cushioning, protection and all-terrain versatility, quickly becoming the shoe I trusted for almost any kind of trail run.

Read on for the full story of why this brilliantly balanced trail shoe fully deserves its accolade as LFTO's 2026 trail running shoe of the year...

Why the Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 is our trail running shoe of the year

Some trail running shoes earn attention by doing one very specific thing brilliantly. The Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 earns its award by doing almost everything well.

Of course, there's never going to be one trail running shoe that's best for absolutely everyone, because trail runners are a diverse lot who approach the hobby from very different places. Some want a featherweight racing shoe. Some want a mud monster. Many these days want a road-to-trail cruiser that won't punish them on the pavement.

It's not the lightest, fastest or most specialised trail shoe I've tested this year. It's the one I'd trust for almost everything.

As professional gear testers, we've tried dozens of shoes across all those niches, and we've picked the shoe that impressed us most across the widest range of conditions. This year, that shoe is the Saucony Xodus Ultra 4.

Versatility is getting harder to find

Trail running shoes have become increasingly specialised in recent years. You can buy carbon-plated rockets for race day, deep-lugged fell running shoes for sloppy mud, super-soft maximal shoes for easy miles and stiff, stripped-back low-stack shoes for technical terrain.

That range of choice is brilliant, obviously. But it also means some trail shoes feel excellent in one setting and dreadful everywhere else. A shoe that's aggressive and fast on wet hills can feel like a tractor on the road. Conversely, a fast, bouncy race shoe can feel totally out of its depth on more difficult trails.

The Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 stands out because it doesn't suffer with any of that. Of the dozens of trail running shoes I've run in this year, I haven't found another that handles technical trail terrain, wet, sloppy ground and hard road surfaces with the same level of confidence. It's not the lightest shoe, nor the fastest, nor the most aggressively lugged. But it is the one that does the most things brilliantly.

Balanced, not boring

Balance can sound like faint praise, but it's at the centre of this shoe's whole approach. It's our winner this year specifically because it pulls off a whole series of precisely struck balances, between cushioning and feedback, tacky grip and a smooth ride, and many more dichotomies that are hard to satisfy.

Here's one: the upper is plush and comfortable, but not so thick or over-padded that it loses precision. It absolutely wraps the foot securely, helped by a snug internal fit, reinforced overlays and extra-long laces that can be locked down through the final eyelet. On tricky rock sections and steep descents, I felt totally confident placing each step.

It's also tougher than it first appears. Saucony went big on reinforcement here, with a protective toebox, a stiff heel collar and a durable mesh construction that feels almost hiking-shoe-esque, certainly built for long days rather than quick blasts around the woods. There are even D-rings for gaiter attachments, which tells you plenty about the kind of outings this shoe has in mind.

Comfortable over long distances

The midsole follows the same theme. Saucony uses a PWRRUN PB core wrapped in a PWRRUN frame, with 36mm of stack in the heel and 30mm in the forefoot. In normal human language, that means you get a lot of cushioning underfoot, but with enough structure to stop the whole thing feeling wobbly.

Out of the box, the Xodus Ultra 4 feels gorgeously comfortable. After a 20km run, my feet still felt fresh, which is about as sincere as trail shoe praise gets. Some shoes feel excellent for the first hour, then gradually fade as the miles build. This one holds its shape, support and comfort deep into longer runs.

What I can't get over is that it still gives you loads of feedback from the ground. Despite the generous cushioning, it doesn't turn every trail into a vague, numb platform. You can still read the terrain beneath you, which matters when you're moving over roots, rocks, loose descents and uneven ground. It also just matters because feeling the ground is part of what makes trail running fun.

Grippy across mixed terrain

Then there's the outsole, which is the bit that makes me grin slightly too much whenever I pull these shoes on. Saucony has swapped its own PWRTRAC rubber for full-length Vibram MegaGrip, paired with 4mm chevron-shaped lugs. The lugs point forward in the forefoot for climbing and backward under the heel for braking, which helps inform how you should run in them.

On wet rock, hard-packed trail and loose descents, the grip is superb. Hairpin turns feel controlled, braking feels secure and the shoe has a satisfying bite that makes you feel like you're almost attacking the trail. Those arrowhead chevrons genuinely make me feel like I'm wearing a pair of weapons on my feet.

There are limits. The lugs sit close enough together that they can clog in thick woodland bogs, so this isn't a pure mud shoe. But of course, the Xodus Ultra 4 isn't trying to be a specialist fell shoe for knee-deep slop. It's trying to be a durable, capable all-rounder that you can reach for when a single route includes road, gravel, slick stone and muddy forest track.

Who should buy the Saucony Xodus Ultra 4?

If you want one trail shoe for long runs, ultra training, mountain days and mixed routes where the terrain changes every few miles, the Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 is a straightforward recommendation.

It's especially well suited to runners who prioritise comfort, protection and dependable grip over low weight or outright speed. If you spend most of your time racing short distances, there are faster shoes. If you live in the fells and spend every winter ankle-deep in slop, you'll probably want bigger lugs. But if you want a trail shoe that can take on almost everything, this is the pair I'd recommend first. If you still need convincing, here's my full Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 review.

Verdict

The Saucony Xodus Ultra 4 is our best trail running shoe of the year because it understands what most trail runners really need. It's comfortable over distance, grippy across mixed terrain, protective on technical trails and versatile enough to make the complicated choice feel simple.

About the author

Milo Wilson is LFTO's long-serving trail running gear tester and three-time picker of our winner in the best trail running shoe category. He's gone through more footwear than you've had hot dinners. Milo is based in the Surrey Hills and loves nothing more than a long, ploddy run through the undulating trails of his home on a sunny Sunday. He also runs our #Run1000Miles challenge.

I’m a long-time fan of Deuter. In my experience over a couple of decades of using their packs, they make solid, confidence-inspiring packs that feel pretty much bombproof on any terrain. And they've always been up there with the best hiking daypacks on the market.

I used the iconic Deuter Guide for years in winter mountains and was constantly amazed at how well it stood up to abuse. So after a few years away from testing the brand, I couldn’t wait to get the Futura Pro 32 out on the hill.

Over the past few months, I’ve given this pack a proper workout. It’s been with me on a cracking couple of days in the Yorkshire Dales, including a 15-mile shift on the Dragon’s Ascent from Hardraw Force to the Tan Hill Inn. It’s also been hauled up Haystacks in the Lakes with my two young sons (10 and 7), when I was carrying a frankly heroic amount of extra layers, snacks and emergency 'morale boosters'. In short: it’s been tested properly.

The quick verdict? This is the best hiking pack I’ve used in years.

I’m a huge fan of ventilated back systems and have never really minded the extra weight they add. If it keeps me dry and comfortable over a long day, I’ll take a few extra grams every time. And the Futura Pro absolutely delivers on that front.

Add in a superb lid, sensible pocket layout, a proper wet compartment and lots of thoughtful little touches, and you’ve got a pack that has everything hikers need and nothing they don’t. It also feels like it’ll still be going strong for many miles – and many years – down the line.

Back system

The Futura Pro 32 is built around Deuter’s Aircomfort back system with ActiveFit shoulder straps, and comfort really is king here. Not just the “feels nice when you first put it on” kind of comfort, either – I’m talking about all-day, 15-mile, warm-day comfort.

Deuter makes a big deal of the breathability in the shoulder straps and hip fins, and in use that absolutely rings true. On that long Dales day, moisture management was excellent. No sweaty, clammy back at the end of it, which is always a win.

The Aircomfort system holds the pack around 10cm away from your back, creating a proper ventilation gap that allows air to circulate freely. Yes, this kind of trampoline-style system inevitably adds some structure and a touch of bulk, but back-system tech has moved on massively in the past decade. I wouldn’t describe the Futura Pro as overly bulky or cumbersome.

Are there lighter 30-litre packs out there? Of course. But they’re built for a different type of hiker. This is a technical backpack designed for serious walkers carrying a decent load in proper mountain terrain. It’s not one for gram-shavers.

And while it’s not what it’s designed for, that ventilation gap is also surprisingly handy for quickly stashing a waterproof or lightweight layer when you’re on the move.

Back length and sizing

I’m always pleased to see an adjustable back length on a pack like this, and the Futura Pro’s system is excellent.

You get five levels of adjustment, from Small to Large, operated via a simple plastic clasp. Lift it, slide the VariClick system up or down, lock it back in place. It couldn’t really be simpler, and once set it holds securely. I’m a fairly lanky 6ft 1in (185cm), and the longest setting worked perfectly for me, which might help as a rough guide.

Because of that adjustability, the pack only comes in one size. You just dial it in to suit your frame. There are, however, three colourways to choose from for summer 2026 – Black, Cherry Masala and Nightblue Baltic, which is the one I’ve been using.

Volume, shape and weight

I tested the 32-litre version, but the wider Futura range runs from 24 litres up to 40. For me, 32 litres is the sweet spot for longer day hikes and full-on mountain days.

It might sound generous for a daypack, but once you’ve packed spare layers, gloves, hat, sun cream, lunch, water, a first aid kit and all the extras that come with walking with kids (as I often do) it fills up quickly.

I’ve always felt – and this might just be me – that curved trampoline back systems slightly eat into usable capacity. The more rigid structure means you can’t quite jam gear in the way you can with softer packs. At times, the main compartment feels more like a 26- or 28-litre space. That said, that could just be perception rather than reality.

What you gain, though, is structure. Built around a flexible spring steel frame, the pack feels stable and secure. It doesn’t sag, flop or shift about as you walk, even when properly loaded.

Weight will be a talking point. At over 1,500g, it’s heavier than many comparable packs. But I’d be wary of calling it 'heavy' in a negative sense. You simply don’t get this level of ventilation, comfort and durability without some extra material and structure. If you’re willing to accept that trade-off – and I am – those extra grams are easily justified.

There are plenty of adjustment points too: hip belt and shoulder straps, side compression straps to cinch the load down, and load lifters where the shoulder straps meet the pack to fine-tune how it sits. Once fully adjusted to your body, it carries beautifully.

Features

There’s a long list of features on paper, but here are the ones that really stood out to me.

First up, the lid. It’s not adjustable or removable – more of a substantial pouch stitched above the drawcord opening – and I really like that simplicity. What makes it work are the pockets. Underneath there’s a small zipped pocket for valuables like a wallet and keys. On top, a larger zipped pocket (complete with key clip) that’s ideal for gloves, hat, sunglasses and snacks. The kind of things you don’t want to rummage for every time you stop.

The two small zipped hip-belt pockets are spot on as well. Perfect for sweets, mints or nuts – and essential bribes when walking with children.

Inside, there’s a wet compartment that comes into its own when your waterproof inevitably gets soaked. I’m also a big fan of the separate zipped compartment at the base of the pack. It’s ideal for stashing kit you’re unlikely to need in a hurry – first aid kit, spare base layer etc – and it’s big enough for a lightweight sleeping bag or mat if you’re stretching to an overnight wild camp.

The stretchy mesh pockets on the sides and front are generously sized and properly usable – great for bottles, maps or stuffing in a layer.

Then there are the small but useful details: an SOS label under the lid, ice axe and pole attachment points, and a neat sunglasses stow system on the shoulder strap. None of them shout for attention, but together they add up to a very complete, considered package.

Final verdict

The Deuter Futura Pro 32 is a classic mountain hiking pack, built for long days over rugged ground.
If you’re after a stripped-back, ultralight daypack, this isn’t it. But if you value ventilation, comfort, stability, durability and genuinely useful features, it’s hard to think of a better option right now.

For me, this is one of the best hiking packs I’ve ever used – and without question the best I’ve used in years. I fully expect it to be on my back for much of the next decade and, knowing Deuter, probably well beyond that.

Want something with a bit of extra room? Check out our list of the best backpacking packs.

About the author

Oli Reed is the former editor of Trail magazine who grew up in the moody Yorkshire hills and has been testing outdoor gear for decades. He's a passionate hiker, seasonally enthusiastic wild camper, and these days spends most of his days figuring out which mountain to climb next with his two young boys.

Irish ultrarunner Ed Payne has won the men's Montane Summer Spine Race 2026, marking the end of an exhausting 82 hour run along the 268 mile Pennine Way.

After setting off at 8am on Sunday 14 June, the farmer and dad crossed the finish line at 18:28pm on Wednesday 17 June – with a time of 82:28:07. That's just under 12 hours behind Tiaan Erwee’s 2022 summer Spine record of 70:46:50.

Ed crossed the line with a lead of roughly 27 miles from the closest competitor, Samuel Adams. At the lead in the women's race was Jenny Hartley – updates to follow.

“No right to talk at all about finishing this”

Ed is no stranger to the podium, or to the Spine. Last September, he won the 220km Race Across Wales. He attempted the summer Spine last year, before having to pull out near Dufton as a result of foot issues. “Will I be back… Honestly I’m not sure yet!”, he wrote in a blog.

He came back. But if his pre-race demeanour was anything to go by, few would have predicted a dominant win. Days before the start, he posted a video poking fun at his own preparation, joking about the "extraordinarily organised people" in his group – and then, pointedly, himself. "I don't know anything after Dufton," he admitted.

"The mood is good, the body is where it is. I'd love to say I'm feeling strong and I've practiced with the pack – but I can't. What I can say is I'm much more comfortable with just finishing." He even went on to say that, "I have no real right to talk at all about finishing this – as I have no proof that I'm able to do that".

Safe to say there's enough proof now. After last year’s defeat, this year marks a renaissance for the runner, who describes himself as an ‘ultra running, ultra farmer’. The Irish Independent reported last year that he has a 370 acre farm, where he manages 550 cows. "I don't see 550 cows as an excuse not to be fit," he told the Irish Independent last year – though he admitted he had used them as one.

Britain’s most brutal… and most beautiful?

The Montane Spine Race is widely regarded as one of the hardest endurance events in the world. Starting in Edale, Derbyshire, runners head north through the Peak District, Yorkshire Dales and Northumberland before finishing in Kirk Yetholm, just over the Scottish border.

Often referred to as a ‘race of attrition’, the drop out rate is high. For many competitors the aim is to simply finish. There are no set stages, instead competitors grab snatches of sleep at checkpoints; hallucinations from sleep deprivation are common.

It happens twice a year: once in summer, and once in winter. Last winter’s spine race saw competitors running through snow and ice, in freezing temperatures. Competitor Allie Bailey told us she woke up to ice on her eyelashes.

Montane bills the Spine as ‘Britain’s most brutal’ race, but runners often call it the experience of a lifetime. "Don't get me f***ing wrong, it's not a picnic, but I think it's one of the greatest experiences that a human can have”, Allie said.

Italian athlete Aaron Durogati set a remarkable new world record last week after climbing 19,424m on foot in just 24 hours.

The Altra-sponsored athlete was attempting to set a new 24-hour hike-and-fly record for elevation gain, which was previously held by Frenchman Tanguy Renaud-Goud, who achieved 17,534m of elevation back in 2024.

Durogaticovered all 19,424m of elevation gain on foot, hiking to the summit of Slogen Mountain in Norway, before paragliding back down to the bottom and starting all over again.

He completed 18 laps in total, all while staying on top of a range of variables, including weather conditions, nutrition, night flying and pacing.

All about the details

The record attempt took place in Norway on Slogen Mountain, which tops out at a height of 1,564m. It proved the ideal venue. Starting from close to sea level next to a fjord, each lap involved just 2.57km of distance in exchange for roughly 1,080m of elevation gain. Durogati completed 18 laps.

Fans of Kilian Jornet may recognise the name of the mountain, as it’s where the Spanish athlete took on the vertical kilometre record several years ago.

Taking on the challenge in the north of the country meant that Durogati had daylight for most, but not all, of his record-breaking challenge.

Some of the numbers involved in this record are hard to believe. For starters, an elevation gain of 19,424m is double the height of Mount Everest, the highest mountain in the world. And that was achieved in just 23hrs, 42mins and 32secs.

To hit that amount of ascent within that time frame, the Italian managed to maintain an incredible average climbing rate of 900m per hour.

The top speed he hit while flying was 86km/h, while he covered a total of 103km when you add both the flying and hiking figures together.

For the attempt, Durogati relied on custom-built ultralight gear designed to save vital seconds. He ran in both the Altra Mont Blanc Carbon and Olympus 275 running shoes.

Read more: Run vs hike: What's more efficient for tackling steep hills

What is hike and fly?

Hike and fly is an incredible adventure sport that too few people know about. It typically involves athletes hiking or running up a mountain with paragliding kit on their back and then taking flight to get back down again.

Sometimes the challenge will see athletes repeat that repeatedly within a certain time frame, while events (such as Red Bull X-Alps) can also see athletes moving from checkpoint to checkpoint via the air and the ground.

It’s essentially adventure racing, but instead of the main sports being hiking, running, cycling and paddling, athletes are running, hiking and flying.

Who is Aaron Durogati?

Durogati is an experienced athlete who’s accomplished in multiple mountain disciplines, including climbing, skiing, paragliding and speed riding.

The 41-year-old has two paragliding world titles to his name and last year won Red Bull X-Alps, a paragliding adventure race that sees athletes cover 1,200km across the Alps.

Speaking after setting the new record, he said: “I tried to stay focused on every lap and every step. Breaking the climb into smaller sections helped me stay efficient. The night was challenging, with darker conditions and some rain, but the support team kept me going.”

Reflecting on how he felt, he said: “It feels amazing. This was something missing in my career. It took months of preparation to find the right place, the right setup, and the right moment and in those 24 hours, everything came together.”

On a grisly February walk, the kind that involves horizontal hail and 40mph winds, I didn’t once feel the cold creeping in. It’s not that I’d become one with the elements; it’s because I was wearing the Montane Fortes XT.

That experience is part of the reason its been given the 'insulated jacket of the year’ accolade in our 2026 LFTO Gear Awards. Every year, our team puts hundreds of products through their paces. Occasionally, something stands out as truly special. This is that something.

Let me explain why...

Why the Montane Fortes XT is our insulated jacket of the year

It doesn’t snow often in the Peak District, so when it does, I’m always eager to get out. It’s fun to see the landscape transformed and as a gear tester it’s the kind of day that sorts the good stuff from the great.

There was only one choice of jacket. These are exactly the kind of conditions the Fortes XT is built for. Montane describes it as a Scottish belaying jacket, which is as honest a product description as you'll ever get. Unlike a jacket that provides active insulation, it isn't trying to be breathable on the move; it's trying to keep you alive when you stop. It’s the kind of jacket you want for exposed summits or ridges.

That said, I didn’t get too warm when walking uphill on this particular day, probably because the conditions were so abysmal. You get 160g/m² of PrimaLoft Gold Active Vent around the torso, and a lighter 60g/m² in the hood and underarms. The acrylic-coated 12D nylon ripstop outer shrugged off the wind and shed the hail without fuss, while a two-way zip means you can access your layers without letting all the warmth out in one go.

Easy to live with

It's also been brilliant for cold-weather bouldering; you can chuck it on between problems and instantly warm up. And because it's synthetic, caring for it is refreshingly simple – get chalk on it and you can just throw it in the washing machine at home. And unlike a down jacket, it keeps insulating when it's damp, which in this country means it's reliable all year-round.

It’s got a brilliant set of features, too. The hood adjusts securely with or without a helmet, and has a semi-rigid brim that channels rain away from your face. The cuffs seal neatly over gloves with a simple velcro strap. The internal dump pockets are generously sized – big enough for a hat, a pair of waterproof gloves, or a power bank you're trying to stop from freezing. At 537g for a women's size 8, it's not the lightest jacket in its class, but it's one of those cases where every gram feels accounted for.

The only choice for a squally day

At £325 the Fortes XT sits in serious company and is competing with some of the best synthetic jackets around. But none of them are quite as focused, or as well-suited to the specific job of keeping you warm when you're standing still in miserable British conditions. The Patagonia DAS Light is the most direct rival on mountain credentials; it’s significantly lighter but less warm, and the outer isn’t as durable.

The Arc'teryx Atom Hoody is another obvious name, though it's really a different tool: a more breathable active insulator for higher-output days. The Rab Xenair Alpine at £230 is closer in purpose, and it's a great jacket, but it's built to keep you comfortable on the move as much as at rest. Like the Arctery’x, it trades some of that static warmth for breathability.

Verdict

Static warmth is the Fortes XT's niche – and within it, nothing we've tested comes close. There's a particular enjoyment in reaching for the Montane Fortes XT at the end of a cold day, when you just need to feel warm again. You pull it on and within about 30 seconds you can feel it doing its job. It's the kind of jacket that makes you wonder how you ever managed without it.

Who should buy the Montane Fortes XT?

The obvious, and best, use case is belaying in grim conditions – but it goes beyond that. It's also brilliant for winter bouldering, Munro baggers who refuse to compromise on warmth at the summit and wild campers who need something warm to chuck on in the evening. Basically any discipline that involves standing around in cold air.

About the author

Evie Nichols is LFTO's chief female tester. Evie loves nothing more than being in high and remote places, and in general, she's not fussy whether that's in trail running shoes, climbing shoes, walking boots or on two wheels.

A big fan of multi-day hikes, some of her favourites are the GR20 in Corsica, Mallorca's GR221 and the GR52 in the Alps. Follow her adventures on Instagram @eviejnichols.

The well-named Dreamboat from Danish camping brand Outwell is an impressive product. And it has to be, considering its £260 RRP puts it in a higher cost bracket than much of the competition (including some of the best camping mattresses), though you can get it much cheaper if you shop around.

A premium quality self-inflating mattress, the Dreamboat’s mission is to bring the comfort of your bed at home to your tent. This isn’t a sleeping mat aimed at backpacking, it’s too large and heavy for the fells. However, it’s absolutely in its element at the campsite.

This self-inflating mat uses a memory foam interior that draws air inwards when its valve is opened. Not only is it convenient, it's super-comfortable too – the foam providing more pleasant cushioning than the air inside an airbed. You might think self-inflating means that no effort is required at all, but you’ll need to provide at least a few deep breaths to get the thing fully inflated.

The Dreamboat gives you 16cm of foam insulation. Extra-large, horizontal air cavities provide what Outwell calls “support zones”, which work with the shape of your body to provide the ideal sleeping platform. The result is a supremely comfortable mat that boasts a stratosphere high R-value of 10.6, high enough to insulate in even the depths of winter.

On test, I struggled to find too much wrong with it, other than that its dark green colour isn’t the most inspiring. Though tested here as a single, camping couples will be delighted to hear that the Dreamboat is also available as a double, which has an RRP of £390 but can currently be found for much less.

Comfort

The Dreamboat has a few selling points: the ease with which it inflates, the high levels of insulation it provides, its durable materials and, last but by no means least, it’s comfort. The latter is the one you’d be most likely to write home about. While supportive, the surface has more give than most self-inflating mattresses, making it feel softer and more like my mattress at home.

If I was to cut the mat in half from top to bottom (I like it too much to actually do this though), I’d see a cross section of the air cavities that run horizontally across it. These differ in size, with larger cavities towards the head and middle, and smaller ones elsewhere. These are Outwell’s so called “support zones”, providing the right blend of firm support where needed, along with the right amount of flex in others. The result is an ergonomic mat, one that works with your body.

I’ll admit that this zoning was not overly noticeable whenever I lay on the mat. What was obvious, though, was just how luxuriously comfortable it was. If there’s subtle magic going on beneath the surface, so be it. It’s simply a wonderfully cosy mattress.

Materials, shape and size

It should come as no surprise to anyone who’s ever slept on a pad, mat or bed that the Dreamboat Single is a long rectangle with curved edges. And, at 207x81cm, it’s long enough for even the tallest Premier League goalkeepers. That 81cm width is quite generous for a single mattress and you can forget about getting two of them side by side in most tent bedrooms. Of course, for two people you’d probably want to go for the double version instead, which is 138cm wide.

The main sleeping surface and the bottom of the mat are crafted from recycled and stretchy 30-denier polyester, which provide decent levels of durability while keeping the overall weight down. The sides are made from a robust TPU-coated, 75-denier polyester to guard against abrasion. All the fabrics are, as you’d expect in this day and age, free of PFAS (perfluoroalkyl and polyfluoroalkyl substances). These forever chemicals were once used in many mass-produced products and are mostly banned in the UK now.

Inflation and deflation

The Dreamboat has a single 'Flat High-Flow' valve for inflation and deflation. Unlike other valves present on these kinds of mats, it doesn’t pivot to switch between being open and closed. Instead, the position of the rubbery diaphragm can be altered by pulling out or pushing in a protruding tag. When pushed in, the valve is open and air can both enter and leave the mat. When pulled out, air can’t escape but you can breathe more in to achieve the required firmness. A cap keeps everything airtight once fully inflated.

Not only is the valve well designed, it’s also compatible with electric pumps too, were you wanting super-fast inflation. I found that, left to its own self-inflating devices, the mat assumed its shape after around nine minutes. After this, it just required a dozen or so deep breaths from me and it was ready.

The mat deflates in the same way as other self-inflating mats, with one roll to expel the majority of the air and a second to really squeeze every last bit of it, before puling the valve into the closed position.

Next to the valve are handy and straightforward instructions for both inflation and deflation and a couple of diagrams showing the open and closed positions. It’s all very foolproof.

Warmth and R-value

A sleeping mattress’ R-value is one of the first things you should look for when it comes to its specs. This value gives an indication of a mat’s thermal resistance – basically how well it insulates you from the cold beneath your tent. It’s a case of the higher than R-value, the better. Self-inflating mats designed for family camping generally have much higher R-values than backpacking pads and anything above 5 will be fine for all but the most Baltic conditions.

With an R-value of 14.8, the Dreamboat is a sleeping platform you could confidently use in the Arctic. I slept on it during some chilly spring nights and, rather unsurprisingly, my body’s warmth won the battle with the chill of the ground some 16cm below.

Weight and packed size

Another benefit of the Dreamboat’s large horizontal cavities is that it doesn’t weigh as much when deflated as I thought it might. The Single weighs 3.8kg and packs down into a handy 78x22cm tube that’s dead easy to carry around and slides easily into a slot in a packed car.

For a direct weight comparison, the Double version of the mat weighs similar to Decathlon’s impressive Quechua Ultim Comfort Double, at 6kg. While the Ultim Comfort has a commendable R-value of 8.6, the Dreamboat manages to achieve 14.8. So, in pure warmth-to-weight terms, the Dreamboat appears to be a winner.

It’s easy to pack away too and comes with elasticated compression straps that hold everything together. If you have space at home, it’s worth taking them off once you’re done transporting the mat, as these straps can negatively impact its shape over time.

Verdict

This is an excellent self-inflating mat that does an admirable job of bringing the comfort of home to your tent. It’s light and easy to transport, boasts a rocket-high R-value and is luxurious to relax upon. It’s too large and heavy for wild campers but will be right at home at a campsite. Yes, it’s pricier than most of the competition but I’d say its quality makes it a decent value investment.

About the author

As a qualified Mountain Leader, avid wild camper and a family man, Alex Foxfield enjoys camping in all its forms. An expert on all things outdoor gear, he’s been testing and reviewing backpacking can car camping kit for many years.

Vango has to be one of Britain’s best-loved camping brands. It’s still probably best known for its tents, but also offers a solid range of camping stoves and cooking kit – and the Inferno Double Cooker is one of the more compelling products in it. It’s a compact, fold-flat twin-burner stove designed for campsites, campervans, base camps and family trips, running on standard EN417 screw-in gas canisters and packing down into a surprisingly tidy package.

With an RRP of £85 – frequently available for less – it matches or undercuts most of its direct rivals on price while offering a good balance of different qualities.

The obvious comparisons are with other popular dual-burner camp stoves, like the Campingaz Camp & Trek Twin Connect, Robens Fire Hornet Basecamp, Outwell Mauna Duo and Primus Kinjia, all of which we’ve also tested here at LFTO. These types of stoves are broadly aimed at the same user and generally priced within £25 of each other, apart from the premium Primus option, but they take meaningfully different approaches.

The Inferno Double is the only model among its peers that folds flat – a design trait it shares with the much more expensive Jetboil Genesis, which is more than four times the price of the Inferno Double. As a budget version of that stove, it’s a compelling option.

Design and build quality

The Inferno Double’s most immediately impressive feature is its folding design. The two burner units fold together into a low, flat package that takes up very little space in a car boot or campervan cupboard, and rubber straps keep everything locked together securely in transit so it doesn’t rattle. A built-in carry handle makes it easy to move from car to pitch.

The whole thing feels considerably more considered than a conventional rigid twin-burner with a suitcase-style lid, or a standalone unit with a soft carry case like the Campingaz Camp and Trek Twin Connect.

Construction is largely steel and robust plastic, and the build quality feels appropriate for the price point: solid enough without being premium. The steel burner heads will oxidise with use – purely cosmetic, as on most stoves in this category – and the control knob markings are basic stickers rather than etched or printed graphics, which means they’ll fade or peel in time.

It’s a minor gripe, but a slightly cheap touch on an otherwise well-considered design.

The recessed cooking area acts as a partial drip tray, catching spills and helping shield the flames from light breezes. It’s not a full enclosure, so heavier fat from frying can work its way down inside the unit below the burner head, escaping through lower vents and potentially dripping onto your worktop or picnic table beneath.

Combined with the fact that the unit can’t be dismantled for cleaning, this means regular wipe-downs after cooking with fat are essential to keep it in good condition. Kitchen roll after every fry-up is a good habit.

Eight rubber feet on the underside provide a stable, non-slip base on flat surfaces – picnic tables, campervan worktops and tailgates – and the unit doesn’t rock or shift in use. It’s a small detail that makes a meaningful difference to confidence when cooking.

Each burner outputs 2.4kW, which is mid-range in this class of camping stoves. In practice, it’s a decent performer. In our comparative boil test – 500ml (16.9fl oz) at 14°C (57.2°F) with a 6mph breeze – the Inferno Double recorded 5mins 40secs against the Campingaz’s 5mins 45secs, a difference that falls well within normal test variation.

Both stoves are working against the same fundamental limitation in exposed conditions: neither has meaningful integrated wind protection. In a fully sheltered spot, the Inferno Double’s additional output will make a slightly more noticeable difference.

The pot supports are a genuine strength. Each burner has four toothed arms rather than the three found on many rivals, and pots and pans sit securely without sliding.

The support diameter is 13cm (5.1in) per burner, which accommodates pans up to 28cm (11in) – a larger footprint than the 15cm (5.9in) cooking surfaces on the Campingaz. The 6cm (2.4in) burner head means heat is inevitably more concentrated in the centre of very large pans, but in testing we didn’t encounter significant issues with hot spots or scorching.

The control knobs offer two and a half turns of adjustment from maximum to minimum, which is considerably more than simple high/low designs that tend to cremate food. Simmer control is decent and easy to dial in.

The gas hose is braided and features an auto-cut-off mechanism that engages when the unit is folded away – a thoughtful safety feature that also protects the hose from kinking in storage. It runs on standard EN417 threaded canisters, and our guide to the best gas for camping stoves explains how the different fuel blends compare.

The built-in piezo push-button ignition is a convenience, but it’s the weakest part of the design and the area where the Inferno Double falls most clearly short of some rivals. That’s because the Inferno Double’s ignition wires are exposed and relatively fragile – liable to become brittle with heat cycling over time and easily bent out of position.

On test, one wire shifted enough to prevent ignition until we identified and corrected the issue. It’s not a fatal flaw, but it is a reliability concern for extended use.

The practical advice is simple: always carry a backup lighter or matches. This applies to any camping stove regardless of how good the ignition is, but it’s especially pertinent here. The Inferno Double is easy to light manually once you know the technique, so a failed piezo is an inconvenience rather than a crisis – but it’s worth knowing before you head out.

Wind resistance

The Inferno Double has no meaningful wind protection. The burner heads are slightly recessed, but there are no integrated windshields.

The recessed cooking area provides a degree of passive protection, and the folding design keeps the burner heads slightly lower-profile than on fully open stoves, but in any sustained breeze performance will suffer. Our boil test times in a 6mph wind were nearly two minutes behind Vango’s own performance claims, which reflects how much even a modest breeze affects an unshielded canister stove.

For most campsite use – cooking at a sheltered pitch, behind a windbreak or in a dedicated camp kitchen unit – this is a manageable limitation. For exposed coastal sites or camping fields with more consistent wind, a standalone windshield is a worthwhile addition.

Weight and pack size

At approximately 2.5kg (5lb 8.2oz), the Inferno Double is heavier than the Campingaz Camp and Trek Twin Connect at 1.41kg (3lb 1.7oz) – a meaningful difference if weight is a priority – but lighter than the Robens Fire Hornet Basecamp and Primus Kinjia, and broadly comparable to the Outwell Mauna Duo.

For car camping, campervanning and festival use, 2.5kg (5lb 8.2oz) is unlikely to be a deciding factor. The folding design keeps the packed footprint small regardless of the weight, and the rubber straps and carry handle make it easy to move around without it feeling cumbersome.

This clearly isn’t intended to compete with the compact, low-weight models in our guide to the best backpacking stoves. Its portability is about efficient car or campervan storage rather than carrying it into the hills.

One practical limitation is that there’s no integrated storage for a gas canister. You’ll need to pack fuel separately and remember not to leave it behind – a small but occasionally relevant inconvenience compared to a system where everything travels together.

Price and competition

With an RRP of £85, and often available for around £70–£80 at retailers, the Inferno Double is one of the better-value options in the compact twin-burner category. It undercuts the Campingaz Camp and Trek Twin Connect by £25 at full price, while offering more output per burner and better pot stability.

Premium alternatives like the Primus Kinjia and Jetboil Genesis cost considerably more, at two to four times the price. The Outwell Mauna Duo sits at a similar price point.

The Inferno Double wins out against a lot of rivals when you balance power output, pan stability, cookware compatibility, convenience, packability and price. But others are lighter, more fuel-efficient and offer superior ignition reliability.

For campers who prioritise portability and value, the Inferno Double makes a strong case. For those who prioritise outright performance or premium build quality, other designs just have the edge.

Verdict

The Vango Inferno Double Cooker is a well-designed, good-value twin-burner stove that does most things competently and several things genuinely well. The fold-flat design is clever and practical, the pot supports are among the best in this category and the auto-cut-off hose is a thoughtful safety feature. Even at its full retail price, it represents excellent value against more expensive rivals.

The fragile ignition system is a concern that tempers the overall recommendation. It’s not enough to rule it out, but it’s a known weak point that warrants a backup lighter in your pocket at all times.

With decent but not class-leading output, it balances all-round cooking performance with value. For most campsite and campervan cooks wanting a capable, compact and affordable twin-burner, the Vango Inferno Double Cooker is a solid buy.

See how the Vango Inferno Double Cooker compares with the other models in our guide to the best camping stoves.

About the author

Matt Jones is a freelance journalist based in the heart of Eryri National Park (Snowdonia). He’s a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek. Matt’s been one of our main gear testers for the last couple of years and is the first person we call with any complicated kit queries that need in-depth and forensic analysis. He was previously editor of Walk and Scouting magazines.

When it comes to selecting a backpacking stove system, there are numerous ways you can go – but for most people, the market broadly divides into two camps. On one side are screw-in canister burners – lightweight, versatile and compact – which you pair with whatever pot or mug suits you. On the other are personal cooking systems (PCS): integrated units that combine a burner and dedicated pot with a heat-exchanger base into a single, self-contained package.

The trade-off is familiar: PCS designs are faster to boil, more convenient and fuel-efficient, but heavier, bulkier and limiting when it comes to cookware compatibility.

MSR already has two established PCS products in its WindBurner and Reactor stoves – both excellent but firmly in the boil-only, fixed-cookware camp. The Switch is an attempt to blur the line between those two categories.

It comes as a complete system, bundled with a 1.0L (33.8fl oz) pot with folding handles, measuring cup, canister stand, insulated cork cosy, microfibre cloth and straining lid. Nothing unusual so far. But the clever bit? The burner has a metal ring to support the matching pot but is also fitted with integrated fold-out pot supports, so it works with other cookware – frying pans, camp kettles and other pots.

Arguably, this makes it one of the most adaptable integrated systems on the market. The question is whether that hybrid approach delivers the best of both worlds or ends up making meaningful compromises in both directions.

Design and build quality

The concept of a PCS with open-cookware compatibility isn’t entirely new. Jetboil has long sold a pot support accessory that lets you use other pans with a Flash or Zip, and several budget brands offer similar add-ons.

What MSR has done is integrate those supports directly into the burner itself, making them a core part of the system rather than an optional extra. It’s a sensible solution that removes one more thing to pack or lose.

For me, though, it’s actually the pot that is the most impressive component. It’s made from two sections of hard-anodised aluminium, spot-welded together, with a rounded base that improves heat transfer and reduces hot spots. Usefully in the field, it also makes cleaning considerably easier than a flat-bottomed pot with sharp internal corners.

A cage-style outer guard with cut-outs shields the burner head from wind while allowing sufficient airflow. It’s not as efficient as a proper heat-exchanger design, but it works noticeably better than an unprotected pot in a breeze.

The fold-out handles have silicone grips and are substantially sturdier than the straps and webbing found on the WindBurner, Primus Lite+ and Jetboil Flash 1.0L (33.8fl oz) – a genuine upgrade in terms of convenience and safety.

The insulated cork sleeve is a nice touch aesthetically and helps with handling when pouring, though it only covers the upper third of the pot, so its insulating effect is limited. The measuring cup and strainer lid are functional and pack away neatly as part of the overall system.

MSR has even printed a packing diagram on the outside of the pot itself, which is the kind of small, considerate detail that makes a difference for novice users.

The burner, despite the clever switch feature, is the less impressive half of the system. It does the job, but the design is more exposed than you’d want: the igniter wire is visible and looks somewhat vulnerable to becoming brittle over time.

The ring on which the integrated pot rests isn’t the sturdiest, and the pot merely sits on top rather than locking into place as it would on a true all-in-one system. This means the whole assembly is noticeably top-heavy, particularly with a full pot of water.

The burner head is small but effective. A Y-shaped stainless-steel windguard divides the flame into three segments to improve wind resistance, and to date the piezo ignition has been reliable in testing, sparking on the first or second attempt consistently. Always carry a backup lighter regardless.

The canister stand deserves a mention. MSR’s version incorporates a flexible silicone element rather than being made entirely from rigid plastic like most rivals. This means it can conform to slightly uneven surfaces and find a more stable footing.

Given that stability is this system’s most significant real-world limitation, that’s a thoughtful piece of design. Always use it.

Performance

In our boil test – 500ml (16.9fl oz) at 14°C (57.2°F) in a 6mph breeze – the Switch achieved 3mins 11secs. That’s a respectable result that sits comfortably ahead of small screw-in stoves like the Optimus Crux, which managed 4mins 50secs in the same conditions, and the SOTO Amicus at 3mins 28secs.

It’s well behind the latest Jetboil Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz), though, which achieved 2mins 14secs thanks to its FluxRing heat exchanger. MSR’s own claimed time is 2mins 30secs under controlled conditions. The gap to our real-world result is largely explained by the breeze and ambient outside temperature.

Where the Switch surprises is simmer performance. The micro-regulator – a step up from the needle valves on simpler, cheaper canister stoves – maintains a steady, clean blue flame at low output without flickering out.

You can achieve a low, consistent simmer, which opens up the kind of cooking that a Jetboil or WindBurner simply can’t manage: reducing a sauce, warming food gently or cooking porridge, pasta or noodles without scorching the base.

The regulator also means more consistent performance as the canister empties and in cooler conditions – a meaningful advantage over unregulated rivals in the autumn and early winter shoulder seasons. Choosing the best gas for camping stoves can make a further difference when temperatures fall.

Fuel efficiency is solid. MSR rates the Switch at approximately 1hr 24mins 30secs of burn time from a 227g (8oz) canister, and we’ve no reason to doubt that.

The regulated valve and partial wind protection from the pot cage and burner-head design all contribute to a system that makes reasonable use of its fuel without demanding perfect conditions.

Wind resistance

The Switch sits between the two extremes of this group test on wind resistance. It’s considerably more sheltered than a bare canister-top stove like the Optimus Crux, and in most conditions at least part of the flame stays lit regardless of wind direction. In practice, it’s difficult to blow out entirely.

That said, it’s not in the same league as fully enclosed systems like the MSR WindBurner or Reactor, or even the Jetboil Flash with its FluxRing. In a sustained stiff breeze, the flame moves around noticeably, and boil times and fuel efficiency will both suffer.

For most sheltered campsite and valley-bottom pitches, the Switch handles conditions well enough. On exposed ridges or open hillsides, it’s worth considering whether a more wind-resistant system would serve you better, or at least trying to find a sheltered spot before you brew up.

Weight and pack size

The full system weighs 392g (13.8oz) without fuel, or around 596g (1lb 5oz) with a 100g (3.5oz) MSR IsoPro canister nestled inside. That puts it mid-table among integrated systems: heavier than the Jetboil Zip and Flash, and heavier still than the ultralight Jetboil Stash, but lighter than the MSR WindBurner and Reactor.

Obviously, it’s heavier than screw-in stoves, but that comparison is slightly unfair without accounting for the dedicated pot, cosy, strainer and stand that are all included in the Switch’s weight.

Packed size is compact and tidy. The pot, burner, canister stand and a 100g (3.5oz) gas canister all fit together without rattling, and the packing diagram printed on the pot helps new users figure out how to stow it away quickly.

It’s bulkier than a screw-in stove with a titanium mug, but comparable to other solo integrated systems.

Price and competition

With a UK RRP of £140 ($144.95), the Switch isn’t cheap. However, it’s worth noting what you get for the money: a complete, ready-to-cook system with pot, stand, cosy, strainer lid and measuring cup all included.

Against direct PCS rivals, if you’re comparing RRPs, it’s £10 cheaper than the Jetboil Flash 1.0L (33.8fl oz), £5 cheaper than the Primus Lite Ultra and £25 cheaper than the Jetboil Stash. It’s £20 more than the Jetboil Zip and £10 more than the Primus Lite+, while budget integrated alternatives like the Alpkit Brukit at £55 and Fire Maple range at £55–£80 come in well below it.

The closest direct rival is probably the Jetboil Stash, which is lighter, more compact and faster to boil, but costs £25 more and has no regulator. Like the Switch, though, it offers full compatibility with other cookware.

Against a premium screw-in stove plus a decent pot, the Switch represents a bigger initial outlay but offers the added convenience of a self-contained system. For first-time buyers or those who want a single versatile setup they can build on, the all-in package makes it an easier entry point.

For experienced backpackers who already own a pot they like or have no qualms about building their own cook set, the flexibility argument is less compelling. You can compare it with more conventional and integrated options in our guide to the best camping stoves.

Verdict

The MSR Switch camping stove is an intelligent product that does something no other integrated cook system currently manages: give you a proper PCS setup that also works convincingly with other cookware. The micro-regulator is a genuinely useful feature for simmer cooking and shoulder-season use, the pot design is thoughtful, and the whole package is better considered than most budget all-in-one alternatives.

Its limitations – the top-heavy assembly without the canister stand, the exposed burner and boil times that trail purpose-built heat-exchanger systems – are real but manageable for most users.

It won’t satisfy the pure weight weenie or the fast-boil obsessive, but for newer backpackers wanting a single versatile system to grow into, or anyone who wants to do actual cooking rather than just rehydrating pouches, the MSR Switch camping stove is a well-rounded and thoughtfully designed choice.

See how the MSR Switch camping stove compares with the other models in our guide to the best camping stoves.

About the author

Matt Jones is a freelance journalist based in the heart of Eryri National Park (Snowdonia). He’s a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek. Matt’s been one of our main gear testers for the last couple of years and is the first person we call with any complicated kit queries that need in-depth and forensic analysis. He was previously editor of Walk and Scouting magazines.

When it's late, it's cold, you're tired and possibly a bit wet, all you want at the end of a tough day on the trail is a hot meal before you get into your sleeping bag. One thing you absolutely do not want is faff. You don't want a lighter that won't spark, fiddly flame adjustment, or a tippy, top-heavy stove that spills hot water all over your stuff.

You want boiling water in two minutes so that you can pour it in a freeze-dried pouch, wait a bit, scoff it and then go to bed. The Jetboil Flash has passed that test more times than I can count – in Eryri (Snowdonia), in the Scottish Highlands, on a North Yorkshire clifftop – and it has never once let me down. It's genuinely one of the best backpacking stoves around.

And that's why I put it forward for the LFTO Gear Awards 2026. Read on to hear why it has me so convinced...

Why the Jetboil Flash 1.0L is our camping stove of the year

Jetboil has been at this for more than two decades and the Flash is the heart of the range – the OG all-in-one cooking system that made the brand's reputation.

The 2026 refresh is the best version yet. They’ve fixed almost all the bits that annoyed people. The redesigned burner now has a textured grip zone that makes attaching and detaching the pot – or the canister – far easier. The three-point locking mechanism between pot and burner feels more secure than the previous two-point version. And the redesigned ceramic-encased piezo ignition sparked reliably on every attempt during testing, which is more than could be said for its predecessor.

The FluxRing heat exchanger on the base of the pot ensures this is an extremely efficient stove. In testing, I boiled 500ml of water in just over two minutes in cool, breezy conditions – ahead of every conventional canister-top stove I've tested, and as fast as any other all-in-one rival.

Fuel efficiency is equally impressive: the FluxRing squeezes considerably more boil cycles from a canister than a standard pot-and-stove combination, which matters on longer trips where every gram of fuel counts. The ThermoChromic window – the coloured indicator on the insulated sleeve that changes as water approaches boiling – is one of those details you don't know you need until you've used it. No more lifting the lid every 30 seconds to check.

Everything packs inside the cookpot: burner, fuel stabiliser stand, and a 100g gas canister slip in neatly for a packed size of 10.8x19cm. It’s neat, tidy and doesn’t rattle around in your backpacking pack. The measuring cup base doubles as a bowl. The lid has a pour spout, strainer holes, and doesn’t splash, fall off or get stuck to the pot.

The honest caveats are familiar ones for Flash users. Simmer control is limited – this is a system designed to boil water fast, not gently reduce a sauce. There's no regulator either, so performance drops off in very cold conditions and as the canister empties; regular winter or high-altitude campers might prefer alternatives for that reason.

And like any canister-top stove, it benefits from a bit of wind shelter in exposed conditions – Jetboil now sells a clip-on windguard that's worth having. Tipping the scales at 371g, the 1.0L is also not a gram-counter's choice, though for a complete integrated system, it's not too bad.

Admittedly, at £160 it’s not cheap, but it’s built to last and is fast, efficient and foolproof. Now they just need to swap that annoying webbing strap for a proper fold-out handle, and it’d be perfect.

Verdict

The original all-in-one stove system, now refined to near-perfection – fast, efficient and foolproof in the field.

Who should buy it?

If you want an integrated stove system for rapid water boiling then this is a worthy pick. It does so much right, and very little wrong. You'll love the features, while the performance also makes up for that lofty price.

On the other hand, if serious weight cutting is your goal, a canister-top burner is likely to be your best bet. Anyone looking for a stove to use at altitude or in properly cold weather may also want to consider alternatives due to the lack of regulator.

For larger group-friendly stoves, see our list of the best camping stoves.

About the author

Matt Jones has been one of LFTO's chief testers for the last six years and is one of the most respected reviewers of outdoor gear in the UK. He lives and works among the mountains of North Wales and has used Jetboil Flash 1.0L for multi-night backpacking across Eryri, the Scottish Highlands and for brewing up in the back of his Land Rover.

SOTO is a Japanese brand with an outstanding reputation in the backpacking stoves market. Its Windmaster is a two-time best in test LFTO winner and remains our top pick for a screw-in canister stove – a regulated, high-output burner with excellent wind resistance and a robust ignition system.

The Amicus is the other screw-in stove in the SOTO range: smaller and more compact, lighter on features and considerably cheaper, but sharing much of the Windmaster’s engineering DNA, including SOTO’s distinctive semi-enclosed concave burner head.

Where the Windmaster is designed for performance-focused backpackers who want the best regardless of cost, the Amicus is aimed at those who want a compact, reliable, well-made canister stove without spending a fortune. At around £42, or £47 if you go for the version with built-in ignition, it undercuts the £72 Windmaster by a meaningful margin while retaining the build quality and burner design that set the SOTO range apart.

The question is: what do you actually give up, and does it matter?

Design and build quality

Physically, the Amicus is compact – roughly the width of your spread hand when the pot supports are extended. Folded away, it packs down small enough to fit inside a 600ml (20.3fl oz) pot alongside a 100g (3.5oz) gas canister. There are no detachable parts to lose, which is a genuine advantage over the Windmaster’s separate pot supports.

In fact, the pot support design is one of the things SOTO has clearly iterated on across the range. The Amicus uses spring-loaded fold-out arms that rotate into position in a single smooth upward motion and click firmly into place on a hook. They won’t fold down on their own during use, and they’re easy to retract when you want to pack away.

Each arm is also toothed – four supports in total, more than the typical three – with precisely machined teeth that grip pot bases well. The unfolded diameter is just over 9cm (3.5in), which accommodates a wide range of pot sizes. I used it with an MSR Titan 1.4L (47.3fl oz) kettle without any stability concerns.

It’s not in the same league as the Windmaster with the 4Flex support, but it’s considerably better than the three-legged arrangements on most rivals, including the MSR Pocket Rocket, Optimus Crux, Jetboil MightyMo, Primus Micron III, Vango Atom and Alpkit Kraku.

The burner screws securely to a standard EN417 threaded gas canister, with a 360° flange that rests against the canister’s rim to reduce stress on the thread, plus a rubber O-ring seal. The gas flow knob is a long wire bail design that keeps your fingers well clear of the flame when adjusting.

Build quality throughout is excellent – this is clearly a more carefully engineered product than the cheap canister stoves from Chinese manufacturers like BRS or Fire Maple that now populate the bottom end of the market and get rebadged for retailers like Alpkit and Robens.

Those stoves are lighter and cheaper still, but the Amicus beats them on pot stability and burner quality by a meaningful margin.

The ignition system

The Amicus is available with or without SOTO’s Stealth ignition. The Stealth system routes the ignition wire up through the burner stem rather than externally, with the sparker located in the centre of the burner head rather than at the rim.

This means there are no exposed wires to snag or corrode, and the spark point isn’t sitting directly in the flame during use, which extends its working life. It’s the most reliable piezo ignition system I’ve encountered on a canister stove, and if you’re paying the extra £5 to get it, it’s worth it.

That said, I’d still always carry a backup lighter or firesteel. Even the best piezo ignition is a mechanical component that can fail at the wrong moment, and a lightweight BIC costs pennies and weighs almost nothing.

Performance

On test, I boiled 500ml (16.9fl oz) of water in 3mins 28secs, in ambient conditions of 14°C (57.2°F) with a light breeze of around 6mph. That’s a respectable result for a stove of this class, though slower than the more powerful Windmaster and the MSR Pocket Rocket Deluxe that I tested back in spring 2024.

The Amicus has a lower maximum output than the Windmaster, which is noticeable when you’re boiling larger volumes or cooking in cold conditions.

Simmer control is a relative strength. I was able to get a very low, barely-there flame – better than many rivals in this category – which makes the Amicus a reasonable choice for those who want to do a little actual cooking rather than just rehydrating pouches.

The one significant caveat is noise: the Amicus is noticeably loud, even at low settings. If you’re camped near others or are a light sleeper sharing a tent with an early riser, it’s something to be aware of.

The Amicus lacks the regulator valve of the Windmaster, which is the one performance difference that actually matters in practice. A regulated valve maintains more consistent gas flow as the canister empties and as temperatures drop, which translates to more predictable boil times and simmer control in cold conditions.

Without a regulator, performance will drop off more noticeably as your canister gets low and as the temperature falls below around 5°C (41°F). For three-season backpacking in the UK, that’s a manageable limitation.

Choosing the right fuel can also make a difference as temperatures fall. Our guide to the best gas for camping stoves explains how the main canister types and fuel blends compare.

Winter campers and those heading to altitude would be better served by the Windmaster or another regulated stove, especially a remote canister design like the Optimus Vega or even a liquid-fuel stove like the Polaris.

Wind resistance

Wind resistance is one of the Amicus’s genuine distinguishing features. Its semi-enclosed concave burner head is the same type used on the Windmaster – one of the most wind-resistant designs among upright canister stoves.

While the Amicus’s burner is smaller and sits slightly farther from the pot base, it still performs significantly better in a breeze than conventional open-flame canister stoves like the Optimus Crux or the Vango Atom.

In field testing, I found it very difficult to blow out, even in a sustained breeze. That doesn’t mean it’s impervious to wind. If you’re cooking in blustery conditions on an exposed ridge, something with a fully enclosed radiant burner like the MSR Reactor or WindBurner will always beat it.

But for the kind of breezy British conditions you encounter in the hills most of the time, the Amicus holds its own better than most of its direct competitors.

Weight and pack size

At 75g (2.6oz) without ignition and 81g (2.9oz) with it, the Amicus is comparable with the Windmaster, which weighs 87g (3.1oz) with its 4Flex pot support. It’s also similar to rivals like the MSR Pocket Rocket Deluxe at 82g (2.9oz) and Optimus Crux at 83g (2.9oz).

Ultra-cheap stoves like the Vango Atom, BRS-3000T or Alpkit Kraku undercut it significantly on weight, often coming in below 50g (1.8oz), but as noted above, those stoves have other limitations.

The integrated pot supports are a genuine packability advantage over the Windmaster. The Windmaster’s 4Flex support offers better pot stability but is a separate piece that needs to be kept track of. The Amicus is a single, self-contained unit with nothing to lose.

It’s nice and compact and nests easily in most cookware, or can be kept in its simple but effective drawcord storage bag. For solo backpackers who want a grab-and-go setup, that simplicity is attractive.

Price and competition

At £42.95 ($44.95), or £46.95 ($49.95) with built-in ignition, the Amicus sits in the mid-range of the backpacking stove market. The MSR Pocket Rocket 2 is slightly cheaper but lacks the Amicus’s pot stability and wind resistance. The Optimus Crux is similarly priced but falls behind on build quality and wind performance.

The Vango Atom and BRS-3000T-derived stoves are cheaper still, but they look and feel like budget choices, being susceptible to wind and prone to creating hot spots. Among properly engineered, well-built upright canister stoves with integrated pot supports and piezo ignition, the Amicus is genuinely competitive on value.

The obvious comparison is with the Windmaster, which has an RRP of £72 but can be had for around £60. The gap between them is real but narrower than it might look on paper. The Amicus is more packable, simpler and better value.

The Windmaster is more powerful, more effective in cold conditions thanks to its regulator and better for longer trips where fuel efficiency really starts to matter. If your budget stretches to the Windmaster and you’re a serious multi-day backpacker, spend the extra. If you’re getting started, upgrading from a budget stove or want a compact spare, the Amicus is a very strong buy.

You can compare the Amicus with a wider range of integrated and conventional models in our guide to the best camping stoves.

Verdict

The SOTO Amicus isn’t the Windmaster, but it isn’t trying to be. It’s still one of the best-engineered canister-top stoves on the market – a stove that takes the best parts of the SOTO formula and delivers them at a price that more backpackers can justify.

The build quality is excellent, the ignition is the most reliable in its class, the wind resistance is genuinely impressive for an open-flame design and the four integrated pot supports are a significant usability upgrade on the triple arrangements found on many rivals.

The limitations are real: no regulator means it’s less suited to cold conditions, boil times trail the Windmaster and the MSR Pocket Rocket Deluxe, and it’s noticeably loud. But for three-season backpacking, weekend trips and anyone wanting a compact, reliable stove without stretching to the Windmaster’s price point, the SOTO Amicus is a confident recommendation.

See how the SOTO Amicus compares with the other best backpacking stoves we’ve tested.

About the author

Matt Jones is a freelance journalist based in the heart of Eryri National Park (Snowdonia). He’s a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek. Matt’s been one of our main gear testers for the last couple of years and is the first person we call with any complicated kit queries that need in-depth and forensic analysis.

Optimus has been building camping and backpacking stoves since 1899, making it one of the oldest names in the business. That heritage shows in the Crux: it’s an intelligently designed, well-made canister stove that does something none of its close rivals can match – fold its burner head flat and slot almost entirely inside the cavity at the base of a 230g (8.1oz) fuel canister.

For solo ultralight backpackers and fast-and-light adventurers trying to build the most compact possible cook setup, that’s a genuinely compelling trick.

The Crux has been around for several years and, in that time, many rival manufacturers have introduced newer designs. As such, it now sits in a crowded segment of the market, up against stoves like the SOTO Amicus and Windmaster, MSR’s Pocket Rocket series, the Primus Micron III, the Jetboil MightyMo, the Vango Atom and a raft of other budget screw-in, canister-top stoves.

It costs more than most of those rivals, with an RRP of £71.99, though it can often be found for considerably less. What you get for the money is a neat and tidy little stove with solid build quality, broad pot compatibility, decent simmer control and a clever folding design – alongside some meaningful limitations, particularly in wind. Here’s how it measures up in practice.

Design and build quality

The headline design feature is the folding stem. Unlike conventional canister-top stoves, the Crux’s burner head folds down to one side via a spring-loaded mechanism, collapsing the stove’s profile enough to fit inside the base of a 230g (8.1oz) canister. The pot supports and gas control lever fold away too, making the Crux genuinely compact in a way that few rivals match.

If you’re building a minimalist solo cook kit, the whole system – stove, lighter and gas canister – would nest inside a medium-sized titanium mug or pot, creating a tidy package.

Build quality is solid throughout. The materials are robust, and the engineering has the confidence of a brand that has been refining stove design for well over a century.

One cosmetic note: the steel burner head and pot support arms oxidise fairly quickly with use – they’ll look well used within a few trips. It doesn’t affect performance in any way, but it’s worth knowing if that kind of thing bothers you.

The pot supports are three-armed, fold-out and toothed, with a clever graduated profile that rises from the inner to outer diameter to help keep pots centred and prevent sliding. The unfolded diameter is just over 10cm (3.9in), which is wider than rivals like the SOTO Amicus or MSR Pocket Rocket 2 and accommodates a broad range of pots and mugs without overhanging.

I tested it with an MSR Titan 1.4L (47.3fl oz) kettle without any stability concerns. However, as with all three-armed designs, it sits a notch below four-armed rivals – the Amicus and Windmaster included – on overall stability.

The burner head itself is notably wide, which helps distribute heat evenly and reduces hot spots at the base of the pot. That’s a genuine advantage for anyone wanting to do a bit of actual cooking rather than just boiling water.

The trade-off is that the wide flame means pots with a base diameter under about 10cm (3.9in) will have flame creeping up the sides, wasting fuel and creating a scorch hazard. Stick to wider-based pots and you’ll have no issues.

There’s no integrated ignition on the Crux. You’ll need to carry a lighter, matches or firesteel – an extra item in the kit and an extra thing to forget. It’s easy enough to light manually, but at £71.99, the omission feels slightly mean when the SOTO Amicus includes a piezo option for £46.95.

Performance

In our comparative boil test – 500ml (16.9fl oz) of water at an ambient temperature of 14°C (57.2°F) in a 6mph breeze – the Crux boiled in 4mins 50secs. That’s notably slower than Optimus’s own claimed average of 3mins in ideal conditions.

It’s also slower than the SOTO Amicus, which managed 3mins 28secs for 500ml (16.9fl oz) in the same test conditions, as well as the more powerful SOTO Windmaster or MSR Pocket Rocket Deluxe. The gap is largely attributable to wind: the Crux’s open burner design is susceptible to breeze, and even a modest 6mph wind has a meaningful effect on boil times.

In a fully sheltered spot, the Crux performs much closer to its stated figures.

Simmer control is a relative strength. The folding wire bail gives good adjustment range and I was able to achieve a genuinely low simmer, which makes the Crux a reasonable choice for those who want to cook more than just rehydrated or freeze-dried pouches.

The downside is that maintaining a steady low heat requires more frequent adjustment than with better-regulated designs. The combination of wind susceptibility and the lack of a regulator valve means the flame isn’t entirely predictable, particularly outdoors.

That lack of a regulator is the key performance limitation in cold or extended-use conditions too. Without one, gas flow becomes less consistent as the canister empties and as temperatures fall below around 5°C (41°F). For three-season backpacking in the UK, it’s a manageable constraint.

Choosing the right fuel blend can also make a difference as temperatures fall. Our guide to the best gas for camping stoves explains how the main canister types compare.

Anyone camping in winter, at altitude or on longer trips where fuel economy and consistent output really matter would be better served by a regulated stove – or, for serious cold-weather use, a remote canister design like the Optimus Vega or multi-fuel Polaris.

Wind resistance

As noted, this is the Crux’s clearest limitation in real-world use. The conventional open-flame burner offers no meaningful wind protection, and performance drops noticeably even in a light breeze.

Choosing a sheltered pitch or using a windshield makes a significant difference. Optimus offers a clip-on aluminium windshield at a claimed 87g (3.1oz), which is a worthwhile addition if you’re regularly cooking in exposed conditions. Without it, or without a naturally sheltered spot, boil times and fuel consumption will both suffer.

In this respect, the Crux trails its closest competitors. The SOTO Amicus and Windmaster both use a semi-enclosed concave burner design that is significantly more resistant to wind. The MSR Pocket Rocket Deluxe also performs better in a breeze.

If you’re regularly cooking in exposed conditions – on a ridge, above the treeline or on an open hillside – the Crux is not the strongest choice in this price bracket. If you’re lower down in the valley or inside a bothy, it’s not a problem.

Weight and pack size

At 83g (2.9oz), the Crux sits broadly in line with similarly capable canister-top stoves. It’s slightly heavier than the SOTO Amicus, which weighs 75–81g (2.6–2.9oz), but is in the same territory.

The ultra-budget BRS-3000T-derived stoves, rebadged as the Alpkit Kraku, Robens Fire Midge and others, undercut it significantly at under 50g (1.8oz). But those stoves offer poor pot stability and have tiny burner heads prone to hot spots. The Crux is a more considered piece of kit.

Where the Crux genuinely stands out is packed volume. Stowed dimensions of 6x4x9cm (2.4x1.6x3.5in), combined with the ability to nest mostly inside the base of a 230g (8.1oz) canister, make it the most packable stove in this group test.

Paired with a compact titanium mug or pot, it forms one of the smallest and lightest solo cook setups you can put together. For fastpackers, bikepackers and those counting every cubic centimetre, that matters.

Price and competition

With an RRP of £71.99, the Crux is more expensive than most of its competitors. The SOTO Amicus is £42.95 without ignition and £46.95 with it, the MSR Pocket Rocket 2 has an RRP of £45 and various budget or entry-level stoves cost a fraction of the price – as little as £20.

Meanwhile, the SOTO Windmaster, an LFTO favourite, has an RRP of £72, which makes it the most direct rival. The Crux offers slightly lower weight and superior packability, but falls behind on wind resistance, power output, pot stability and cold-weather performance thanks to the Windmaster’s regulator.

Which you choose comes down to priorities: if the folding-into-the-canister trick and minimal bulk are the main draw, the Crux has an argument. If you want the better all-round performer at the same price, the Windmaster wins.

The Crux is also available as the Crux Lite, a stripped-down version without the folding stem mechanism. The Lite is 11g (0.4oz) lighter and cheaper, but can’t nest inside a canister. It’s a cleaner, slightly more robust design – with fewer moving parts – and worth considering if you don’t need the full Crux’s clever packing trick.

The Crux is frequently bundled with Optimus pots or mugs into a complete solo cook set, which represents reasonable value if you’re starting from scratch. You can compare it with more integrated and conventional options in our guide to the best camping stoves.

Verdict

The Optimus Crux is a genuinely clever piece of kit. The fold-flat design and canister-nesting ability are real differentiators that no rival can match, and for ultralight solo backpackers building the smallest possible cook setup, that’s a compelling proposition. Build quality is solid, the wide burner head handles heat distribution well and simmer control is better than average for the category.

But the wind susceptibility is a real limitation, particularly for UK wild campers, where a bit of breeze is the norm rather than the exception. The slower tested boil times, absence of integrated ignition and higher price relative to rivals like the SOTO Amicus all make it a harder sell as an all-round backpacking stove.

Where the Optimus Crux earns its place is in setups where packed volume and weight are the primary constraint – fastpacking, bikepacking and summit brew kits – and where cooking conditions are likely to be sheltered. Buy it for what it’s best at, and it won’t let you down.

See how the Optimus Crux compares with the other best backpacking stoves we’ve tested.

About the author

Matt Jones is a freelance journalist based in the heart of Eryri National Park (Snowdonia). He’s a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek. Matt’s been one of our main gear testers for the last couple of years and is the first person we call with any complicated kit queries that need in-depth and forensic analysis. He was previously editor of Walk and Scouting magazines.

The Nemo Eclipse All-Season, released in February this year, is our sleeping mat of the year in the LFTO Gear Awards 2026 – our annual roundup of truly exceptional outdoor kit that's blown us away.

Every year, our team puts hundreds of products through their paces. This year, we've decided on a single winner for each category – a piece of gear that we've loved testing and wholeheartedly recommend.

This isn't objective. There's never one option that's objectively best for everyone, as we've all got different preferences. But what we can do, as professional gear testers, is find the mat most likely to please the highest number of people. A genuine all-rounder that doesn't ask you to sacrifice too much in any one direction. That mat, right now, is the Nemo Eclipse.

Why the Nemo Eclipse is our sleeping mat of the year

I've got a confession to make, but before I do that, let me introduce the Nemo Eclipse through its numbers. At £180 for the regular wide, it sits slightly above the average price of sleeping mats we've recently tested. It has an R-value of 6.2 - suited to most UK winter conditions – and the regular wide weighs 628g. It’s not the lightest you can get for this price, but it is one of the lightest four-season mats you can get – and the price is reasonable for the performance.

What all of this means is that, on paper, it stands out as one of the best sleeping mats you can buy. Warm enough to use all year-round, not overpriced, yet light enough for backpacking. But you’re not sleeping on the specs sheet. What does it actually feel like in use?

"Closer to an air bed"

Now for my confession. On a recent wild camping trip in the Lake District, I was supposed to be testing a mat from another well-known brand (that will not be named). But, against the demands of my job, I sneakily took the Nemo Eclipse along instead. After putting it to the test over a week of camping in northern Spain, I knew I’d get a far better night's sleep on it.

At a lofty 10cm, the Nemo Eclipse feels closer to an air bed than anything I’ve ever carried on my back before. The vertical baffles hold you in place, and not once have I woken up uncomfortable. On this particular occasion, I fell asleep almost immediately and woke up feeling rested.

It’s not just comfy – it’s also easy to set up and pack away. Sometimes it feels like your sleeping mat is actively working against you, but the Eclipse is quick to inflate, needing only about four bags of air if using the pump sack.

It’s also blissfully simple to deflate: release the valve and the air whooshes out, like when you pop a balloon that’s full of water. The Laylow valve lets you fine-tune the firmness while lying on the mat, without releasing all the air at once, and it actually works.

Jack of all trades, master of one

The Nemo Eclipse is our sleeping mat of the year for a reason. It's a jack of all trades – weight, warmth and value. But it’s also a master of one: comfort.

Sometimes it feels like you can’t have it all in a sleeping mat. There’s always some kind of compromise needed – it’s either heavy but warm, or light but not so comfy, or cheap but not durable. But that's not the case here.

Verdict

The Eclipse is competitive on every single variable that matters to campers, without making any serious sacrifices. It undercuts many of the best sleeping mats on price, outperforms them on warmth and still manages to be the comfiest I've ever slept on.

Read my Nemo Eclipse All Season review here.

Who should buy the Nemo Eclipse?

If cutting as much weight as possible is your number one priority, you can absolutely find lighter options than the Eclipse. But if you want the ultimate balance of weight, comfort, packability and warmth, there are few than can compete.

And if you're after a lightweight sleeping mat to use year round, the Nemo Eclipse is simply the best you can buy.

About the author

Evie Nichols is LFTO's chief female tester. Evie loves nothing more than being in high and remote places, and in general, she's not fussy whether that's in trail running shoes, climbing shoes, walking boots or on two wheels.

A big fan of multi-day hikes, some of her favourites are the GR20 in Corsica, Mallorca's GR221 and the GR52 in the Alps. Follow her adventures on Instagram @eviejnichols.

No doubt you've heard by now that regular old road running is a bore, a chore, a monotonous grind that turns your kneecaps into ticking time bombs. Well, the rumours are true. Welcome to your new favourite hobby – let's talk about the best trail running shoes of 2026.

When you hit the trails, you'll need footwear that can stand up to rough and changing terrain. Not only does your shoe need to be durable and high-traction, but it's also got be cushioned and protective.

This is no easy feet – sorry – which is why we at LFTO test dozens of pairs per season. We even enlisted a women's running coach to test and review the best women's trail running shoes, just to cover every base!

We also test so much because there are so many different approaches to the humble trail shoe. You might want a hardy, stiff, distance-ready ultra trail running shoe to carry you through an all-day training session. Or (perhaps more likely) you're in search of a versatile road-to-trail running shoe that provides maximum comfort from pavements to park runs to the peak of Snowdon.

Remember to account for your own personal running gait, foot size, and comfort level preference when choosing the best trail running shoe for your needs.

Best trail running shoes at a glance:

Best in test: Arc'teryx Norvan LD4

Best value: Asics Gel-Venture 10

Best road-to-trail running shoe: Scott Kinabalu Trail

Best ultra trail running shoe: Brooks Cascadia 19

Editor's note: This is one of our most regularly updated articles, with new releases added throughout the year as the weather – and resulting trail conditions – changes. The last update was April 17 2026 where I added 6 new shoes in after a spring of hard testing.

How we tested

The trail running gear we review always undergoes rigorous real-world testing, usually from Milo Wilson, LFTO's self-appointed running guru. The shoes in this roundup were also reviewed by Lily Canter, ultra woman and running coach, and James Forrest, the most prolific gear tester this side of the Mississippi.

As soon as a new trail shoe hits the scene, we allocate one of our expert gear testers and force them out of the office and into the hills.

We do occasionally destroy shoes in our testing, but these don't make the 'best of' list, naturally. Anything that appears in our roundups has survived some serious miles on a range of different terrains and distances.

We consider myriad factors when testing and reviewing trail running footwear, from the obvious, such as comfort and performance, to the less obvious and intricate, such as sustainability. Read more about how we test our trail running gear.

The best trail running shoes reviewed:

How to choose the best trail running shoes for you

Carbon: For many of us, the summer or dry spells are all about running that bit quicker, and there's no argument carbon provides runners with more response on the harder, more uniform trails this season provides. Some will run faster, while some will benefit from the reduction in impact carbon provides. Yes, there's a cost, but it's well worth the investment.

Breathability: In the same way you'd look for fabrics that breathe in t-shirts, go for materials that allow air and water vapour to escape from inside the shoe while also allowing cooler air from outside to enter.

Weight: Of course, there's no definitive weight in a running shoe as more than any other product, it's very much individual. But, as a general rule, summer shoes are lighter and swifter feeling, so you'll be thinking of shoes that weigh less than 300g for that rip-roaring 10km PB.

If you're thinking long distance though, think about additional cushioning and, therefore, in some, but not all, additional weight, bringing the shoes into the mid-300s.

Toe box: The rocks will be there year-round, so look for protection in that department.

Drop: There's almost a generational gap here. Older shoe models work off an 8mm-12mm drop for a higher, more cushioned ride, while many of today's shoes come in at around 4mm-6mm for a closer-to-the-ground, faster feel. As with any shoe advice, it's always about what feels good personally.

In theory, it's worth progression to lower drop shoes as they do feel quicker (half the job), but it can be at a cost for your calf muscles. There are lower drops as well, with 0mm replicating barefoot. The jury is out at the moment as to what is best!

Midsole: EVA, PU, TPU or Pebax are the foams of choice for most brands. All offer softness and flexibility to different degrees.

Fit: There's the traditional lacing system, of course, but the Salomon system and the Boa fit in a variety of brands, including La Sportiva and Adidas do offer superb stability on rough, steep terrain. Consider the surfaces you'll be running. Tough descents and contouring lend themselves to this new fit system.

Lug length: Summer shoes will offer less in the grip department, so lugs around 3mm at the most, while winter shoes go all the way up to 6mm and even beyond on occasion. Rubber, of course, wears quicker, so longer lug-length shoes need to stay strictly off-road!

If you want even more info, take a look at our full guide on how to choose a pair of running shoes.

Get discounts from Run 1000 Miles!

A lot of the shoes we recommend above are available, usually at a great price, on Sportsshoes. So remember, if anything caught your eye, you can save 15% on trail running gear by signing up to our Run 1000 Miles Challenge.

Are trail running shoes worth it?

If you're planning on exploring more off-piste than your usual pavements and local park, then we'd highly recommend you invest in a pair of trail running shoes like those reviewed above. As you transition from road to trail, you’ll find you need extra help in stabilising your feet and pushing off from the ground as you run.

In any case, good footwear is really important for the health of your joints and injury prevention. We believe you should always be in a decent pair of shoes, which is why our editor spent months getting his two sons to try loads of kit and whittle down a list of the best kids' running shoes.

This is because trails can be wet and slippy, with loose terrain and unpredictable bumps and dips. You need running shoes with extra protection to ward off errant rocks and roots, and lugs along the outsole (grippy spikes on the bottom) to latch onto the ground and help propel you forwards as you enjoy the trail.

The more off-road and wild you get, the more likely you’ll need longer lugs and more protection from the elements. You may even want to consider a semi-aquatic shoe like the Vivobarefoot Hydra for when the trails get boggy after a good British watering.

If you’ve got lofty ideas of building up to the longer distances, you should definitely consider grabbing a stability-focused long-distance trail running shoe with a bit of extra cushioning (we've just spotted a discount on the Brooks Cascadia 18, which fits the bill nicely!) to keep you comfy as the miles stack up.

Can you use trail running shoes on the road?

Many trail running shoes will not feel comfortable to wear on the road for extended periods of time. This will especially be true for those with long lugs along the bottom, which will dig into the soles of your feet as you run if the shoe has a slim midsole. Thankfully, there’s a specific category of trail running shoes emerging in recent years called road-to-trail.

It’s in the name, but these handy run shoes strike the perfect balance between cushioning, midsole impact absorption, and grip, to deliver a shoe that can cope with extended sections of road running as well as some mildly muddy and gentle trails. These days, mostly everyone will need to contend with both road and trail on their everyday run routes, so investing in a road to trail shoe can make your runs much more enjoyable and smooth.

Are trail running shoes good for hiking?

Trail running shoes are good for some types of hiking when you want optimal speed and agility (even if you aren't running), such as fastpacking or short, sharp treks. Trail running shoes are lightweight and have grippy soles - key traits for these types of hikes. However, trail running shoes lack the durability and support needed for long distance or technical hikes, where walking boots are much better.

How trail running shoes should fit

The size you choose for your next pair of trail running shoes really depends on what distance you're planning to run. Now we’re not suggesting you go crazy and order several sizes up from your usual digits, but it’s worth bearing in mind that as you run, four-times your bodyweight goes through your feet upon impact with the ground. That’s basically like repeatedly hitting the soles of your feet with a frying pan for the duration of your run.

Obviously, this is going to have an impact on your feet - they will swell. So to ensure you remain comfortable and rub-free, it’s worth sizing up 0.5-1 sizes on what you’re normally used to wearing, especially if you’re planning on running long distances. Other than that, make sure if your feet are particularly wide you get a wide-fit shoe or look at brands like Altra whose shoes are designed with extra room in the toe-box. Equally, if your feet are extra narrow, you’ll need slimmer shoes like some Salomon ones, in order to still be able to achieve that locked-in, blister-free fit.

When to replace trail running shoes

When it comes to deciding when to replace your trail running shoes, you may be tempted to follow the same rule you would with your road running shoes. That is that typically, we replace running shoes every 500-800km. However, since trail running shoes are (sometimes literally) put through the wringer much more when out on the trails, you may want to adjust this depending on how much you’ve managed to wreck them in the good muddy stuff.

Other factors to take into account when considering the right time to replace your trail running shoes are whether the midsole has been substantially flattened from repeated impact, and how worn the lugs are along the bottom. Trail shoes are first and foremost used to give you traction when running along slippy and unpredictable terrain, so if the main component that provides traction is worn out, it’s probably time to reinvest in another pair like those we've reviewed above.

If all this sounds like jargon to you, why not take a look at our guide on how to choose trail running shoes to better understand the best style of shoe for your feet.

Caring for your trail running shoes

Outdoor footwear gets a hard life. If you want to keep yours performing as well as they can for as long as possible, a little TLC is needed. Keep fabrics clean to maintain breathability, and waterproof fabrics need reproofing every so often to maintain water repellency. Here are the products we'd recommend to help extend the life of your running trainers...

About the authors

The shoes in this roundup were tested and reviewed by three legendary trail runners who spend most of their lives on the move: LFTO's own Milo Wilson, ultra woman Lily Canter, and mountain man James Forrest. The article as a whole was authored by Milo – hi there! Ahem–

As Live For The Outdoors' full-time trail running tester, writer, and guru, Milo leads our gear coverage and destroys shoes year-round in some of the UK’s most technical terrain. He specialises in shoes that can handle rocky ridgelines, mountain scrambles and long days far from civilisation, where he is most comfortable.

A nimble feel and reliable grip matter most to Milo, which is why he's such an obsessive champion for the Merrell MTL Longsky 2 Matryx. His reviews are rooted in deep testing knowledge, a critical eye and a slightly masochistic love of scrambling into remote places.

James and Lily are both full-time outdoor writers, ultra-endurance athletes and published authors.

James, based in the Lake District, is an ultralight gear obsessive who fastpacks up fells for fun, and rates maximalist trail shoes like the Hoka Speedgoat 6 that are light, cushioned and capable of serious elevation. He holds a record for climbing all 446 mountains in Ireland and Northern Ireland.

Lily is a hardcore ultrarunner with a preference for no-nonsense, high-performance footwear with plenty of durability for going the distance – the Scarpa Spin Planet was a recent favourite of hers. She recently completed the 190-mile Northern Traverse and is the author of Ultra Women: The Trailblazers Defying Sexism in Sport.

Between them, the trio have tested hundreds of trail shoes across every type of terrain and condition. If a shoe’s in this list, it’s because it earned its place.

Jetboil has been producing brilliant backpacking stoves and making backpackers’ lives easier for more than two decades with its integrated personal cooking systems (PCS).

The concept is deceptively simple but also genius: combine a burner, a heat exchanger and an insulated cooking pot into a single, self-contained unit that boils water faster and more efficiently than a standard canister-top stove paired with a separate pot. It’s a formula that works, and the Flash has long sat at the heart of the range.

The 2026 refresh brings a raft of meaningful upgrades to the Flash line, with this bigger 1.8L (60.9fl oz) version looking like a great pick for backpacking pairs or couples. It’s also suited to campsite campers who want a neat, no-fuss way to boil water for morning tea and evening cocoa.

New silicone-covered folding handles, a redesigned burner with a grip zone and improved piezo ignition all feature, and they’re not just cosmetic tweaks. Having used the previous-generation Flash for several years, I can say that the differences are noticeable in everyday use. But is the updated Flash the right integrated stove for you? Let’s break it down.

Design

The Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz) sticks to the integrated PCS format Jetboil has refined over the years. A hard-anodised aluminium cookpot locks onto a burner assembly via a bayonet-style connection, with a FluxRing heat exchanger on the base of the pot focusing heat efficiently. An insulated sleeve, or cosy, wraps the pot to retain heat and protect fingers.

Everything – burner, fuel canister, fuel stabiliser stand and cloth storage bag – nests inside the pot when packed, making it a genuinely tidy package.

This 1.8L (60.9fl oz) version is essentially the two-person version of the standard 1.0L (33.8fl oz) Flash. At this size, you can comfortably boil enough water for two people’s freeze-dried or dehydrated meals in one hit, or prepare a decent pot of pasta or porridge for a pair without having to cook in shifts.

Bear in mind that the maximum recommended fill is 1.25L (42.3fl oz), so you can’t brim the pot. But it’s a meaningful step up from the standard 1.0L (33.8fl oz) format, which actually only holds 500ml (16.9fl oz). Still, solo backpackers who aren’t cooking for a partner will find the 1.0L (33.8fl oz) option a more appropriate choice.

The biggest visible change from the previous Flash is the pot handle design. Where older models used a simple webbing strap attached to the insulated cosy, the 1.8L (60.9fl oz) now has proper silicone-covered folding metal handles on either side. They’re solid, comfortable to grip even with gloves on and make the whole system feel far more considered for use around camp.

When you’re decanting boiling water in a confined tent porch or on a rickety table in a Scottish bothy, you’ll appreciate the upgrade.

The burner assembly has been overhauled too. There’s now a textured orange grip zone around the base, making it much easier to attach and detach the cookpot, adjust the gas flow or connect a fuel canister. Again, it’s a small thing that makes a real difference in cold or wet conditions.

The locking mechanism between the pot and burner has also been tightened up. There are now three locking positions with indicator markings, compared to two on previous models, and the connection feels notably more secure.

The ThermoChromic window is a classic Jetboil feature that has been retained. Flame graphics printed on the insulated cosy change from black to orange as the water approaches boiling, meaning you don’t have to keep lifting the lid to check. While it’s a small thing, it’s one of those details that adds convenience.

The lid design carries over from previous Flash models and works well. There’s a pour spout, strainer holes and a central aperture compatible with Jetboil’s French press accessories. The semi-transparent measuring cup that protects the FluxRing doubles as a bowl or mug, and the measurement markings are significantly easier to read than on older versions thanks to fully translucent plastic rather than opaque grey.

Performance

The Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz) delivers on Jetboil’s core promise: it boils water quickly and with minimal fuss. In my boil test – 500ml (16.9fl oz) of water at an ambient temperature of 12°C (53.6°F) – I got a rolling boil in 2mins 14secs. I couldn’t quite match Jetboil’s claimed average of two minutes dead, but that puts it ahead of all conventional canister-top stoves paired with a standard pot.

For context, the SOTO Windmaster – our best in test canister-top stove from last year’s group test – boiled 500ml (16.9fl oz) in 2mins 30secs. But that was using a lightweight aluminium pot without a heat exchanger.

The FluxRing heat exchanger is the engineering behind Jetboil’s efficiency. It channels heat from the burner directly into the base of the pot with very little energy waste, which also means better fuel economy. Jetboil claims around 24 one-litre (33.8fl oz) boil cycles from a 230g (8.1oz) canister in ideal conditions.

Real-world use in cool conditions will be somewhat less than that, but it’s still more efficient than any standard pot-and-stove setup. Our guide to choosing the best gas for camping stoves explains the different canister types and fuel blends in more detail.

Wind resistance is a more nuanced story. The integrated design means the pot and burner combination sits lower and more compactly than a canister-top stove with a separate pot, which helps. But the Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz) lacks the enclosed radiant burner of, say, the MSR Reactor, so it’s not impervious to the wind.

Jetboil now sells a dedicated windguard that clips directly to the new Flash models, and I’d recommend picking one up if you regularly cook in exposed conditions. In my testing on a breezy Welsh hillside, boil times crept up noticeably without any wind protection in place. In a sheltered position, it was a different story.

Simmer control is limited, as it has always been on the Flash. There’s a degree of heat regulation available through the gas flow knob, but this is fundamentally a system designed to boil water fast, not to gently reduce a tomato sauce. If you want genuine simmer control in an integrated Jetboil system, the MiniMo is the one to look at.

For the likely majority of Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz) users – backpacking pairs rehydrating pouches and brewing up, or campsite campers who simply want a reliable way to boil water for morning tea and a hot drink before bed – that’s never going to be an issue. It does exactly what they need it to do, and does it fast.

The redesigned piezo ignition deserves a mention. The new ceramic-encased igniter is a marked improvement on older versions, which were almost always the first thing to fail on a Jetboil. It sparked reliably on every attempt during testing, including in damp and cold conditions.

The twist-to-ignite, twist-to-adjust mechanism also makes operation more intuitive than on previous models, which had a push-button ignition.

Weight and packed size

Here’s where the Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz) inevitably has some drawbacks. The system as a whole – pot, burner, fuel stabiliser stand and 230g (8.1oz) gas canister – weighed 782g (1lb 11.6oz) on my scales. It weighed 851g (1lb 14oz) with everything packed up, including the cloth storage bag for the burner and the bottom measuring cup or bowl.

Against other integrated alternatives, that looks a bit heavy. The MSR Reactor 1.7L (57.5fl oz), for example, weighs under 500g (1lb 1.6oz) for the set and offers faster boil times in wind.

Then again, if you’re worried about weight, the Jetboil all-in-one ecosystem probably isn’t the place you’re shopping anyway. Take a look at the MightyMo instead.

For the majority of backpackers, though, the packability of the Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz) is one of its genuine strengths. Everything nests inside the cookpot – burner, stand and a 230g (8.1oz) gas canister.

The packed dimensions measure approximately 21x12.5cm (8.3x4.9in), which means it fits easily in the main compartment of most backpacking rucksacks, though it’s a squeeze to slide it into a stretchy side pocket. Still, it doesn’t feel like a burden to carry, even if the scales tell a slightly less flattering story.

Ease of use

The Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz) is about as straightforward as backpacking cooking gets. Unpack, screw the canister onto the burner, lock the pot in place and twist to ignite. That’s it.

There’s no need to carry a separate lighter, though I always do as a backup. It’s the kind of system you can operate reliably in the dark with cold hands after a long day on the hill, which is precisely when you need your stove to work without any drama.

The new burner grip zone makes a real difference when attaching and detaching the cookpot. The previous version required more care to avoid touching any hot bits. The updated locking mechanism is also noticeably smoother – the pot clicks into place with more confidence and releases cleanly, which matters when you’re handling a pot of just-boiled water.

One note on the fuel stabiliser stand: Jetboil includes one with the Flash, and you should always use it. The system is top-heavy by nature. A full 1.8L (60.9fl oz) cookpot sitting above a gas canister is never going to be the most stable arrangement.

The stand adds a wide, grippy base that makes a meaningful difference, especially on uneven ground. Don’t cook on a rocky pitch without it.

If there’s a usability gripe, it’s the volume markings etched into the inside of the cookpot. They’re difficult to read at the best of times and particularly hard to see when the pot’s been used a few times. The measuring cup base is the more practical option for gauging quantities, and the semi-transparent redesign does help here.

Price and competition

The Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz) has an RRP of £209 ($164.99). It costs more than the older Jetboil Sumo, the other 1.8L (60.9fl oz) integrated system in the range.

The comparison between the two is worth spelling out, since they’re closely matched. The Sumo has a regulator for more consistent performance in cold conditions and with a depleting canister. The Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz) is faster to boil, has the new folding silicone handles and ThermoChromic indicator, and is the better buy for most casual campers and backpackers.

If you’re regularly camping in winter or at altitude, the Sumo’s regulator is worth the premium. Otherwise, the Flash makes more sense.

The most direct competitors from outside the Jetboil family are rival integrated systems like the MSR WindBurner Duo. The WindBurner edges out the Flash in exposed conditions and is a bit lighter, but costs more and is harder to find accessories for. The MSR Reactor 1.7L (57.5fl oz) is another strong option for serious all-weather use.

It boils faster with superior efficiency but is considerably more expensive. You can compare more integrated and conventional models in our guide to the best camping stoves.

For backpackers deciding whether they need an integrated system at all, the honest answer is: it depends what you want from a stove. If you’re a pair mainly boiling water for dehydrated meals and hot drinks on multi-day trips, or a campsite camper whose cooking needs go no further than tea in the morning and cocoa at night, the Flash 1.8L (60.9fl oz) is an excellent choice – fast, efficient, simple and self-contained.

Anyone who wants to cook proper food will be better served by a stove with better control, such as the Jetboil MiniMo, Genesis or TrailCook. Anyone weight-conscious will be drawn to a lighter setup like the MightyMo or SOTO Windmaster with a decent pot.

Verdict

The Jetboil Flash 1.8L is the best version of the Flash yet – and the first generation was already very good. The sturdy folding handles, improved ignition and reworked burner grip zone all address real-world niggles with the previous model. It’s fast, efficient, satisfyingly simple to use and packs away neatly and tidily.

There are compromises: it’s not light, it won’t really simmer and it needs a bit of wind shelter in exposed conditions. But if you’re a backpacking pair who want a fast, fuss-free cook system, or a campsite camper whose cooking needs begin and end with a quick brew, the Jetboil Flash 1.8L is about as capable and convenient as it gets.

See how the Jetboil Flash 1.8L compares with the other best backpacking stoves we’ve tested.

About the author

Matt Jones is a freelance journalist based in the heart of Eryri (Snowdonia) National Park. He’s a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek. Matt’s been one of our main gear testers for the last couple of years and is the first person we call with any complicated kit queries that need in-depth and forensic analysis.

How do you spend your weekends? We get 52 of them every year, but often they fly by in a blur and you’re left feeling that you wish you could have used them better. The truth is, you can fit a lot of adventure into 48 hours, so let us show you how.

In this article, you’ll find a handful of microadventure ideas. They’re here to excite you, challenge you, inspire you and lay the blueprints for many adventures to come.

As always, make sure you plan and prep adequately before heading out. You should have the means and skill to be able to navigate, keep a keen eye on the weather conditions and make sure you don’t attempt more than you can handle.

You’ll also need appropriate kit for each adventure, so alongside each adventure we’ll be putting forward suggestions from this article’s sponsor, Helly Hansen.

The Norwegian brand has been making technical outdoor gear since 1877 and has long been trusted by professionals around the world. That includes many Mountain Rescue volunteers here in the UK.

Innovation is at the brand’s core, with mountain professionals having an active role in the development of new designs, which are then put to the test in some of the most demanding conditions you can find.

With that said, let’s get stuck into some microadventure inspiration with these ideas…

Take on a big mountain day

If you have a lot of hiking under your belt and are well up for a physical challenge, you have a lot of options. We’re talking long days out with big mileage and wild terrain.

Why not head to Wales and take on the Welsh 3000s – that’s the 15 mountains in Eryri (Snowdonia) that go past the 3,000ft mark. You’ll be looking at a distance of 38+km and over 4,000m ascent, making it a huge day out.

Or visit Scotland and consider Ben Nevis via the CMD Arête – by far the most exciting way to get to Britain’s highest mountain summit. You’ll need a head for heights, but it should be within most experienced walkers’ skillset.

In England, consider the Yorkshire Three Peaks if you want a big mileage day (approx. 39km), which sees you climb Pen-y-ghent, Ingleborough and Whernside. Alternatively, head to the Lake District and tackle the Kentmere Horseshoe (21.4km) to bag nine Wainwrights. It’s a long day that keeps you up high, but delivers lots of airy ridge walking.

Key kit:

Try out a fastpacking adventure

Not quite ready for ultrarunning but like the thought of moving fast and light in the mountains? Try your hand at fastpacking. It’s basically a mash-up of running and lightweight backpacking over multiple days.

When you’re on tough terrain you stick to hiking, but then you try to run your route when you’re on flat ground or non-technical descents.

To give it a go over a weekend, we suggest picking a route that’s not too dissimilar in distance to what you’d normally hike in a couple of days, but tackle it with a much lighter pack and some running mixed in.

When starting out, it can be helpful to begin with a route you’ve done before to make navigation less of a concern. It’s also wise to have options to bail out mid-route, just in case your legs decide they’re not on board with your plans on the day.

Ideally, you’ll pack light, so remember that some of the biggest weight savings you can make are on your sleep system (e.g. bivvy bag, mat, sleeping bag) and rucksack.

Key kit:

Enjoy a wild camping weekend

Not every multiday adventure has to be done at a quick pace. Take your time on a wild camping adventure and seek out solitude in some of the UK’s quieter wild spaces. Start by picking out your location (more on that shortly) and what looks like a suitable camping spot, then plan your own route based on how long you’d like to spend walking each day.

In terms of locations, Dartmoor is a great one in the sense that there’s a legal right to camp in many areas within the national park. The Brecon Beacons (Bannau Brycheiniog) in Wales is another top option, especially the rolling tops of the Black Mountains in the eastern part. They’re often quiet and can deliver some incredible sunsets.

People have the right to roam in Scotland and it’s generally legal to wild camp there, but you should stick to unenclosed, remote ground, hills, moorland, woods and open countryside. Stay away from buildings, camp 30m+ away from any bodies of water and try to avoid known hotspots.

You’re often fine to wild camp in other wild areas in Britain, but you should abide by the Leave No Trace principles at all times, pitching up late, leaving early and sticking to more remote areas.

Key kit:

Get stuck into some scrambling

There are many special aspects to scrambling. The feeling of rough rock under the palms of your hands. The single-minded focus when carefully placing your foot onto a hold as you get ready to move your weight onto it. The look back at the gnarly mass of ground you’ve just covered.

It’s an activity that often delivers in scale, wow factor and satisfaction in droves. So where should you go for a weekend of scrambling? Unless you have the skills, knowledge and experience to tackle higher grades, we suggest sticking with grade one routes.

In Wales, you have many options in Eryri (Snowdonia). For an accessible duo, take on Cadair Idris via the Minffordd Path one day and then Cnicht (sometimes referred to as the Welsh Matterhorn) the other.

Or for shorter but more involved efforts you could head for Daear Ddu Ridge on Moel Siabod and follow it up with a circuit of the Glyders, via Devil’s Kitchen. Tryfan, Crib Goch and Nantlle Ridge are other options, though the former two are likely to be busy on weekends.

In the Lakes, you have classics like Striding Edge and Swirral Edge, which both flank Helvellyn and can be ticked off in a single hike. Jack’s Rake is another option that delivers on exposure, while Blencathra via Sharpe Edge is another classic.

For a bit of fun on the second day, consider scrambling Stickle Ghyll in the Langdale Valley. This is a short route (around 3.5km), but it gives you the chance to scramble beside (and sometimes in) a stream and waterfalls.

If Scotland is in your sights, you’re spoilt for choice. Torridon’s Horns of Alligin also deliver in spades, with epic views and engaging scrambling. Some of this may edge into grade two territory, so you’ll want some scrambling under your belt before tackling it, but there is a bypass option of the trickiest sections.

The CMD Arête on Ben Nevis is a more accessible alternative, while the Ring of Steall is also an option, with short sections of scrambling breaking up a pretty challenging hike.

Key kit:

I’ve been pitching tents in the UK’s hills and mountains long enough to have strong opinions about what makes a good one. Peak height matters as much as floor area. Rectangular footprints beat tapered ones. Metal hardware outlasts plastic. Fast, fuss-free pitching beats clever but complex design. And good condensation management can be the difference between a pleasant night and a miserable one. The MSR Hubba Hubba LT 2 ticks every single one of those boxes – and it does it at 1.36kg.

And that’s exactly why it’s secured a place in the LFTO Gear Awards 2026 as our backpacking tent of the year. Read on for more detail on why…

Why the MSR Hubba Hubba LT is our backpacking tent of the year

The Hubba Hubba name has long been shorthand for what is now a very popular category of tent – hubbed poles, double skin, two doors, two vestibules. So, the launch of the LT variant felt genuinely significant.

MSR’s answer to the growing weight competition from rivals like Big Agnes, Nemo and Sea to Summit was not to tinker at the margins but to split the range entirely: the HD for serious weather, the LT for those who want the classic formula trimmed down and opened up.

The key change is the pole geometry, which has improved the interior dimensions and are what now sets this tent apart from most rivals at a similar weight. A 102cm peak height means you can actually sit up – properly, even on a plush, fully inflated insulated air mat.

The floor is a full 2.95m² with no taper at the foot end, which means two wide sleeping mats fit side by side without anyone getting a cold shoulder or a damp footbox. Many rivals in this category narrow significantly at one end – the LT doesn’t, and the difference is noticeable over a multi-night trip.

The two full-width mesh pockets at each end, a pre-strung gear line overhead, and cable ports in the corners round out an interior that feels considered rather than just adequate.

Condensation management is also much improved. Out goes the nylon-heavy canopy of the outgoing NX, in comes a mostly-micromesh construction that slashes weight and improves airflow. For anyone who has woken up with a suspiciously damp down sleeping bag at 6am, that alone is a big bonus and something that for me, will always give a well-ventilated double-skin design the edge over lighter single-skin shelters.

Pitching is the kind of fast and foolproof exercise that you come to appreciate properly at dusk in a crosswind. A symmetrical layout means no need to match poles to specific corners or one end of the flysheet to the corresponding bit of the inner – the tent goes together the same way regardless of which end you start from, and the anodised metal corner hardware is precise and robust in a way that plastic squeeze buckles on certain rivals simply aren’t. Under five minutes from bag to pegged out, even in fading light.

The only genuine frustration is the inner-first pitch – it goes up quickly enough that the inner rarely gets properly soaked, but on a rainy day it’s a structural decision you notice. You’ll also need a couple of extra pegs to guy out the vestibules, as MSR short-change you on their supply of Mini Groundhogs.

The honest caveat – and it’s an important one for British users – is the weather resistance. At 1,200mm for the fly and 1,800mm HH waterproof ratings for the floor, these figures are modest by current standards. MSR’s argument is that real-world performance exceeds what headline numbers suggest, and on test that held true: the tent kept us dry through a gusty, wet Eryri night in early spring without drama. But I’d strongly recommend using the MSR footprint to protect that floor on consistently boggy ground.

And although it’s not a flimsy tent, I’d be cautious about pitching the LT on more exposed hillsides. For that kind of use – Scottish summits, multi-day trips in the ‘shoulder seasons’ – the beefier Hubba Hubba HD is the more appropriate choice. The LT is a late spring-to-early autumn tent, and it’s best used as one.

At £560 (though it's currently on sale), it sits alongside the Nemo Dagger Ridge OSMO and the Sea to Summit Telos EVO TR2 – serious money, but serious competition. But the LT offers an excellent balance of qualities: a truly rectangular footprint, class-leading headroom, outstanding condensation management and the kind of build quality that suggests it’ll still be performing in a decade.

Pick your conditions carefully, use the footprint, and this tent will repay you handsomely.

Verdict:

Arguably the most liveable lightweight two-person tent around – airy, spacious and well-built.

Read our full MSR Hubba Hubba LT review for a more detailed test.

Who should buy the MSR Hubba Hubba LT?

If you’re a fair-weather camper that prioritises weight and liveability for two people above all else, this may well be the tent for you. The 1.36kg weight is a winning metric, too.

However, if you reckon you’ll be using your tent in properly wet and exposed conditions, the LT shouldn’t be your first pick. Consider the HD instead, or see some of our other favourite two-person tents.

About the author

Matt Jones has been one of LFTO's chief testers for the last six years and is one of the most respected reviewers of outdoor gear in the UK. He lives and works in the mountains of North Wales and has used the Hubba Hubba LT for spring and summer wild camping across Eryri (Snowdonia) and for multi-night backpacking trips.

I'm happy to announce that, after careful consideration, the winner of the 'best running pack' category in our 2026 LFTO Gear Awards is the Osprey Dyna Pro 7.

I’ve been running since I was a child, scampering across my local fields while I was supposed to be doing homework. Now I’m a professional gear tester, scampering across local fields (and up mountains) is my homework.

The first running vest I bought still exists in the depths of my cupboard – it’s so beaten up the ‘Salomon’ lettering is basically illegible. I remember feeling really cool when I wore it, like now I’m a ‘proper’ runner. I was pleased just to have it, and honestly didn’t care about whether it was the best one out there.

Now that reviewing gear is my job, whenever I run in a new running pack I’m hyper-focussed on how it feels, vigilant for signs of discomfort – I want to help other runners make the best possible decision about what to do with their money.

Over the years, I’ve realised that the capability of a vest directly equates to how quickly I forget that I’m meant to be testing it – and start taking pictures of sheep. When I took the Osprey Dyna Pro on its first test run, this happened within the first kilometre.

Why the Osprey Dyna Pro 7 is our running vest of the year

The storage system is superb: three distinct compartments across the back mean you're not cramming everything into one main pocket. There's a main compartment for bulk, a zipped middle compartment for things you need mid-run, and an upper back stash pocket for layers like waterproof jackets. On a typical long training run I carry two flasks, energy gels, extra layers, and my phone – and everything has a logical home.

“This is Osprey doing what Osprey does: thinking through every last detail until there's nothing left to improve”

The top zipped pocket deserves a special mention. It's my go-to for valuables; there's even a small loop inside for keys, so you're not fishing around at the end of a run. The stash pockets are easy to access on the move, and there's an attachment loop for a running watch or tracker.

The front clasp design is simple and intuitive. WingStay stabilisers on the flasks make loading and unloading them far easier than on rival systems. This is Osprey doing what Osprey does: thinking through every last detail until there's nothing left to improve.

One caveat: the zipped phone pocket can be a squeeze when the flask is full. It's a minor gripe, but worth knowing if you run with a larger phone.

"Minimal bounce"

The Dyna Pro is designed from the ground up for technical trail running, and you feel that the moment you put it on. The quiver is excellent – it stays put when moving, and it's easy to reach into without having to stop.

The women's-specific fit is also worth calling out – it feels really well-moulded to my back. I've worn it on runs up to three hours and haven't had any discomfort. For a vest you're going to be wearing for long, hard hours, that matters more than almost anything else.

Miraculously, there’s very little bounce. That sounds like a low bar but it's one of the first things I look for in a running vest, and plenty of rivals don't clear it.

The back panel uses a restricted-stretch construction; it’s more tightly woven than alternatives – and that stabilises the load. The flasks also sit higher on the chest than any other running packs I've tested, and that helps them to stay put.

Who should buy it?

The Dyna Pro 7L is the right size for runs of up to about three hours – beyond that, depending on conditions and mandatory kit requirements, you'd want to consider the 10L version. At £140, it's not cheap. There's a lighter, simpler standard Dyna for runners who want fewer features, and a men's equivalent – the Duro Pro – if the women's fit isn't for you.

But if you want the full performance package in a women's-specific design, the Dyna Pro is the one. For long, technical trail races where you need everything accessible and minimal bouncing, it's hands-down the best run pack I've tested.

Verdict

The Osprey Dyna Pro is the kind of running pack you can forget you're wearing – stable, comfy, with very little bounce. But for me, what elevates it above the rest is the storage options; it's simply so well thought through for running. Everything has a logical home, everything is accessible on the move and nothing has been left to chance.

About the author

Evie Nichols is LFTO's chief female tester. She loves nothing more than being in high and remote places, and in general, she's not fussy whether that's in trail running shoes, climbing shoes, walking boots or on two wheels.

After a new half-marathon PB this year, she's got several trail races lined up for this summer, up to 56km – no prizes for guessing which running vest she'll be wearing. Follow her adventures on Instagram at @eviejnichols.

A few minutes after this photo was taken, with the setting sun slipping behind the highest summits in southern Britain, I saw something I’ll never forget. And something that will always remind me why hauling a heavy rucksack full of camping kit up a mountain is so worth it.

As evening light began to wash across the Brecon Beacons, making the landscape appear far more warm and golden than the plunging temperatures did, I looked down at the broad grassy spur separating us from nearby Cribyn. There probably wasn’t another person within a couple of miles, with just the faint whistle of breeze through long grass breaking the silence.

At first I thought it was a sheep, as I watched an animal tiptoe out of the shadows and stalk to the crest of the ridge. But as its full silhouette appeared against the sunset, I realised I was looking at a Welsh mountain pony – one of a small number of short, sturdy, hardy residents who roam freely across these hills.

Backlit by the sun, it looked almost ridiculously majestic. Like a stallion from an old Western movie. And it made me remember that – despite how much effort it had taken to get to this place at this time of day, and how cold my ears were getting, and how I was pretty sure I wouldn’t get more than a few hours of good sleep over the course of the night – wild camping is an awesome thing to do.

Heading down south

We hadn’t even planned on being in the Brecon Beacons. Our original itinerary involved a one-nighter further north, probably in the Lakes, until we spotted something on the weather forecast suggesting the slim chance of a sunset over the Brecon Beacons National Park.

So off we went. I love these hills. And I have to admit that sometimes I forget all about them when I’m planning mountain trips, lazily opting for another trip up the A1 towards Cumbria or the boundless wonderland of the Highlands.

I've walked this route a few times before – and it’s a belter

But every time I visit the Beacons I immediately get wrapped up in that intoxicating, almost surreal, almost magical quality they have. Not quite high enough to knacker you out, but still big enough to feel like proper mountains. Not sharp or edgy enough to make your knees wobble, but shapely and sculpted enough to make your jaw drop. And here’s my favourite bit… not quite popular enough to be crawling with people when you chance a last-minute wild camp right in the guts of the main peaks.

Our plan was a fairly basic one. We parked up near Talybont Reservoir in late afternoon, loaded our packs with warm layers, sleeping gear and plenty of comfort food, then headed uphill in the vague direction of Fan y Big.

I’ve walked this route a few times before and it’s a belter. You get high quickly on the Beacons Way (a glorious 100-mile long-distance trail across the National Park to add to your bucket list) and as a result you get the views early. Then they stay with you for as long you’re prepared to stay up there.

Picking the spot

Back to that plan. It was mid-April, that tricky time of year when you never quite know what the weather’s going to chuck at you. It was warm walking up in the sunshine, but the temperatures were forecast to dip below freezing by nightfall.

We passed plenty of walkers descending from their day in the hills, greeting them with the inevitable self-satisfaction of someone who’s heading up to do something annoyingly adventurous while they’re already on their way down and back to the car.

Every time I visit the Beacons I immediately get wrapped up in that almost magical quality they have

We were aiming for a flat patch of grass near the craggy edge of Craig Cwareli, which trusty Trail photographer Tom assured me would offer up a unique view of the distinctive Beacons trio of Cribyn, Pen y Fan and Corn Du, all stacking up neatly in a row. And of course, as always, he was right.

The pitch turned out to be perfect, with the ground flat enough to offer a comfy sleeping spot, soft enough to take pegs, and perched high enough to give us a nice vantage point for both the impending sunset and sunrise the following morning.

We set up our tents in beautiful evening light with the sound of skylarks filling the air above, and the occasional glimpse of a peregrine patrolling the cwms below. The whole scene was about as memorable and perfect as wild camping gets.

Quivering in the tent

It got cold quickly. And I mean, mega cold. As much as I like to act all rugged and tough, I get very grumpy very quickly once my hands get chilly. So as soon as the sun fell from the sky, following the aforementioned silhouetted pony sighting, I wasn’t in the mood to hang about outside the tent for long.

We cooked a couple of boil-in-the-bag meals, grumbled to each other about not bringing something stronger to drink than hot chocolate, retreated into our tents to the warmth of our sleeping bags, then settled down hoping to get a few hours of decent shut- eye – which I always find harder than I’d like when I’m wild camping.

Then that slightly unsettling thing happened to us, the one that you hope won’t happen when you’re trying to get to sleep on a dark hill in the middle of nowhere. A couple of random blokes turned up.

We heard voices approaching from the same direction we’d arrived, then saw headlamps twinkling as they scanned around for someone to murder, or maybe to pitch their tents. It’s hard to think rationally when you’re half asleep on a mountaintop and being circled in the dark by a couple of strangers. And then, mercifully, all went quiet.

Chasing the sunrise

I unzipped the tent door just before sunrise and got showered in frost falling from the canvas as I poked my head out. Tom was already up, faffing about with tripods and filters and getting ready for the fast-approaching lightshow in the businesslike way that all good photographers do.

We got the shots we needed, broke camp, then headed over to the lip of Cwm Oergwm to gaze down into the secluded depths of a pristine Brecon Beacons valley, with the faint trickle of its river and waterfalls just about audible in the near-silence of a still spring mountain morning.

It was then that we located our two would-be assailants from the previous night, tucked up in bivvy bags on what at first glance looked like a terrifyingly exposed ledge; but on closer inspection was a perfectly positioned and enclosed grassy shelf offering up spectacular views of the sunrise.

We exchanged a few cheery hellos, made a mental note to nab that spot next time we come up here, then headed off to bag a few peaks before lunch.

Bagging the big names

The route we took back to the car needs very little introduction. First we traversed our way to the promontory of Fan y Big and its famous diving board rock, before the steep pull up to the summit of Cribyn, where we were treated to the surreal magnified shadow of a Brocken spectre as mist began to billow up around us.

From there it was a steep drop down to the saddle of Craig Cwm Sere, followed by an even steeper pull up to the summit of Pen y Fan, the highest point in south Wales and all of southern Britain at 886m. But what made this moment different to the many other times I’ve stood on this summit, or the countless photos I’ve seen of Trail readers in the same location, is that there was nobody else there.

One of the best things about Pen y Fan is how accessible it is to everyone from kids and grandparents to experienced walkers and backpackers, and as a result it usually draws a meaty crowd.

But today we had it all to ourselves, because we were on top while most people were still at home in their PJs thinking about which mountain to go and climb. And that – more than the sunsets, the solitude, the sense of escapism, and the creepy midnight visitors – is what I love most about sleeping in the mountains.

About the author

Oli’s the Group Editor across our outdoor brands, the former long-standing editor of Trail magazine, and has been working on LFTO since 2013. He's a lifelong hiker who's climbed hills and mountains everywhere from the Lakes and the Dales to the Dolomites and Yosemite.

Oli loves a night in a tent somewhere wild, is rarely seen wearing long trousers, and can often be spotted walking, cycling, or paddling along a trail or river with his two young boys in tow. Which also makes him our go-to tester for family outdoor kit.

The trick Stella Artois pulled was convincing people that it was a cut above other lagers with its ‘Reassuringly Expensive’ slogan. There’s something similar going on with Outwell’s family tents too, which are admittedly on the pricier end of the spectrum. The Sacramento Air 6 is a case in point: available for just under a grand, this high price had me expecting something rather special.

Well, I was more than reassured. In fact, I was delighted from the outset by the obvious quality of both the overall design and the component parts here, and still am to this day. This is a fortress of fabric to rely on for many family adventures to come, and one of the best family tents around.

And it’s for those reasons that it’s earned itself a slot in the 2026 LFTO Gear Awards as our family tent of the year. Keen on reading to find out more.

Why the Outwell Sacramento 6 Air is our family tent of the year

I’ve been using the Sacramento throughout the topsy-turvy British spring. This has meant it’s had to cope with everything from April afternoons that felt as though they should belong in a July heatwave to the kind of freezing mornings where phrases like “bone deep cold” get bandied about.

While enjoying the Sacramento, I’ve also spent the season trying out several other family tents and can, with a substantial degree of confidence, state that this is the best I tested.

Let’s start with the overall package before drilling down into the nitty gritty of what it is that makes the individual components so noteworthy. The Sacramento is a large tunnel tent that uses four air beams to assume its shape. I’m an advocate of the fuss-free setup and takedown of an air tent and there’s always something magical about seeing the thing take shape as the psi hits eight.

Once alive and kicking, the Sacramento provides a luxurious amount of space, especially for someone whose formative family camping experiences were of being squeezed into a three-person tent with my dad and brother in a field near Robin Hood’s Bay.

I love the way this palatial interior, which simply oozes premium appeal, can be made even airier thanks to the extent to which the interior doors can almost be fully opened. The main porch door can be tied back to form a grand arch or opened entirely, while two-thirds of the door between the porch and the living area can be tied back, creating a nice sense of flow. Lovely jubbly.

I like that the partitions between the three bedrooms can be rolled up and tidied away to create a larger sleeping space (especially for squeezing in a range of camping mattresses). There’s an ingenious touch in the form of a magnetic closure between two of the rooms, enabling me to creep in during the night without waking my daughters. The blackout fabrics used are good too, which means the sun doesn’t creep in at dawn… and wake my daughters. Basically, the design of the bedrooms helps to keep my daughters asleep when they need to be.

Yes, the devil is in the detail with this tent. I like the thought that has gone into the adjustable toggles used to secure the doors and curtains when rolled up; I appreciate the Velcro straps that enable me to keep the guy lines tidy when not in use, thus avoiding tangles; and I value the option of attaching additional storage or other accessories inside the tent using the HookTrack system.

The durability and quality of the tent’s fabrics is obvious too. I’m not going to bang on about hydrostatic head and double-coated groundsheets here – that’s what the full review is for. Suffice to say, the tightly woven blend of cotton and polyester provides a robust surface, one that I’ve felt shielded by in a range of conditions.

And the pegs? Well, the pegs are magnificent. This is a sentence I never imaged myself writing, but there you go. Far bulkier than your average tent peg and almost impossible to bend out of shape, they add to the impression of robust quality that runs throughout.

In fact, I’d go as far as to say that these pegs embody the way in which this tent, like Stella Artois, is reassuringly expensive. However, unlike a pint of Stella, I actually rather like this product.

It’s tempting to think of budget family tents as “good value”, but actual, proper value comes from durability and intelligent design. True value is a tent that you can rely on to be a comfortable home from home for many years. In a nutshell, that’s what Outwell’s Sacramento Air 6 offers. Take it from me, it’s a sound investment.

Who should buy it?

If you have space to pack this tent into your car, van or trailer then I'd 100% recommend it to you. Yes it's big and bulky when packed down, but it's the closest thing we've experienced to a home away from home at a campsite.

You could easily spend a week camping in this tent and not end up hating it come departure day – even if it's been raining most of the time.

Verdict

It's by no means the lightest or most packable, but my word this is an excellent family tent. It's easy to pitch, wonderfully liveable and there are nice design touches throughout. It's seriously high quality, too, so I'd expect it to last you for years to come. And you'd hope so, with a price of £1,050 (though you can find it cheaper).

Read our full Outwell Sacramento 6 Air review for a more detailed analysis.

About the author

Alex Foxfield is a qualified Mountain Leader, avid wild camper and family man, who enjoys camping in all its forms. An outdoor gear expert, he’s been testing and reviewing camping kit and tents – from solo backpacking shelters to palatial family car camping tents – for several years, and has been our main man for family tents for the last couple of years.

There’s often a point on most camping trips where a single-burner camping stove starts to feel like a compromise. You’re keeping the pasta warm while the sauce goes cold, or making everyone wait in turn for a brew while the eggs go rubbery.

For car campers, festival-goers and weekend adventurers who want to cook actual meals rather than just boil water in sequence, a twin-burner stove is the straightforward solution – and the Campingaz Camp & Trek Twin Connect makes a strong case for being one of the most sensible choices in that category.

Campingaz is one of the longest-established names in European camping cooking, and the Twin Connect is a product that reflects that heritage: well-engineered, practical and clearly designed by people who have thought carefully about how it gets used in the field.

It’s compact enough to fit comfortably in its supplied carry bag without taking up too much boot space, and powerful enough to cook breakfast, lunch or dinner for four without drama. The question is whether the few meaningful limitations – principally around wind resistance and fuel type – are enough to give pause.

Design and build quality

The Twin Connect is a pressed-steel unit, solidly built and with the kind of reassuring heft that suggests it will outlast several cheaper rivals. The construction is clean and unfussy: two wide burner heads, two control knobs, a gas inlet connection and four rubber feet on the base.

Related advice: Best gas for camping stoves

There are no removable gas rings or grates to keep track of, which makes field cleaning easier – you wipe it down in situ rather than stripping it apart. The trade-off is that the cooking surfaces need cleaning with the unit assembled, so any overflows or spills require a bit more elbow work than a stripped-down design. There’s no drip tray either, which is worth being aware of if you’re cooking bacon or anything with significant fat content.

The pot supports are simple pressed steel without teeth. They hold pots and pans securely enough on a flat surface, but anything less than level ground will allow cookware to shift slightly – something to bear in mind when pitching on uneven terrain.

The two cooking surfaces measure 15cm (5.9in) in diameter each, which is generous enough to accommodate most standard camp cookware. The unit will just about take two 18cm (7.1in) pans simultaneously, though nothing much wider than that. The overall profile is less than 12cm (4.7in) from base to cooking surface, which keeps the centre of gravity low and contributes to the stable feel in use.

The control knobs are a highlight. Each offers two and a half full turns of adjustment from maximum to minimum, which is considerably more range than the simple hi/lo arrangements on cheaper twin-burner stoves. That translates to genuinely useful simmer control: you can hold a sauce at a steady low heat without it catching or going out, which isn’t always a given on compact camping stoves.

The piezo ignition is well protected – no exposed wires in the flame path – and sparked reliably on every attempt during testing. Always carry a lighter as a backup, but you’re unlikely to need it often.

Internally, the brass burner tubes and ignition wiring are accessible by flipping the unit upside down, which makes inspection and any necessary maintenance straightforward. The flip side is that those internals are exposed to dust and dirt in storage.

Keep the carry bag on it when not in use and it won’t be a problem in practice. The bag itself – included in the box – is functional but not particularly tough: the zip feels fragile and there’s no padding, so it’ll protect the stove from scratches in transit but not from a firm knock. Don’t just sling it loose in the boot.

The Twin Connect uses Campingaz’s proprietary CV cartridge system with Easy Clic Plus dual-lock connection – and it’s one of the standout features of the whole unit. Rather than screwing a canister into a threaded valve, you simply press the cartridge into position and twist the blue collar: a visual red/green indicator confirms whether it’s safely secured.

Green means locked and ready; red means not yet properly connected. There’s no ambiguity, no risk of a cross-threaded connection and no gas flow until the lock engages. For families with children around, or anyone who finds the fiddly threading of conventional EN417 canisters frustrating in cold or dark conditions, it’s a genuinely better system.

The remote canister design – connected via a braided hose rather than screwing directly underneath the burner – also improves stability and means the canister can sit flat on the ground beside the stove rather than suspending awkwardly below it. The hose is only 35cm (13.8in) long, which limits placement options a little, but it’s long enough for practical use in most campsite setups.

CV cartridges come in 300g (10.6oz) and 470g (1lb 0.6oz) sizes and are widely stocked by outdoor retailers and larger supermarkets across the UK and Europe.

The 470g (1lb 0.6oz) size also comes in an all-season mix, which uses an isobutane/propane blend rather than standard butane/propane. This maintains better performance in cold weather – worth knowing if you’re camping outside the summer months.

All the various sizes and types are also available in four-packs, which works out better value per gram of fuel than buying individually. One limitation: this burner isn’t compatible with Campingaz’s dual regulator kits, so you can’t connect this stove to larger refillable gas bottles.

For the short-break, car-camping use cases this stove is aimed at, that’s unlikely to matter – but it’s worth knowing if you had larger-group, extended summer holiday cooking in mind.

Performance

Each burner outputs 2,000W, and both operate independently – meaning you can run one at full heat and the other at a low simmer simultaneously, which is exactly how most people actually cook. This isn’t the most powerful dual-burner stove on the market though, since some rivals claim up to 3,500W. This translates to slightly longer boiling times.

Campingaz claims a boil time of just under four minutes per litre (33.8fl oz); in our comparative boil test – 500ml (16.9fl oz) at 14°C (57.2°F) in a 6mph breeze – we recorded 5mins 45secs on a single burner. The gap to the manufacturer’s figure is almost entirely explained by the wind: without integrated windshields, even a modest 6mph breeze noticeably affects performance.

In a sheltered position – behind a windbreak, inside a dedicated camp kitchen unit, or simply with the stove positioned somewhere out of the prevailing wind – results will be considerably closer to the stated times.

The wide burner heads distribute heat evenly across the base of a pan, which reduces hot spots and is a genuine advantage for anything more than boiling water. Frying, sautéing and simmering all feel more controllable than on many comparable compact twin-burner stoves, and the two-and-a-half turns of simmer range on the knobs gives you real precision at low output.

For the campsite cooking audience this stove is aimed at – fry-ups, chilli or spag bol, even a risotto – the performance is more than adequate.

Wind resistance

The lack of built-in windshields is the Twin Connect’s most significant practical limitation and the main reason our boil test times sat below the manufacturer’s figure. There are no fold-out side panels or integrated baffles, so the burners are exposed to wind from all directions. In breezy conditions, this affects both boil times and fuel consumption noticeably.

In practice, most car campers will be cooking on a picnic table, at a camp kitchen station or in the lee of a windbreak, where this matters less. But if you’re regularly cooking in an exposed field or festival site with no natural shelter, a folding windshield accessory is a worthwhile addition. It’s worth noting that several rival twin-burner stoves in this category do include fold-out panels; if wind resistance is a priority for your typical camping conditions, it’s a factor worth weighing when comparing options.

Weight and pack size

At 1.41kg (3lb 1.7oz), the Twin Connect is among the lighter twin-burner stoves on the market. For context, most suitcase-style folding two-burner stoves – the kind that run from a full-size Campingaz or propane bottle – weigh 3kg to 5kg (6lb 9.8oz to 11lb) and take up a significant chunk of boot space.

The Twin Connect fits into its carry bag with a canister alongside it and takes up roughly the same footprint as a big bloomer loaf. For festivals, weekend trips or short camping breaks, that’s a meaningful advantage over a full-size camp stove.

The carry bag is included and conveniently sized to take a CV canister alongside the stove, keeping everything in one place. As noted above, the bag itself isn’t particularly rugged – treat it as a storage/car-to-pitch carry solution rather than protection against knocks.

The second bit of that ‘Camp & Trek’ name is perhaps a bit of a misnomer though – despite its modest dimensions and reasonable weight, we still wouldn’t want to trek very far with it, at least not if we were carrying it in a pack. This is definitely not a trekking or backpacking stove, though it is a viable choice for overlanding or canoe camping.

Price and competition

The Twin Connect has an RRP of £110, though it’s regularly available at modest discounts. That sits above some rival compact twin-burners: the Robens Fire Hornet, Outwell Mauna Duo and Vango Inferno Double all come in cheaper.

Against those, the Twin Connect arguably justifies its premium through solid build quality, the idiot-proof Easy Clic Plus connection system and Campingaz’s reputation for longevity. It’s genuinely common to encounter Campingaz stoves on campsites that are clearly a decade or more old and still in daily use. Premium rivals like the Primus Kinja cost more still.

Campingaz backs the Twin Connect with a one-year warranty as standard. Given the build quality, it’s likely to outlast that comfortably with reasonable care.

Final verdict

A compact, well-built twin-burner stove for car campers and festival-goers who want to cook proper meals without hauling a full-size camp kitchen. The Campingaz Camp & Trek Twin Connect’s Easy Clic Plus connection system is one of the best gas canister designs on the market, the simmer control is genuinely impressive for the category, and the lightweight pressed-steel construction has the feel of something built to last.

The wind sensitivity is a real limitation and the absent drip tray is a negative, but neither is a dealbreaker for the campsite and festival context this stove is designed for. Position it sensibly, cook with a little care, and it’s a thoroughly capable and convenient piece of kit. For families and groups who want twin-burner practicality without the bulk, it’s one of the strongest choices in its category.

About the author

Matt Jones is a freelance journalist based in the heart of Eryri National Park (Snowdonia), he’s a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek. Matt’s been one of our main gear testers for the last couple of years and is the first person we call with any complicated kit queries that need in-depth and forensic analysis. He was previously editor of Walk and Scouting magazines.

Technology evolves, but so do price tags. Like smartphones and laptops, the price of GPS watches has moved ever skyward over the years. You can easily spend well over £500 on a watch these days. Heck, if you want every feature under the sun, you’re looking at a bank-busting £1,000 or more. But it doesn’t need to be this way...

Step forward the Coros Pace 4 – our GPS watch of the year in the LFTO 2026 Gear Awards. With an RRP of just £229, it offers serious value for money that’s pretty hard to beat.

For a long time now I’ve had a chunky Garmin on my wrist as my watch of choice, but Coros has been tempting me to cheat.

That’s kind of a big deal. Myself and the rest of the LFTO review team review hundreds of products every year, including running watches and outdoor watches for hiking. I’ve personally been testing GPS watches for over eight years, yet nothing’s turned my head quite like this.

Let me explain why…

Why the Coros Pace 4 is our GPS watch of the year

Today’s smartwatches are essentially mini computers. The range-topping ones offer huge screens and so much functionality that it’ll blow your mind. Everything from training tools, real-time stamina tracking and music controls to mapping, heart rate monitoring and sleep reporting.

But the truth is, many of us don’t need all of that. And the Coros Pace 4 shows why.

I’ve had it wrapped around my wrist for months, so it’s come with me on mountain hikes, bike rides, gym sessions and plenty of runs. In that time, there’s not much I’ve really felt I’m missing out on.

Sure, there’s no detailed mapping, but you do get the classic breadcrumb style navigation – basically a line on a blank background and your location in relation to it. While it’s nice to have the former, particularly if you’re exploring more remote areas, chances are you’ll have either a paper map and/or a navigation app on your phone.

Despite the budget price point the Pace 4 comes with an AMOLED screen and it’s this, along with the interface, which makes it so easy to use.

You can easily customise the watch face, pick out the key metrics you want to see and create a personalised shortlist of activities that you intend to use regularly. Data is displayed clearly, so it’s easy to read, while the pop of colour really helps make it glanceable.

You use two buttons and a scrollable dial to get around the watch and it just makes sense – you’ll get the hang of it in no time at all. The Pace 4 also uses a touchscreen, which you can use if that’s what you’d prefer – or you can switch it off for everything but navigation.

Features such as training status, sleep tracking and running fitness are never 100% accurate, but I’ve found them useful as a guide. The heart rate variability feature is handy for picking up when your body isn’t quite at its peak, while you also get recovery estimates.

Add in standard smartwatch features such as phone notifications, music controls (I use mine for Spotify on my phone) and step tracking, and it’s a pretty complete package.

Vitally, underpinning all of those features is reliable dual-frequency GPS (that means it can use two GPS systems at once), mostly accurate heart rate data and impressive battery life – mine has lasted around 7-10 days of usual use, while six hours of GPS activity tracking (dual frequency) only used 23% battery.

Do the maths and you should be able to get at least 24 hours of accurate, dual-frequency activity tracking on one charge – plenty for many ultras or a couple of days of hiking.

What impresses me more, though, is that it delivers all this in a compact 33g package (with the comfy nylon strap). In fact, it’s a nice alternative to the bulky watches that have come to dominate this sector.

Final verdict

The Coros Pace 4 is enough watch for most users. It’s compact, super easy to use and delivers on so many levels. I think it’s actually going to be difficult to go back to my normal watch (sorry, Garmin Fenix 7, it's been fun knowing you) – which costs double!

Who should buy the Coros Pace 4?

Everything in life is getting more expensive, but at £229 the Coros Pace 4 is a real bargain. If you want a large screen, range-topping durability and full offline mapping then you’ll need to look elsewhere.

Otherwise, you should seriously consider buying this GPS watch. It’s bright, lightweight, incredibly intuitive to use, has genuinely useful training features and will prove a reliable tool for all of your adventures. I just can't believe it's not more expensive.

About the author

Rob Slade has been deputy editor at Live for the Outdoors since September 2024. Before that, he was content editor at 220 Triathlon and editor at Adventure Travel magazine. He’s been an outdoor and sports journalist for 11 years, testing hundreds of products every year.

As a hiker, camper, runner, cyclist, swimmer and triathlete, Rob is well placed to test out GPS watches – and it’s something he’s been doing for over eight years now. He’s reviewed dozens of devices in that time, putting them to the test on dusty trails, rocky mountain peaks, countryside lanes and ice-cold lakes.

Before we talk about the best men's running shorts, let's address a topic that may be on your mind: Running does not require specialist equipment. That's one of the best things about it. However, we do find that as we improve our performance, we want to improve the quality of our gear too.

There are some excellent men's running shorts out there, and we’ve done enough side-by-side comparison tests to decide that they are, indeed, worth the investment. Once you've got yourself some decent trail running shoes first, obviously.

Airy, lightweight shorts are an absolute blessing in the warmer months. And it takes some fairly high-quality materials and construction to get a pair that's light and durable enough to handle plenty of use.

Of course, in winter you could invest in some running leggings, but generally, you can't beat a good pair of shorts.

We know everyone has their own preference when it comes to shorts, particularly regarding length and the great pocket debate. That’s why in this guide, we’ve tested and recommended a wide range of different options so there’s something for everyone.

The best running shorts for men at a glance

Best in test: Rab Talus Active

Best value running shorts: Montane Slipstream 7"

Best ultralight running shorts: The North Face Summit Pacesetter Shorts

Best shorts for trail running: On Trail Shorts

Best running shorts for versatility: Salomon Shakeout Core 2in1 7in Shorts

Editor's note: This buying guide was updated on 11 June 2026, when Rob Slade added six new models he tested over spring.

How we tested

Any pair of running shorts will get you from A to B, but the best ones need to go further – staying comfortable, practical and in good shape after months of use.

To make sure the models in this list were up to standard, we ran in them over a variety of distances and terrains, from short lunchtime blasts to long, hilly trail runs. We paid close attention to fit, fabric feel, moisture-wicking, breathability, and how well they prevented chafing on hot days.

Durability was a big focus. We made sure each pair could handle keys or a phone bouncing in the pocket without wearing thin, and survive repeated spins through the washing machine without seams unravelling or fabrics losing shape.

Storage was also key: we looked for pocket layouts that kept essentials secure without bounce or bulk. Testing was done by deputy editor Rob Slade and digital writer Milo Wilson, who spent many hours running on bridleways, muddy tracks and road sections to see how they performed in mixed conditions. The result is a list of shorts you can trust to last longer than a couple of 10km trail races.

For more detail on our processes, read our how we test page.

The best men's running shorts in detail:

What to look for in men’s running shorts

Length

Length is largely a matter of personal preference. Longer shorts provide more coverage and can offer extra protection from the sun or abrasive vegetation on trail runs. Shorter shorts, on the other hand, are typically lighter, more breathable, and allow for greater freedom of movement – making them a popular choice for speed sessions and races.

Pockets

If you prefer not to run with a running belt or vest, pockets become essential. Look for secure, bounce-free pockets that can comfortably hold a phone without flapping around. For long-distance training or races, extra pockets for gels, keys, and other essentials can make a big difference.

Lining

Most running shorts include a built-in liner, either in the form of a breathable mesh brief or a fitted inner short. Mesh liners offer lightweight support and excellent ventilation, while tight-fitting liners can add stability, reduce chafing, and provide additional storage. Going liner-free maximises airflow but may require separate running underwear.

Materials

Synthetic fabrics dominate the running shorts market for good reason – they’re lightweight, quick-drying, and affordable. High-performance brands may blend in merino wool for odour control and comfort. Wherever possible, choose shorts made from recycled or bluesign-approved fabrics, and if a water-repellent coating is used, look for a PFC-free DWR finish.

About the authors

Milo Wilson has been a writer and gear tester on Live for the Outdoors' running section for three years. From ultralight running packs to winter-ready trail shoes, Milo has spent hundreds of hours putting gear through its paces in the British countryside. He favours slower, longer distances where comfort and reliability are key, but he's also been known to chase the odd PB when a bear appears.

Rob Slade has been LFTO's deputy editor since 2024, but has been an outdoor journalist and gear tester for over 11 years. He was previously content editor at 220 Triathlon magazine and editor at Adventure Travel magazine, so he's spent many, many days sweating it out while analysing gear.

The best sleeping bag liners are precious middle layers, like pickle in a cheddar sandwich. Sitting between the human and the sleeping bag, or the bread and the cheese, neither would be the same without them – yet they're under-appreciated.

You might be undecided on whether a sleeping bag liner (not to be confused with a bin bag liner) is actually useful. Your sleeping bag is already warm enough, so why would you need to fork out another £50+ on more camping kit you don’t really need?

This is a totally valid question, which we’ve asked ourselves before, too. But after years of camping experience, we’d never go on a trip without one – and here’s why.

Selfishly, your sleeping bag needs a liner. Liners are an elixir of youth for your sleeping bag, shielding it against everything that harms it (namely: your dirt and sweat). You wouldn’t sleep directly under your duvet without a bedsheet, right?

But sleeping bag liners are generous with who they benefit. They don’t just protect what’s on the outside, they also help the human inside to sleep better.

If your sleeping bag isn’t very warm, a fleece liner like the Rab Thermic Neutrino will give you a much-needed warmth boost. Lighter silk liners, like the Lifeventure Ultimate Silk, help you to regulate your temperature and make your sleeping bag more comfortable.

Plus, the same liner can be equally useful in both the Mediterranean or the Arctic. It can be used to protect a sleeping bag that’s already warm enough, or can be slept in on its own – if the temperature allows.

If you’re not already convinced, on top of all of this they’re also super handy for mountain refuges and hostels. And they’re much less hassle to wash than a sleeping bag.

In short: they’re worth it. But if your sleeping bag liner isn’t well-suited to your needs, it won’t be much use – and could even be a waste of money.

So how do you find the best sleeping bag liner? When every brand states that their liner adds about three degrees of warmth and is made of cutting-edge ‘PolyThermoLite’ fabric, it’s difficult to know where to start.

To help you choose the right liner for your needs, we’ve spent months testing the best sleeping bag liners for 2026. We’ve also compiled our many years of camping experience to put together a buying guide, helping you to make the most informed choice possible.

Best sleeping bag liners at a glance

Best sleeping bag liner overall: Sea to Summit Reactor Lightweight

Best sleeping bag liner for warmth: Rab Thermic Neutrino

Best lightweight sleeping bag liner: Lifeventure Ultimate Silk

Editor's note: This group test was last updated on 11 June, when we checked whether all options were still in stock and added another option from Sea to Summit: the Reactor Fleeceweight.

How we tested the best sleeping bag liners

The LFTO team is made up of outdoor gear experts with years of experience using sleeping bag liners. We carefully curated this selection of liners to ensure there's something for serious winter campers as well as happy-go-lucky summer backpackers.

The reviews in this list have been written by LFTO digital writer Evie Nichols, with each one informed by thorough, real-life tests performed over several months in the spring.

Evie tested these liners in her The North Face Kilo Bag, a mummy-shaped down sleeping bag that's rated to 0°C. To judge how comfortable each liner is, she carefully assessed their size, shape and texture, as well as ease of use and perceived added warmth.

To verify each of the liners’ measurements, Evie measured their weight with her own scales (with the pack included) and used a tape measure for the pack size.

We reached a conclusion on the overall performance of each of these sleeping bag liners through carefully assigning a score based on five criteria: comfort, weight, pack size, features and value.

Want to know more about how we get products in for review? Read how we test here.

Best sleeping bag liners reviewed:

Comparison table

Here's our three favourites: Sea to Summit Reactor, Rab Thermic Neutrino and Lifeventure Ultimate Silk – compared. This shows just how much difference material makes to weight: the silk option is far lighter than the other two. But it's not as warm – so it depends what your priorities are.

What to look for in a sleeping bag liner?

Size and shape

There are two main shapes of sleeping bag liner: mummy and rectangle. Mummy liners are wider at the shoulders and hips than at the ankles. Rectangular liners are, as the name suggests, a standard rectangle shape.

Mummy liners are best if you have a mummy-shaped sleeping bag. As they fit more closely around your body, they’re more snug. They also tend to be made of stretchy material, to compensate for the tighter fit. This shape tends to be slightly lighter, as there’s less fabric.

Rectangular liners, on the other hand, have more wiggle room. But this won’t be particularly useful if you have a mummy-shaped sleeping bag. So again, it depends on your type of sleeping bag. It’s best to use a rectangular liner on its own or with a rectangular sleeping bag.

Material

The most common types of sleeping bag liner material are: silk, cotton and polyester.

Silk

Silk liners are the most lightweight and compact of all liner types. They also tend to be the most expensive. For some people silk is the most comfortable material, as it’s very soft and smooth against your skin.

A silk liner is very versatile: it could be equally useful during a Mediterranean summer camping trip or a winter alpine expedition.

In the heat, you might find that your sleeping bag is too hot, but you don’t want to just sleep with nothing over you. Here, a silk liner comes to life. It’s comfortable to sleep in and will help you thermoregulate by wicking sweat.

On a cold night, you won't want to depend on a silk liner as it won’t add much warmth at all. But it’ll wick moisture away from your sleeping bag and protect it against dirt. This prolongs the life of your sleeping bag.

You’ll feel the benefit during the night as well, as it’ll help you to thermoregulate. But make sure your sleeping bag is warm enough on its own.

Cotton

If you like to feel like you’re stepping into bed when you get into your sleeping bag, you’ll prefer cotton and polycotton liners. Cotton liners are super easy to wash and maintain, plus they tend to be very durable. They’re also generally more budget-friendly than silk or synthetic options.

We wouldn’t recommend taking a cotton liner on backpacking trips though, as they tend to be heavier and bulkier. They also take a long time to dry.

A cotton liner sits somewhere between a silk liner and a fleece-lined liner in terms of warmth. If in doubt, consider whether you’d be warm enough taking your bedsheet with you, as a cotton liner feels basically the same.

Overall, a cotton liner is a good choice for staying in hostels or mountain refuges, especially if you don’t like the feeling of silk or synthetic fibres. But it won’t save you any space or weight on a hiking trip.

Polyester

You might think liners which are 100% polyester all feel the same, but they can actually feel quite different.

The Rab Thermic Neutrino, for example, feels like a fleece. But the Sea to Summit Reactor liners, which is made fully from polyester, feels more like a base layer.

Fleece-like liners are much warmer and they’re also less able to wick sweat, but may pick up less odour. A fleece liner is best if your sleeping bag needs a significant boost in warmth.

If you don’t need a massive warmth boost, but would still like a little extra (plus all of the other benefits of a liner), then a base layer-style liner would be best.

These are a lot more stretchy than cotton or silk liners, so they’re comfortable to sit up in. You can even walk around in the Sea to Summit Reactor liner.

In general, polyester might not feel as comfortable as silk or cotton when it’s hot, but polyester liners tend to dry faster – especially thinner ones. They’re also more durable than a silk liner, which can tear more easily.

Overall, a polyester liner is a good choice for backpacking trips where you need a little extra warmth than a silk liner.

Are sleeping bag liners a good idea?

In almost all cases, sleeping bag liners are an excellent idea – no matter what kind of trip you’re going on.

On a basic level, a sleeping bag without a liner is a bit like a duvet without any bedsheets. Liners protect your sleeping bag from moisture and dirt, helping it to live longer. Unless you’re going ultralight and aren’t fussed about the lifespan of your sleeping bag, it’s best to bring along a liner.

Having said that, it’s a bad idea to depend solely on a liner to keep you warm on a cold night. And if you’re camping during winter, it might be best to buy a warm sleeping bag rather than adding a warm liner to your not-so-warm sleeping bag.

But even if you do have a really warm sleeping bag, you’d still be grateful for a lightweight silk liner to protect it against your dirt and sweat.

Beyond its benefit to your sleeping bag, a liner will help you to feel snug when you’re camping, if you choose the right one. As an experienced camper, I would never go camping without my silk liner – my sleeping bag wouldn’t be the same without it.

How much warmer does a liner make your sleeping bag?

The amount of warmth a liner adds to your sleeping bag depends on both the liner and your sleeping bag.

A fleece liner, like the Rab Thermic Neutrino, will add the most warmth to your sleeping bag. It’s like sleeping wrapped up in a lightweight fleece.

On the other hand, synthetic liners like the Sea to Summit Reactor are like being wrapped in a base layer.

Sea to Summit claims that its liner will “increase 3-season sleeping bag's temperature rating by up to 6%”, while Therm-a-Rest says it’ll “contribute 3C of warmth to your sleeping system”.

Although you should take these claims with a pinch of salt, we do find synthetic liners to be pretty effective at keeping you warm.

Silk liners won’t make your sleeping bag much warmer, but they’ll add to its overall comfort and longevity.

However, in all of this discussion, the amount of warmth a liner adds also depends on your sleeping bag itself. The warmer your sleeping bag, the less you’ll notice its effect.

This is because most sleeping bags are far more insulating than any liner. So, the warmer your sleeping bag is, the smaller the insulation boost your liner provides relative to it.

For more advice, read our article on how to pack for ultralight backpacking.

About the author

Digital writer Evie Nichols loves nothing more than wild camping in high and remote places. Her trusted silk liner has accompanied her on pretty much every camping trip she's ever been on, from the Cambodian jungle to the Atlas mountains. You can follow her adventures on Instagram @eviejnichols.

You might be surprised to hear that three-person tents are rarely used to accommodate three people. They're normally used by two people who want more internal space than what a backpacking tent can offer.

The first thing to do is to decide whether you need a tent for a campsite or for wild camping. If it's the latter, you might want to check out our best wild camping tents or best two-person tents.

Car camping tents can be bigger, heavier, and more spacious. Hiking tents, like the Alpkit Jaran 3, need to be lighter and more compact. But within hiking tents, you need to decide if you want to prioritise toughness and weatherproofing over low weight and space.

As you can see, there's a lot to think about when you're trying to find the ideal three-person tent. To help you along, we've tested and recommended the best three-person tents for hiking and camping. Further down, you can also find buying and tent care advice.

For a wider range of tents, including both family tents and backpacking tents, check out our ultimate guide to the best camping tents.

Jump to: How we tested | Best three-person tents reviews | Comparison table | Buying guide

What are the best three-person tents of 2026?

Best three-person tent overall: Jack Wolfskin Eclipse III

Best value three person tent: Alpkit Jarran 3

Best lightweight three-person tent: NEMO Dagger OSMO 3P

Editor's note: This article was last updated in June 2026, when we checked all options are still in stock and added a new option.

How we tested the best three-person tents

We like to think of ourselves as tent experts. For the last three decades, we've been using and testing everything from bivvies and hammocks to large family tents on our hiking and camping adventures.

When going as a pair, we often use three-person tents because they offer a bit of extra living space compared to two-person models, which is always welcome, but seldom occupy more space.

Most of the tents recommended here were tested by Chris Williams (pictured above) in the Lake District with his partner. Chris is from New Zealand and has a wealth of hiking and trekking experience in some of the world's most remote landscapes.

Best three-person tents reviewed:

Comparison table

What to look for in a three-person tent

Space

With hiking tents, tough and highly weatherproof designs don't offer the best internal space. Lightweight, less weatherproof models with skeletal pole structures have excellent internal space. Tunnel-shaped tents tend to rule supreme in terms of space-to-weight ratios, though.

Weight and packed size

This is key for hikers and part of the reason three-person tents are very popular. They can give that bit of extra room without adding too much weight or girth to the packed size compared to a two-person tent.

Consider your rucksack size and volume, and be sure to check dimensions of a tent's packed size before committing to it.

Features

Things such as the number of doors and size of vestibules are important because they heavily influence a tent's liveability. Two opposing doors makes entering and exiting for multiple people much easier, while multiple or generous vestibules help cater for gear and make things more comfortable when the weather sucks.

Are there gear pockets? How many pegs come with it? Do the zips have storm flaps? Think about your intentions for the tent and consider whether it has the right features for the job.

What's the best tent shape?

Dome tents and geodesic tents are the most stable shapes and best for dealing with stroppy weather. Tripod and backpacking shapes are lighter than dome and geodesic tents but aren't so weather resistant. Though, weatherproofing is usually still very good.

Tunnel tents are popular for hiking and camping alike. They can be compact and lightweight or large and commodious, depending on the design. They aren't as good in a storm as dome or geodesic tents, but they are usually still pretty good.

For car camping, you could also consider inflatable tents, as long as you have a car that's big enough – they tend to be bulkier when packed away.

What materials are best for a tent?

Most tents these days use nylon or polyester. Nylon is lightweight and strong, and polyester is quite hydrophobic. Both are reasonably inexpensive. Some larger camping tents may use cotton, polycotton, or canvas because these materials have good temperature regulation, are quieter, and are very durable.

Though, like leather boots, tents using these materials usually need breaking in to weatherproof the fabric. They're also much heavier than the synthetic fabrics.

What size tent is best for 3 people?

For three people, a 3-person tent is generally the minimum size you’ll want, but many campers prefer a 4-person tent for added comfort and space.

A 3-person tent will fit three sleeping pads side by side, making it a practical choice for backpacking or situations where keeping weight and packed size down is a priority. However, it can feel snug, with limited room for gear inside the tent.

What are the best quality tent brands?

The best tent brand for you will depend on your needs. For backpacking, highly regarded brands like MSR, Big Agnes, and Nemo Equipment are known for their quality and innovative features – although they often come with a higher price tag.

If you’re looking for good quality at a more affordable price, Vango, Alpkit, and Wild Country tend to offer reliable mid-range options. For car camping, we’ve reviewed excellent tents from the likes of Robens, Quechua and Outwell, Nordisk, Vango and OLPRO.

How to clean your tent

All of the three-person tents we have recommended are durable and last many moons, but only if you take care of them as you ought to. This includes cleaning and proofing the fabric, plus making sure the tent is completely dry before storing it.

Tents that are still damp when packed away and stored are the ones that don't last long. Mould quickly sets in, and the fabric gets wrecked. We know that you can't clean and dry your tent while you're away on a hike, and that's all the more reason why it's crucial you do so when you get back home.

For cleaning synthetic, cotton, polycotton, and canvas tents, we recommend Grangers' Tent + Gear Care Kit or Nikwax Tent and Gear SolarWash. Both of these are effective water-based cleaners that clean and also revitalise fabric breathability.

About the author

Chris Williams is LFTO's former Senior Writer, and a gear geek for all things hiking and trekking. Chris likes to spend as little time behind a desk as possible, testing the latest outdoor gear and finding the best options for his fellow hikers and trail runners.

Ultrarunner James Gibson has set new records on double loops of three of the UK's most celebrated mountain rounds – all within the space of six months.

When you break it down it's almost absurd. The Bob Graham Round, Paddy Buckley Round and Charlie Ramsay Round are legendary sub-24-hour mountain running challenges. Each is considered a lifetime achievement – runners train for years just to complete a single loop of any one of them.

James didn't just do all three, he doubled each one. So instead of spending 24 hours on the hills, the Inov8 sponsored athlete was out there for 43, 51, 47 hours at a stretch. And then – the record bit. He was moving fast enough to set the best known time for all three double loops. All within six months!

Everest six times over

James, 34, who lives near Coniston and is a running coach and outdoor instructor, began in December. He completed a double loop of the Bob Graham Round in England's Lake District – covering 212km (132 miles) and 84 peaks in just under 43 hours. His route took in Scafell Pike, England's highest summit, twice over.

Three months later, James tackled the mountains of Snowdonia in Wales. His double Paddy Buckley Round covered 196km (122 miles) and 94 peaks, including two ascents of Snowdon, finishing in just under 51 hours.

The trilogy was completed earlier this month when he finished the double Charlie Ramsay Round in the Scottish Highlands. The 187km (116-mile) course took in two ascents of Ben Nevis. He completed it with just ten minutes to spare inside the 48-hour mark he had set himself as a target.

Add up the total ascent across all three he climbed a total of 50,000m – roughly the equivalent of scaling Everest six times.

“The climbs were savage… But that’s what I enjoyed most”

Speaking after his final finish line in Glen Nevis, James said he was "absolutely stoked" to have completed all three doubles with a record on each. He described the conditions on the Scottish and Welsh rounds as gruelling. "The climbs were savage, especially on the Double Ramsay," he said, "but that's what I also enjoyed most."

The feat, which James has dubbed the "Double Trilogy", has only ever been completed by one other runner. Nicky Spinks, widely regarded as a giant of British mountain running, achieved it between 2016 and 2018. James has now done it faster, and compressed what took Nicky two years into six-months.

James was accompanied throughout each attempt by a team of pacers, friends and family, many of whom were on hand to see him cross the finish line on Monday morning.

Inov8 said James had "pushed himself to the limit" across all three challenges and described him as having achieved his dream. The brand also hinted that, knowing James, a period of rest may not last long.

Swapping a small hiking daypack in place of a bigger rucksack is liberating. Capacious enough for snacks, spare layers and essentials only, you feel so speedy and agile wearing a smaller daypack, as opposed to larger hiking rucksacks.

But a smaller pack doesn't always equal happiness, especially if it's uncomfortable or frustrating to use. So rather than let a bad pack ruin an otherwise perfect summer hill day, we’ve picked out the best hiking daypacks that we've physically and extensively tested over the last year.

Designed to carry around 15-30 litres of kit, these packs ought to be ample capacity for a full dawn-to-dusk adventure (though you may need to go larger for winter adventures). If, however, you're in need of a multi-day pack, check out our favourite backpacking rucksacks.

When picking a daypack, your focus should be on carrying comfort, walker-friendly features and ample ventilation to stop you getting hot and sweaty – even when the mercury soars.

Jump to: How we tested | Best hiking daypack reviews | Comparison table | Buying guide

Shortlist: Best hiking daypacks at a glance

Best hiking daypack overall: Osprey Talon 22

Best budget buy: Quechua MH500 Ventilated Hiking 25L Backpack

Best daypack for trail and town: Passenger Trailscape Recycled 30L Backpack

Editor's note: This article was updated in May 2026, when we cut several low-scoring backpacks and added three new reviews (The North Face Trail Lite, Deuter Speedlite and Vango Apex).

How we tested

All the packs recommended here have accompanied us for many hours on hillsides and mountains. The testing has been done by experienced kit testers Evie Nichols, James Forrest and Matt Jones. Between them, they have decades of experience hiking and reviewing outdoor gear.

We consider what each pack is ultimately designed for and test it against the design brief. When testing, some of the key features and attributes we analyse are listed below.

Comfort and performance: How comfortable is the back harness? Does it allow adequate ventilation? Does it offer enough support for the weight you'll be carrying? Does it feel secure and stable?

Features: Are there attachment points for walking poles or ice axes (if you intend to use them). How good is the organisation? Is it easy to stash layers like a waterproof jacket or quickly grab an essential like a head torch?

Construction and capacity: Is there enough space for everything you'd need on a day hike? Are the materials robust and do they offer any weather resistance (most hiking backpacks only offer light protection, so check out our list of the best waterproof backpacks for more)?

Value for money: Is it overpriced when considering how well the backpack performs? Or is the high price tag justified because it's genuinely a brilliant product?

To find out how we review products, check out how we test gear.

Best hiking daypacks reviewed:

Comparison table

What to look for in a hiking daypack

What volume/capacity do I need for a daypack?

A daypack for summer can be smaller than a pack for winter hiking. This is simply because you don't have to carry such bulky clothing and items like crampons. Basically, in summer, go as small as you can while still being able to carry the essentials.

Are hiking daypacks different sizes?

Some, but not all, hiking daypacks come in different sizes. Some have adjustable back lengths and some are one size only. Irrespective of whether a daypack has various sizes or is adjustable or not, it’s vital to pick a daypack with a size appropriate for your back length, which is easy to measure at home. Alternatively, outdoor gear retailers can usually assist you.

Once you know your back length, trying on a loaded pack is the easiest way to do find out which packs are most comfortable for you.

What are the different back systems?

Broadly speaking, there are two types back panel types. Back panels made from perforated foam or padding carry the load directly next to the body. This approach is comfy and stable, with a close-to-the-body feel.

Suspended mesh back panels, conversely, hold the pack’s bulk away from your back, which some hikers prefer because this type offers much better ventilation, but can feel like the load is levering away from you. It’s all down to personal preference.

Does my daypack need a frame?

The frame provides rigidity and stability, and is more beneficial for carrying heavier loads. With lighter loads for summer day hikes, the importance of a strong, load-bearing back system isn't so crucial.

Ultralight packs may be completely frameless, but other daypacks have an internal frame made from spring steel or aluminium. To save weight, others use a high-density plastic framesheet or a stiffened foam back panel.

What pocket arrangement is best?

Zippered hipbelt pockets are handy for stashing small items you’ll need on-the-go. Internal zippered pockets are great for car keys or a wallet; some type of additional stash pocket at the front (either elasticated or zipped) is useful for quickly stowing and accessing extra layers; and elasticated side pockets are perfect for water bottles.

Increasingly, daypacks also feature large pockets made from stretchy mesh and a pocket (or sleeve) for a hydration bladder, as well as an outlet for the drinking hose. External compression straps, webbing loops, toggles and bungee cords can be used for attaching items such as trekking poles and camping gear to the outside of your pack

What is a lid?

The lid covers the main opening. Some are fixed to the pack, while others are detachable with a ‘floating’ design. A current trend is towards lidless packs.

What about weatherproofing?

Many hiking backpacks have a water-repellent coating on the fabric, so they can withstand some moisture. But most aren't fully waterproof.

A raincover is a good solution to this, and many hiking packs come with one. It's also wise to stash your gear in dry bags, too.

Most backpacks aren't waterproof, because the fabric they would need sacrifices important characterisitcs for hiking such as breathability and weight. But waterproof backpacks are becoming increasingly popular and widely available.

How do I clean and repair a hiking daypack?

Packs are the most repairable piece of hiking equipment. If you’ve got a tear, broken a strap, or stuffed zip, it can be repaired. Quite a lot of brands offer repair services, and many outdoor retailers do too. Make use of them.

To maintain the performance of the fabrics used to make hiking packs, it’s important to clean them properly. It’s very simple and primarily involves spot cleaning using the correct cleaning solution – we recommend either Grangers or Nikwax tent and gear cleaning kits.

These are both effective, eco-friendly cleaning products specifically for the types of fabrics used on outdoor gear. You can use both these cleaning kits for all your outdoor equipment including tents.

About the author

James Forrest is a prolific peak bagger and long-distance walker who’s one of the most high-profile outdoor writers in the UK. He's based on the edge of the Lake District, so when he isn’t off on his latest crazy adventure or challenge, he’s walking in his local fells.

Matt Jones is the former editor of Walk magazine and Scouting magazine, and has years of experience testing kit and writing about the outdoors.

To really understand the benefits of a good hiking pole, you need to walk many miles with it over multiple days. So that's exactly what we did to choose the winner of LFTO's 2026 Gear Award.

After months of testing, the Black Diamond Trail Vista FLZ stood out from competitors for packability and reliability – a rock-solid option you can leave blissfully in your pack until you need it, and a hiking pole that feels like it would never let you down.

When LFTO's reviewers pick something as the top piece of kit in its category, that's a recommendation you can really trust. Because unlike other awards you may see dished out for outdoor gear, nobody can buy their way into our list of winners.

Every product tested in every category is there by merit, chosen by industry-leading experts after months of intense testing in the environment and terrain it was built for.

Read on for the full story of why this packable, well-designed piece of kit has been named LFTO's 2026 hiking pole of the year...

Why the Trail Vista FLZ is our hiking pole of the year

I’ve used hiking poles on pretty much every big walk I’ve done since 2018 – which includes the Pennine Way, Cape Wrath Trail, Cambrian Way (twice), West Highland Way and the Great Glen Way, amongst various others.

That’s several hundred miles of hiking. So, I’m a big fan of poles in general, but in that time, I’ve definitely come to regard some hiking poles as “faff poles” – the kind that’s mostly fine when you’re actually using them, but an irritation the rest of the time.

Brilliantly packable, solid when it counts, and thoughtfully designed.

Some are too long to slide inside a pack or even into a side pocket. Others rattle around when they’re folded up. Others are too stiff to collapse easily or have locks that seize up when they get wet or cold. The Black Diamond Trail Vista FLZ is the anti-faff pole. Hats off to whoever designed it.

Their best quality is their extremely compact folded length. At 36.5cm, these collapse as small as anything else on the market – short enough to disappear into a hiking daypack, slot cleanly into a rucksack side pocket, or tuck under an armpit and attach to a shoulder strap for short sections where you don’t need them out but don’t want to pack them away properly.

Packable and stowable

I've used them lots on the trail, stowing and deploying multiple times as the terrain demanded. The basket clip system – an integrated mechanism that holds the folded sections neatly together rather than letting them dangle about – makes the whole process much tidier. It sounds like a small thing, but it isn’t.

The hybrid Z-fold design is what makes this packability possible, but Black Diamond have solved the usual limitation that comes with Z-fold poles – fixed length – with an upper flick-lock lever that gives you 15cm of adjustment. In practice, I used this a lot, as I tend to lengthen my poles slightly for steep descents, shortening them on the uphill.

The flick-lock clamps securely and doesn’t slip – even under my full weight with a loaded backpacking pack, there wasn’t any discernible wobble or slippage. It’s far superior to older twist-lock mechanisms, which tend to seize up or gradually loosen over time.

Comfortable grip

The grips also deserve particular mention. Black Diamond have used a sculpted combination of cork inlays and rubber – cork where your palm sits, for moisture absorption and a satisfying tactile quality; rubber for structure and durability. The oversized top pommel gives excellent control on downhills without digging into your palms.

After several days’ backpacking covering 15-20 miles each day, my hands felt fine, which is the only grip review that matters. If I were nitpicking, the lower foam grip extension – for choking down on steep ascents – could be a touch longer, and if you have particularly large hands, the flick-lock mechanism sits slightly in the way when using them. Minor points, both.

Reassuringly heavy

The only justifiable niggle is their weight. At 261g per pole – 522g for the pair – the Trail Vista FLZ is on the heavier side for modern aluminium poles. Several lighter aluminium alternatives exist, while various carbon options are lighter still. If you’re a gram-counter on a multi-day fastpack, that’s a potential consideration.

But in general, weight is the price you pay for robustness – these feel like the sort of poles you buy once and use for a decade. The recycled 7075 aircraft-grade aluminium construction doesn’t feel like a compromise anywhere.

Who should buy the Trail Vista FLZ?

Priced at £130 (or less when it's on sale), the Trail Vista FLZ sits in a sensible position: meaningfully better-featured than budget poles at less than half the price, and still cheaper than premium rivals like Leki or Komperdell. Two sets of baskets included as standard – standard trekking and snow – adds genuine value. You get a two-year warranty thrown in as well.

If you're a serious hiker who's planning to take on big distances or big ascents this year, you can't go wrong with these poles. They aren't cheap, but for the features and performance you get, they represent good value. Read Matt's full Black Diamond Trail Vista FLZ review for more.

Verdict

Bottom line? Sometimes the best poles aren’t always the ones with the most impressive spec sheet. They’re the ones that stop being something you think about and become something you simply rely on. For me, the Trail Vista FLZ earned that status very quickly. Brilliantly packable, solid when it counts, and thoughtfully designed.

About the author

Matt Jones has been one of LFTO's chief testers for the last six years and is one of the most respected reviewers of outdoor gear in the UK. He lives and works in the mountains of North Wales and has used the Black Diamond Trail Vista FLZ poles on multi-terrain days in his local mountains and beyond, mostly for hillwalking and backpacking in mixed conditions.

As a habitual trail snail, over the years I've carried a lot of packs over a lot of miles. And like most backpackers, the more long-distance trails you walk, the more obsessed you tend to get with cutting weight and going ultralight. But as I get older, I think I might be starting to come full circle on the whole ‘light is always right’ principle.

Having hit 40 last year, I increasingly find myself embracing a bit more comfort over spartan gram-counting. After all, I go backpacking to enjoy myself, not to smash records. It’s supposed to be a holiday – so why make it feel like punishment?

Arguably, the Gregory Baltoro 65 is the bit of kit that has played the biggest part in this shift in mindset. It’s really comfortable. In fact, it might even be the most comfortable backpacking pack I’ve ever carried in the hills, which is a big part of why it features in the LFTO Gear Awards 2026.

Why the Gregory Baltoro 65 is our backpacking pack of the year

That incredible comfort is largely down to the FreeFloat A3 suspension system – a reworked harness that combines ample padding with plenty of flex. Load transfer onto the hips is outstanding, aided by the perimeter steel frame and anti-barrelling cross-stay that has always been the Baltoro's structural backbone.

Gregory quotes a maximum load capacity of 27.2kg, or 60lbs. While I’d never want to be hefting that much gear, I've pushed it pretty hard and it hasn't struggled.

The shoulder straps and hip belt are plush, well-padded and fully adjustable. The pack comes in three torso sizes (S, M or L) but all three variants have additional length adjustment and extending hip fins to help you dial in the individual fit.

Of course, the acid test is how it feels after eight hours schlepping up and down mountains with a full load – but I was impressed. My hips and shoulders felt surprisingly good.

The other side of the comfort equation is the back ventilation. The Baltoro uses an AirCushion back panel, which is double-layer mesh with a 3D structure that's apparently over 90% open-air.

It doesn’t deliver quite the same air gap as a fully suspended design, but on the other hand, it feels a lot more stable. It’s nowhere near as wobbly or bouncy as trampoline-style back systems on tricky ground, which can sometimes feel like they’re levering away from you. On sweaty-but-technical trails like the GR20, I reckon this would be a big bonus. In North Wales in October, less so – but luckily the Baltoro handles both.

Then there’s the feature count, which is frankly extraordinary. The SideWinder bottle holster – a pop-out sleeve for reach-around water bottle access that tucks away when not needed – is one detail that I’ve come to miss whenever I'm not using this pack. U-Zip front access to the main compartment means you can unpack next to your tent, suitcase style, without having to rummage from the top.

The ComfortGrip lumbar pad stops your base layer riding up under the hipbelt. The hipbelt pockets are just about the biggest of any pack I’ve tested. The lid has not just one or even two but three separate zip pockets, and you also get dual front zippered stash pockets, as well as a stretch mesh front shove pocket. There is no excuse not to stay organised on the trail.

Inevitably, all the bells and whistles mean this is not a light pack, at 2.13-2.38kg before you've put anything in it. If you're a gram-counter, the Baltoro is not your pack.

Nor is it cheap. At £300 (or a slightly cheaper sale price), it sits alongside the Osprey Atmos AG 65 at the premium end of the market. The Osprey has better back airflow and slightly lower weight; the Baltoro counters with greater load stability, a less rigid harness and a feature set that I think edges ahead on almost every practical measure.

The women's version – the Deva 60 – shares the same suspension and feature set in a women's-specific fit. Fellow LFTO gear tester Evie had one on a recent test trip and was as effusive as I was about the design.

Who should buy the Gregory Baltoro 65?

Bottom line? For anyone planning an extended trekking trip abroad, a classic long-distance trail in the UK, or who just likes the idea of finishing a multi-day hike smiling rather than suffering, the Baltoro 65 is a brilliant pack that I really can’t fault for carrying comfort.

Verdict

Maybe the most comfortable heavy-load carrier on the market – refined, feature-packed and built for serious miles.

Find more top-rated options in our list of the best backpacking backpacks.

About the author

Matt Jones has been one of LFTO's chief testers for the last six years and is one of the most respected reviewers of outdoor gear in the UK. He lives and works in the mountains of North Wales and has used the Gregory Baltoro 65 on extended multi-day backpacking, including warm weather and UK routes with heavy loads.

If you’re seeking home comforts at the campsite, it’s a case of choosing between a self-inflating mat and an airbed. Many campers prefer the soft, foaminess (yes, it’s a word) of a self-inflating mat over the firm, unyielding feel of an airbed. Airbeds can take much more effort to inflate, too.

However, some people prefer the raised, bed-like qualities of a king-sized airbed, bringing serious glamping vibes to the family camp. If you can find a comfortable airbed that inflates itself, surely you’d be on to a winner? Enter the Infinity Airbed from Hi Gear, a sleeping platform that does all the above as it aims to be one of the best camping mattresses around.

Perhaps the most notable thing about the Infinity is that it comes with an integrated mains power pump, so all you have to do is plug it in and watch it self-inflate. In fact, you don’t even have to watch it. It takes around four minutes to transform from a flat sheet of fabric to a king-sized, 46cm-deep bed. You can also pump it up in a more traditional way but I’d say it’s well worth getting electric hook up at the campsite if you’re using it to glam up your camp.

You can then keep it plugged in for your whole camping trip so the internal sensors can monitor the internal air pressure and the dual pump can quietly maintain it. The result? There’s no waking up in the night shivering to find your sleeping platform has sadly collapsed due to inflation.

It’s massive too, measuring 203x153cm. Admittedly, this is too big for bedrooms in many of the best family tents. This is a bed for campers who do away with removable partitions and revel in creating a spacious bedroom for themselves. Take Hi Gear’s own Zenobia 8 Eclipse tent for example: you could easily fit an Infinity Airbed in one end by opting for a large bedroom rather than two smaller ones. In short, it’s a good choice for couples on an extended getaway

This is Hi Gear’s most expensive airbed, with an RRP of £140 on Go Outdoors. Members pay substantially less (£90) and it’d be foolhardy to pay full price, particularly when it’s also available for under a hundred quid in places like Millets and Blacks. This price compares favourably with the cost of a self-inflating mat, though other airbeds are much cheaper ­– but then, the Infinity is admittedly very comfortable and all the others don’t magically inflate by themselves.

Comfort

We’ve all slept on airbeds during our time, either while camping or at someone's house during a mass gathering where all the normal beds have been taken.

An airbed’s obviously not as comfortable as a beautifully engineered home mattress. Plus, when it comes to nights under canvas, many prefer the softer sensation of lying on a self-inflating mat to the bouncy, slipperiness of a fully inflated airbed. I, for one, am in that camp.

However, I’d say that the Infinity is right up there as one of the comfiest and most supportive airbeds I’ve slept on. The sleeping surface doesn’t have that plasticky feel that many suffer from and it feels soft against the skin. It’s also flocked, giving it a slightly velvety feel – which obviously isn’t for everyone (my wife has a particular aversion to velvet, so it’s not the bed for her). Nevertheless, this fuzzy texture means that I didn’t slip around in the night as happens with some airbeds.

It’s also nice that there was no chance of waking up to find the bed has deflated. All I had to do was keep the bed plugged in at the mains. While it was plugged in, I also had the option of using the integrated USB port to charge devices. This feature is particularly useful when camping, as I was able to save my power bank's battery and prioritise it for adventures during the day.

Materials, shape and size

As mentioned, the Infinity is a large airbed with high sides and has the capacity to take up to 300kg. It’s crafted from robust, hard-wearing PVC to guard against abrasion – after all, a puncture in an airbed is a disaster. The edges around the sleeping surface are raised slightly, providing a cradling effect, while the main texture is slightly wavy.

The main surface boasts anti-microbial qualities, so should stay fresh even if you skip a shower after a particularly long day in the fells. It’s treated with biocide zinc pyrithione and thiabendazole (try saying that after a few beers), which helps prevent degradation caused by microbial growth. This not only keeps odours at bay but extends the lifespan of the product.

Inflation and deflation

It doesn’t matter whether you’re getting set after arriving at the campsite or you’re busily readying the house for a swathe of guests, stuff that happens quickly and conveniently is always welcome. At the campsite, the Infinity is dead easy to inflate provided you’ve arranged electrical hook up. Simply plug it into the mains, turn the dial and sit back. After around four minutes the air bed will have fully taken shape.

If you have no access to a power source, don’t despair, you can pump the airbed up too with a battery powered or manual pump. I did the latter with a standard air tent pump and it involved a workout akin to 10 minutes on a rowing machine, which was the last thing I needed when I’d already spent the preceding half-an-hour putting up the family tent. The lesson here are either bring a battery powered pump or speak to those nice people at the campsite’s reception about mains power.

Deflation requires much less effort than it does with a foam-filled self-inflating mattress. Simply pull the plug and let the air spill forth, before folding the bed away and popping it in its little carry bag.

Warmth and R-value

The R-value is a measure of a sleeping mat’s thermal resistance, how well it resists your body heat escaping to the cold ground beneath your tent. Backpacking pads and self-inflating mats tend to advertise their R-values, though airbeds usually don’t and there’s no stated R-value on Hi Gear’s website.

However, given that the bed holds you 46cm off the ground, it’s fair to say that the Infinity insulates reasonably well. This, coupled with the fact that its air pressure is maintained when plugged in during the night, meant that it kept me nice and toasty during my springtime slumbers. When it’s not connected to the power, it naturally requires the occasional top up, particularly during longer trips.

Weight and packed size

Airbeds are generally much heavier than self-inflating mats and the Infinity is no exception, weighing in at a not inconsiderable 10.35kg. Is this an issue? No one in their right mind would seek to haul an airbed anywhere remotely… remote, so perhaps weight isn’t a huge issue where camping families who arrive at a campsite by car are concerned.

This is especially true when the airbed in question folds down into a relatively small package. Packed away, the Infinity measures 35x21x40cm, much smaller than most self-inflating mattresses by virtue of the fact that there’s no foam to cram in. This makes it easy to slot into a gap in the car boot on the way to the campsite and it takes up very little storage space at home too.

It packs away into a fairly rudimentary bag with drawstring closure and shoulder strap. I’d say the easiest way to carry it is by hugging it into your chest with two hands, as 10kg on an unpadded shoulder strap can be a bit uncomfortable.

Verdict

As airbeds go, this is a very comfortable and convenient option for those looking to replicate the feel of a bed on their camping holidays. Provided you have a power source, it pumps itself up in no time and provides a well-insulated sleeping platform for use both under canvas and at home when hosting.

It’s also well-priced when compared to the self-inflated mattresses doing the rounds, though personally I’d still lean towards the mattress option for camping trips from a comfort point of view.

Want a new tent, too? Go and look at our pick of the best inflatable tents.

About the author

As a qualified Mountain Leader, avid wild camper and a family man, Alex enjoys camping in all its forms. An expert on all things outdoor gear, he’s been testing and reviewing backpacking can car camping kit for many years.

Picking one head torch as a winner in our 2026 Gear Awards involved mountain camps, early alpine starts, evening trail runs and dozens of products, but eventually one stood out above the rest.

The BioLite Range 300 won me over thanks to its lightweight design, all-day comfort and fuss-free performance – and quickly earned a permanent place in the lid of my rucksack.

And when LFTO's reviewers pick something as the standout piece of kit in its category, that's a recommendation you can really trust. Because unlike other awards you may see dished out for outdoor gear, nobody can buy their way into our list of winners.

Every product tested in every category is there by merit, chosen by industry-leading experts after months of intense testing in the environment and terrain it was built for.

Read on for the full story of why this excellent, affordable head torch fully deserves its accolade as LFTO's 2026 Head Torch of Year...

Why the Biolite Range 300 is our head torch of the year

Some gear earns its place not by being dramatic about it, but by quietly doing everything right, without fuss. The BioLite Range 300 is that kind of head torch.

I've worn a lot of head torches over the years – heavy ones that slid down my forehead, bouncy ones that drove me mad on the descent, fiddly ones with complicated button-presses and 17 brightness modes I never used – but the Range 300 is one you put on and then immediately forget it’s there. At 51g, it's genuinely lightweight.

Fifty-one grams. Forget it's there. That's the whole review, really.

BioLite’s USP when it comes to headlamps is their fully integrated design. Rather than attaching a lamp unit onto a stretchy bit of elastic with a flimsy plastic bracket, BioLite builds the LED unit directly into the band itself – flush, low-profile, no protruding battery pack on the rear, no pressure points digging into your forehead.

Comfortable and easy to use

The headband is soft, wide and breathable, and it stays exactly where you put it. No bounce. No rotating slowly round to illuminate your left ear. Just steady, consistent light, pointing exactly where you're looking.

It also has an IP (ingress protection) rating of IP67, which means it's completely dustproof and waterproof – as in, it’ll survive a complete dunking, not just the odd splash. For wild camping, early morning starts or evening trudges back to the car in all weathers, that robustness and reliability is a win.

Single-button operation is another small but significant bonus. One big button, sensibly mounted on top of the unit – press to turn on at full 300-lumen brightness, hold to dim steplessly down to a battery-saving 3 lumens.

Light memory and fast charging

Light memory means it returns to your chosen setting next time you switch on, which stops you from blinding your tentmate if you’re awake at 3am. A double press gives you a strobe for emergencies (or extra visibility to speeding Audis if you’re forced to do a stretch of road walking).

Hold for eight seconds and you get a lock function that stops it activating in your pack and killing the battery. That's basically everything you need, and nothing you don't.

The fast-charging capability is another feature that's saved me more than once. Eight minutes on a USB-C cable gives you a full hour of high-power light – which, if you're running on a portable power bank in the middle of a multi-day trip, is very convenient. No more rationing light or battery level anxiety.

Charge it off your power bank for the length of a rest stop and carry on. Full burn time at maximum power is 3.5 hours, which is decent, not amazing – but then this isn't a torch designed for all-night navigation exercises, and it doesn't pretend to be.

Two more honest caveats. The beam optics aren't class-leading – a single white LED means the throw and spread are slightly behind rivals in terms of raw performance. And there's no red-light mode, which is a shame. Neither is a dealbreaker for the use cases this torch excels at – wild camping, hillwalking, shorter runs – but they're worth knowing.

However, at £42.99 RRP, the Range 300 is priced at a level where there's no real reason not to own one. It slightly undercuts similarly featherweight rivals like the Black Diamond Deploy 325 and the Nitecore NU25 UL, while matching or bettering them on wearing comfort and charging speed.

Who should buy the BioLite Range 300

For weight-conscious backpackers, fastpackers and anyone who wants a supremely comfortable torch for fast-and-light adventures – or the best backup light money can buy – it's a straightforward recommendation. If you still need convincing, click here to read Matt's full review.

Verdict

One of the lightest, most comfortable head torches I've worn – and the one that now lives in the lid of my rucksack. Fifty-one grams. Forget it's there. That's the whole review, really.

About the author

Matt Jones has been one of LFTO's chief testers for the last six years and is one of the most respected reviewers of outdoor gear in the UK. He lives and works in the mountains of North Wales and has used the BioLite Range 300 on everything from wild camps to early starts and late finishes on hiking trips.

Many runners who train at night face have a system that works for them. But I often find that my running vest is the weakest link: I can take pains to wear hi-vis and wearable lights, but my (non-reflective) running vest undoes that work.

The Silva Strive Fly Reflective is designed to solve this. It has reflective panels integrated into the design, so visibility and storage come as one package rather than two layers fighting each other.

But it won't suit every runner. There's a specific runner this vest is made for: someone who runs at night, who doesn’t get on with waist packs or need much storage. The 3L capacity is deliberately minimal; it's not the right choice if you need to carry much beyond the basics.

I put it through its paces on runs of up to half marathon distance on local trails, including several sessions in the dark. Here's what I found.

Comfort and fit

The Silva Strive Fly Reflective is billed as a 'barely-there' vest, made with ripstop nylon and breathable mesh. It lives up to this promise: once it's on and adjusted correctly, it's easy to forget about.

The fit is where this vest stands out from most competitors. Three chest attachment points rather than the standard two give you more control over how snugly it sits, and I found I could dial in a bounce-free fit that didn't shift on descents.

That said, sizing is worth thinking about carefully before you order. I normally wear a women’s small and found a size S ran large. The unisex sizing is a slight concern; it's certainly worth checking the size chart and sizing down if you're in any doubt.

One caveat on the fit: load it with two full 500ml soft flasks and it starts to feel less balanced. It handles one flask comfortably, or two half-full ones, but two full flasks pushes the vest beyond what its slim profile can handle.

Storage and ease of access

The 3L storage capacity puts this in the same ballpark as a large waist pack. Whether this is a better option come down to personal preference – do you prefer to have weight around your waist or your chest?

What I will say is that water access is more intuitive here than on most waist packs. The two front flask pockets with adjustable straps keep bottles secure and accessible; there’s no need to reach around or remove the vest, as you would with a waist pack.

The side pockets have dual openings from both the front and side, which is useful for gels, snacks or gloves, though space is limited so you won't be fitting much beyond the basics.

The zipped front pocket fits a Google Pixel 8a phone comfortably with room to spare, and there's a key hook, a small but useful detail.

Features

For runners who use poles, the attachment straps are compatible with the Strive Quiver add-on. I haven't tested this, nor have I tested this vest with poles, so can't speak to its performance in this regard.

The reflective detailing works well in the dark, with triangular panels that catch headlights and street lighting effectively. But it won't make you as visible as a fully reflective option like the Proviz360, which uses 100% reflective fabric.

Price and competition

At £65 the Silva Strive Fly Reflective is reasonably priced for a minimalist running vest. The price reflects the quality of the design, not the volume of features.

The most direct comparison is the standard Silva Strive Fly Vest, which offers identical features at the same price but without the reflective panels. If you do most of your running in daylight, that's the version to go for.

If you prefer carrying weight around the waist rather than the shoulders, the Inov8 Race Elite Waist 3L has the same capacity for half the price. But it lacks any reflective detailing, and although there’s space for soft flasks, they’re harder to reach.

Then there’s the high-visibility alternatives. The Proviz Reflect360 is geared solely towards being seen, with LED lights included. This Ultimate Direction Marathon Vest is almost as light, with more storage. Then there’s options with reflective zones, like the Kiprun Race 5L and the OMM UltraFire 5.

Verdict

The Silva Strive Fly Reflective is a comfy and lightweight vest for a specific kind of runner. If you run at night, prefer a vest to a waist pack and don't need more than the basics in terms of storage, it has everything you need without getting in the way.

About the author

Evie Nichols is LFTO's chief female tester. She loves nothing more than being in high and remote places, and in general, she's not fussy whether that's in trail running shoes, climbing shoes, walking boots or on two wheels.

After a new half-marathon PB this year, Evie has several trail races lined up for the summer – including her first ultra. Follow her adventures on Instagram at @eviejnichols.

British brand Trail is a relative newcomer to the camping scene but its range of products is already extensive, comprising everything from tents and sleeping systems to whistling kettles and vacuum flasks. Priding itself on functional design without high prices, I’ve been lucky enough to test several Trail products over the last year or so and I’ve been reasonably impressed.

The Double Deluxe Self Inflating Air Mattress, which is also available as a single, is a self-inflating mattress – a sleeping platform that sits somewhere between a sleeping pad and an air bed (for more like it, see our pick of the best camping mattresses here).

Its weight and size mean that it’s for the campsite rather than the trails. A self-inflating mat provides more insulation and comfort than a backpacker’s pad and they don’t take a great deal of effort to inflate, unlike a standard airbed. Plus, many people find the consistent firmness and quiet sleeping experience provided by a mattress like this preferable to a wobbly, noisy airbed.

Trail is a brand that usually sells its products way below the original stated RRP. This holds true in the case of the Double Deluxe, which is listed (as of June 2026) at £129.99, down from a whopping £299.99.

I doubt many people have ever paid full price for this mattress, which wouldn’t represent particularly good value. However, at £129.99, it stacks up favourably with comparable mattresses like Coleman’s Supercomfort Double and Decathlon’s Ultim Comfort Double. Can its performance match these and others from some of the industry’s big hitters?

Comfort

Soft-brushed, stretchy polyester provides the sleeping surface, which is pleasant enough, comparable to Coleman’s Supercomfort, though it’s not in the same league as Outwell’s Dreamboat or Exped’s Megamat. The 10cm of PU insulation provides a decent amount of cushioning but the overriding quality here is firmness (though you can dampen that by letting out some air). This isn’t a bad thing: a firm platform is preferable to one with too much give.

I was able to roll around and enjoy a consistent surface that didn’t dump me off the edge if I got too close, as has happened a few times in my life while sleeping on traditional airbeds. The 3D box wall sides are to thank for both this and the fact that the surface is blessedly flat, without the horizontal ridges that mar some self-inflating mats like Berghaus’ Air Double. After all, I like ridges on my mountains but not so much on the surface I’m trying to get to sleep on.

Materials, shape and size

The Deluxe Double is a rectangular mat with curved edges that measures 200x132cm. It provides a decent sized platform for camping couples, with a maximum capacity of 220kg. It just about hits the sweet spot between being wide enough to comfortably sleep two while not being too wide for tent bedroom sizes you'll find in many of the best family tents. It’s also 10cm thick, which compares favourably to some of the competition.

A thick sleeping platform doesn’t automatically equal excellent insulation and plush comfort: it’s what’s inside that counts, an adage that’s been trumpeted by everything from Disney’s Aladdin to off-the-wall BBC series The Mighty Boosh. I quite like the Aladdin link given that a mat that self-inflates might as well be, for all intents (no pun intended) and purposes, a magic carpet. I digress.

So, what exactly is inside? Cut the thing open (don’t actually do it) and you’d discover an open-cell polyurethane memory foam with air gaps. It’s this memory foam that draws air in to help the mat inflate when the valves are opened up, assuming its inflated shape.

Meanwhile, the base is made from a durable and waterproof TPU laminate layer that provides protection against abrasion and liquids. During the test period, I dragged the Deluxe Double across fields on numerous occasions and it’s still inflating as it should, while the base’s ability to repel liquids and grime means it still looks pretty much good as new.

Inflation and deflation

The Deluxe Double features a pair of triple function valves with a cover for when the mat is fully inflated or deflated. Each valve can pirouette between three positions: labelled on the side of the mat as Open Position 1, Open Position 2 and Closed Position.

Open Position 1 lets air both in and out, while Open Position 2 only lets air in and the Closed Position lets air out if placed under stress, which is slightly misleading as something that’s closed doesn’t usually let anything through but hey-ho. When inflated, it should be left in Open Position 2 with the cover screwed back on, otherwise air will escape during the night, which isn’t ideal.

The speed at which the Deluxe Double self inflates is a real strength. To do this, you simply turn the valve to Open Position 1, sit back and let the self-inflating magic happen. Eventually (somewhere in the region of after seven minutes) the physics involved reaches a state of equilibrium and the mat, while mostly inflated, then requires a bit of puff to reach the point of being firm and ready. At this point, I’d turn the valve to Open Position 2, take a deep breath and blow into the mat until it reaches the desired firmness. I found that it only took a few full breaths – very impressive.

I found that the best way to deflate was to turn the valves to Open Position 1, fold the mat in half lengthways and begin rolling it up. Once most of the air had been expelled, I then turned the valve to the slightly confusing Closed Position and squeezed out every last drop.

If all of this sounds quite fool proof, then that’s good because it should be. However, the instructions on the side of the mat feel a little bit convoluted. As mentioned, the three valve positions are clearly labelled on the mat. This is directly next to some numbered instructions on how to inflate and deflate the thing. The issue is, nowhere in these instructions, nor on the slightly more detailed instructions attached to the carry bag, are Open Position 1, Open Position 2 and Closed Position referred to – which is slightly bewildering.

Instead, the instructions refer to “the middle position” and told me to “adjust valve core so that white housing is forwards” or “adjust valve core so that white housing is inwards”. Don’t get me wrong, it didn’t take me long to figure it all out but it just seems maddening that the three required valve positions are named yet these names aren’t then used in the instructions.

Warmth and R-value

Trail doesn’t state an R-Value on its website or anywhere on the Deluxe Double’s packaging or instructions. This is a shame as I know it’s one of the first things serious campers look for in a mat’s specifications.

For those with no inkling of what I’m on about, a mat’s R-value is not a measure of its comfort, but rather a measure of how warm it’ll keep you. The R stands for resistance, specifically thermal resistance. If a sleeping mat has a high thermal resistance, it effectively shields the sleeper from the, usually cold, temperature of the ground beneath your tent. The higher the R-value, the better.

Given both that it’s 10cm thick and it boasts reasonably standard specifications and materials for a self-inflating mat, I’d estimate we’re looking at an R-value somewhere in the region of 7, which should be more than enough for year-round camping adventures. I found it insulated me perfectly well from the ground during my springtime test, providing insulation in line with other double mattresses that I’ve tested over the years.

Weight and packed size

I weighed the Trail Deluxe Double at 6.4kg, which is significantly heavier than competition like Coleman’s Supercomfort (4.1kg), Quechua’s Ultim Comfort (5.3kg) and Berghaus’ Air (4.59kg). In fairness to the Deluxe, it’s a thicker mat than the first two, though quite how it ends up almost 2kg heavier than Berghaus’ offering I’m not sure. Nonetheless, 6.4kg is hardly back breaking and it’s easy enough to haul around.

Packed down into its carry bag, it forms a long cylindrical shape measuring 68x36x34cm, about par for a mattress of its size. Once deflated, it takes a bit of a wrestle to fit it into its bag, which has a rudimentary drawstring closure at one end and a couple of loose handles to carry it around with. From afar, it looks a bit like a cheap gym bag from an American high school drama. It’s not a rigid package, so it’s not too difficult to squeeze it into a jam-packed car before a camping trip.

For something properly lightweight, view our list of the best sleeping mats, which work for both backpacking and car camping.

Verdict

There’s nothing particularly earth shattering about Trail’s Deluxe Double Self Inflating Mattress, but there’s nothing wrong with it either. It’s simply a good quality, reasonably comfortable and large sleeping mattress, ideal for camping couples or those who value a bit of space to roll around at night.

Where it wins is its comparatively low price when compared to some of the competition. For pure value, you can’t really go wrong here – as long as you're not paying full price.

About the author

As a qualified Mountain Leader, avid wild camper and a family man, Alex Foxfield enjoys camping in all its forms. An expert on all things outdoor gear, he’s been testing and reviewing backpacking and car camping kit for many years. He's one of our go-to testers for family camping kit.

The Scarpa Spin Ultra 2 is one of those shoes that arrives with a lot of expectation attached. Scarpa has been making footwear in Italy's Dolomite region since 1938, and the original Spin Ultra built a strong enough reputation that the second version had a lot to live up to.

But I've tested enough trail running shoes to know that the gap between marketing language and reality is often significant. For that reason, the Spin Ultra 2’s "Sock-Fit LW construction system" instantly made me raise my eyebrows.

I’m glad to say it’s not just marketing fluff. The Spin Ultra 2 genuinely wraps around your foot like a sock. They're also versatile – I've worn them for middle to long distance trail runs in the Peak District and Lake District, on rocky edges and scree-full descents, and they've been consistently great. That said, they won’t suit everyone.

Upper

Comfort and fit is subjective. But for me and my size 6 normal-width feet, these are one of the most comfortable trail shoes I’ve worn. That’s largely as a result of the cushioned heel and tongue; there’s no discomfort, even on 15-20km runs.

The lacing is precise and secure. My heel doesn't slip at all, which makes a big difference over the course of a long day out. And I never once felt the need to stop and re-tighten mid-run (that’s definitely not always the case).

The upper feels breathable on long uphill sections – these are my go-to for warmer runs. It's worth being clear about what it isn't, though: it's not waterproof and it's not particularly quick-drying either. The Spin Ultra 2s are at their best on dry, rocky terrain.

Midsole

This is not a road-to-trail shoe (and I know this because I tried to use it as one). My runs start from my front door, which means a kilometre of pavement before I reach the countryside, and on one occasion I actually turned back and changed shoes after a few hundred metres. The midsole is firm and trail-focused, with a 4mm drop and 28mm stack at the heel, and on tarmac it feels exactly that: built for somewhere else.

On the footpaths and rocky tracks of the Peak District, the experience is completely different. My feet felt connected to the ground – the relatively low drop encouraged a natural midfoot strike. On descents, I found myself committing in a way I wouldn't in a softer, less stable shoe. I also wore these on a backpacking trip in the Lake District and they held up well under a loaded pack, which isn't something every trail shoe can claim.

Outsole

The Vibram Megagrip outsole on the rocky gritstone edges of the Peaks is excellent. It’s the kind of terrain where you're hopping between boulders and trusting your feet on angled rock – and the Spin Ultra 2 handles it with ease. I found myself going for it more on descents than I might have in other shoes.

It's less convincing in deep mud. The lugs aren't aggressive enough to shed the stuff efficiently, and on boggy pathless ground you'd want something with a more assertive tread. But for mixed terrain, rocky paths, gravelly tracks and technical mountain ground it's very good; in both the Peaks and the Lakes it felt completely at home.

Price and competition

The Spin Ultra 2 costs between £130-£170, depending on where you shop, which puts it at the premium end of the trail shoe market. It’s not at the very top, mind you (it doesn’t cost as much as a carbon plated shoe, for example). At 234g for a UK 6, it's also light for a shoe that offers this level of cushioning and protection.

The Hoka Speedgoat 6 is an obvious comparison: similarly priced, it shares the Vibram Megagrip outsole and is well-regarded for technical terrain. It comes with a higher 5mm drop and significantly more cushioning underfoot. The Spin Ultra 2 is the more precise shoe of the two.

Compared to the Arctery’x Norvan LD4, our current favourite trail running shoe, the Scarpa Spin Ultra 2 has the edge on comfort and performance over longer distances, with more cushioning and a grippier outsole compound. If you want a shoe that’s more road-versatile then choose the Arc'teryx; if technical trail comfort is the priority, the Scarpa.

Verdict

For middle-long distance trail running, mountain days and multi-day hikes on technical terrain, the Scarpa Spin Ultra 2 is one of the best all-rounders I've had on my feet. Light, stable, grippy and comfortable from the first wear. Just keep it off the roads (when running) and out of serious mud.

About the author

Evie Nichols is LFTO's chief female tester. She loves nothing more than being in high and remote places, and in general, she's not fussy whether that's in trail running shoes, climbing shoes, walking boots or on two wheels.

After a new half-marathon PB this year, she's got several trail races (and one ultra) lined up for this summer, and has her eye on a Bob Graham round. No prizes for guessing which shoes she'll be wearing.

At first glance, water shoes might feel unnecessary. For a sandy beach day or a quick swim, bare feet usually do the job just fine. If it's rocky you can just use some non-waterproof hiking shoes or trail running shoes, right? So why even bother?

That may be true for some. But if you’re crossing streams, getting in and out of a kayak or dealing with sharp/slippy rocks, you’ll be glad for a dedicated water shoe.

But there's so many different types of water shoe. There are neoprene swim socks, low‑cut paddling shoes, amphibious hiking shoes, and don't even get me started on hybrids trying to sit somewhere in the middle.

It’s not straightforward comparing them because they’re built with different priorities. The shoe that’s brilliant for scrambling up a riverbank might feel clumsy in open water; the one that swims beautifully might leave your feet battered on a stony trail.

So instead of looking for a single “winner”, we’ve focused on the models that represent the best of what’s currently available – and tested them against the same core criteria: comfort, performance, build quality and value.

Because whatever your version of “water use” looks like, the goal is the same: something that works when it’s wet – and doesn’t annoy you once you’re back on dry land.

Shortlist: Best water shoes at a glance

Best water shoes overall: Hoka Hopara

Best value water shoes: Decathlon Elasticated Aquashoes

Best for open-water swimming: Finisterre Nieuwland 3mm Yulex Swim Sock

How we tested

Live for the Outdoors gear tester Evie Nichols headed up the testing of these shoes, mainly in the reservoirs and rivers dotted about the Peak District. Because this category ranges from minimalist neoprene swim socks to amphibious shoes, she judged each model within the environment it’s designed for rather than forcing them into a single use case.

That meant assessing each pair across four main areas: value (performance relative to price within its category), build quality (stitching, materials, sole bonding and durability after repeated soak‑and‑dry cycles), comfort (fit security and feel over extended wet use) and performance (how confidently it handled its intended terrain and water conditions).

Read how we test gear for more info – including how we managed to get hold of all of these shoes.

Best water shoes for 2026

What to look for when buying water shoes

Not all water shoes are built for the same job. Before choosing a pair, the most important step is deciding where and how you’ll actually use them. A lightweight swim sock for cold‑water dips has very different priorities than an amphibious shoe designed for hiking through river crossings. Buying the right type matters more than buying the “best” model overall.

Intended use

Start with your main activity.

Open‑water swimming or cold plunges: Look for neoprene/yulex construction, flexibility and a close fit.

Paddle boarding or kayaking: Prioritise low profile design, deck grip and quick transitions in and out of water.

Rocky shorelines, coasteering or river hiking: Choose thicker soles, toe protection, grip on wet rock and added stability.

If you need one pair for everything, look for a hybrid that balances flexibility with underfoot protection.

Fit and security

Water shoes should feel snug – closer to a performance fit than a casual sneaker. Loose shoes shift when wet, rub over time and can come off in a current or mud. Adjustable closures, secure heel cups and minimal internal movement are key.

Underfoot protection

Consider the terrain. Thin, flexible soles work well for swimming and light use, but rocky riverbeds require more cushioning and protection against sharp stones. Match the sole thickness to the ground you’ll be covering.

Water handling

Some shoes are designed to drain instantly. Others (like neoprene socks) intentionally retain a thin layer of water, which is then heated up by your body heat. Think about whether you need quick drying, warmth retention or a balance of both. Also check how much weight the shoe gains when saturated.

Comfort over time

Water amplifies friction. Seams, stiff overlays and poor fit become more noticeable once wet. Look for smooth interior construction and materials that won’t rub during extended wear.

Durability

Salt, sand and repeated soak‑and‑dry cycles are tough on footwear. Reinforced stitching, solid sole bonding and abrasion‑resistant uppers will extend lifespan, especially if you’re scrambling over rock.

Versatility

If you regularly move between water and trail, a more structured amphibious shoe may justify the extra bulk. If you’re primarily swimming or paddling, a minimalist option will feel lighter and more natural.

Looking for something for river crossings? Many of the best hiking boots on the market are fully waterproof and may suffice, while some lightweight walking boots will also dry quickly – and both offer a lot of additional support.

Frequently asked questions

About the author

LFTO writer and gear tester Evie Nichols loves nothing more than getting outside, preferably in the mountains, and she's not fussy whether that's in trail running shoes, climbing shoes, walking boots or on two wheels.

Evie is a big fan of multi-day hikes, her favourites being the GR20 in Corsica, Mallorca's GR221 and the GR52 in the Alps.

The Sea to Summit Spark Ultralight -1C has bagged a 2026 LFTO Gear Award as our sleeping bag of the year. If you're the kind of person who counts grams, you’ve probably either already got one, or want one.

It's not the first time a Sea to Summit bag has picked up one of our awards. The Spark SPIII won Trail magazine's Gear of the Year in 2024. The new Spark Ultralight -1C Women's is a different bag, with the same obsession: warmth to weight ratio, pushed as far as it'll go.

Why the Sea to Summit Spark Ultralight -1C is our sleeping bag of the year

There are sleeping bags that try to do everything. The Spark isn't one of them. It's focused almost entirely on a single goal: keeping you as warm as possible for as little weight as possible. And it achieves that goal better than anything else we've tested.

There are four different temperature ratings available, from 7°C to -18°C, but they're all essentially variations of the same theme. The version I tested, with a comfort rating of -1°C and a lower limit of -7°C, weighs just 584g.

That's a capable three-season bag, good for camps well into autumn and early spring, in a package that weighs about the same as a pint of milk. The packed size is miniature, too – fully compressed, it’s not much bigger than my Nalgene bottle.

Women-specific design

The women's-specific design is key to this (a men's option is also available), as the insulation provided goes further. Rather than simply making the bag smaller, Sea to Summit has loaded it with more insulation in key spots where women lose warmth. It’s also shaped to fit women better – narrower at the shoulders and wider between the hip and knees.

This really makes a difference, as standard mummy bags are built around the male physique. "When a woman carries a standard mummy-shaped sleeping bag, she is carrying extra length and shoulder width," said designer Brendan Sando. Female specific bags are lighter, with more warmth for weight – there’s less dead space inside the sleeping bag.

A frosty night in the Lakes

I tested the Spark Ultralight -1C Women's on a wild camp in the Lake District, paired with a Sea to Summit Reactor liner. Overnight temperatures dropped to around freezing, but I slept comfortably throughout. It was warm inside the Spark, but not stifling.

The zip deserves a special mention. Big, smooth pull tabs, a zipper plow that stops fabric snagging, and absolutely none of that late-night wrestling match you sometimes get with cheaper bags. It's a half-zip design – you can't open it out flat into quilt mode, which will be a dealbreaker for some, but the zipper itself is a joy to use.

The hood is excellent, too. It uses a cinchable design with down-filled baffles that seals snugly around your face without any pressure points. On a cold, breezy night it makes the whole bag feel like a cocoon.

An ultralight bag with ultralight trade-offs

This is an ultralight bag and it comes with ultralight trade-offs, so let's be honest about them. The 10D nylon shell is flimsy. It's soft against the skin and saves weight, but it needs to be treated with care. This isn't a bag you want to drag across a rough tent floor or stuff in its bag without thinking.

Speaking of stuffing: the stuff sack is so small that getting the bag back in is fiddly. Someone I lent the bag to actually thought that I gave them the wrong stuff sack. For occasional wild camping that's a minor inconvenience, but for someone packing and unpacking on a multi-day trip day after day, it can wear thin. It's the price of the packability, but it's worth knowing going in.

Who should buy the Sea to Summit Spark

The Sea to Summit Spark Women's isn't a bag for everyone. If you want something robust, easy to live with and built to last years of rough use, there are better options out there.

But if you're an ultralighter, someone who's thought carefully about every gram in their pack and wants the best warmth-to-weight ratio money can buy, this is it. I don't know of anything else at this weight that will keep you this warm.

Verdict

The Sea to Summit Spark Ultralight -1C does one thing and it does it brilliantly. In terms of warmth-to-weight ratio, it's simply the best sleeping bag I've ever tested.

For more options, check out our list of the best 3-season sleeping bags.

About the author

Evie Nichols is LFTO's chief female tester. Evie loves nothing more than being in high and remote places, and in general, she's not fussy whether that's in trail running shoes, climbing shoes, walking boots or on two wheels.

A big fan of multi-day hikes, some of her favourites are the GR20 in Corsica, Mallorca's GR221 and the GR52 in the Alps. Follow her adventures on Instagram @eviejnichols.

There’s a particular ridge on my local mountains here in North Wales – Craigysgafn, which links Moelwyn Mawr and Moelwyn Bach. It’s mostly made up of loose slate, broken by a striking band of quartz. Although not technically difficult, it’s awkward, especially in the wet – not steep enough to justify a rope, but slippery enough to make you focus on your feet rather than the view.

Anyway, it’s where I’ve tested the mettle of more walking boots than I care to remember. Some have been good, some decent, some fair to middling. Some have felt like I was wearing greased-up clogs. The La Sportiva Aequilibrium Hike GTX felt, from the first time I wore it up there, like it had been designed specifically for that ridge. It probably wasn’t. But that’s exactly how a great boot should feel.

Full disclosure: I came to the Aequilibrium Hike already a fan of the family. Since it came out a couple of years back, La Sportiva’s beefier crampon-compatible Aequilibrium LT GTX has become my go-to winter boot – replacing my older, much-loved Trango Techs. It’s on my feet every time there’s snow or ice in the MWIS forecast, and I’ve spotted it cladding the feet of a few Mountain Rescue mates too, which tells you everything you need to know about its reputation.

So, when the lighter, more flexible Hike version arrived, I was more excited than I probably should have been about footwear. Even for a gear nerd, it didn’t disappoint, which is why it's a LFTO Gear Awards winner in 2026...

Why the La Sportiva Aequilibrium Hike GTX is our hiking boot of the year

For me, what really sets this boot apart from the crowded 3-season market is the grip. The Vibram outsole’s combination of tacky rubber and seriously deep lugs is, simply, the best I’ve encountered on mixed terrain – broken rock, slick grass slopes, jumbled scree, boggy moorland or muddy approach paths.

It invariably bites where you expect other boots to skid, and that pronounced cambered heel is a game changer. La Sportiva calls it the Double Heel; I call it the thing that saved me on the notorious Bristly Screes (never again!).

The Gore-Tex lining is worth flagging too – and I don’t mean that in the standard review sense of “yes, I stood in a puddle and it kept my feet dry, box ticked”. The Aequilibrium Hike uses Gore’s Extended Comfort membrane rather than the more common Performance Comfort, which means it’s engineered for warmer, more active conditions.

On a long, sweaty August day grinding up Yr Wyddfa's (Snowdon’s) Watkin Path, my feet were noticeably cooler and drier inside than they have any right to be in a boot this robust. Again, it’s a detail that turns a good boot into a proper go-to from spring right through to autumn, rather than something you only reach for on chilly days.

Comfort has never been the Aequilibrium family’s primary selling point – these are technical boots, not cushioned trainer-hikers – but the Hike version isn’t as spartan as most mountain boots. The injected PU foam midsole cuts weight without sacrificing cushioning, and the 3D Flex System Evo ankle cuff moves with you rather than fighting you. As someone with bony ankles who has been rubbed raw by stiffer boots, I appreciate that.

One caveat: true to form for the brand, the fit runs narrow-to-medium, which suits me but may not suit everyone. La Sportiva footwear tends to reward the slimmer-footed among us, with a precision fit that feels neat and responsive on rocky ground.

I know what you’re thinking: £235 is serious money (though it is currently on sale), and you’re right. You can pick up a perfectly competent 3-season boot for £100 less. But you’d be buying a different kind of boot – one that’s less reliable, less technically precise, less likely to still be on your feet in two years’ time.

After a couple of hundred miles and many thousands of feet of ascent, the uppers of my pair are barely scuffed and the lugs are still doing their job – and the whole boot is resoleable too, which is another plus for lifetime value.

I can confidently assert that in my experience, the Aequilibrium Hike is a good long-term investment – and that matters in a world where a lot of outdoor gear seems to give up the ghost much earlier than it should.

Who should buy these boots?

If you like to take the path less travelled, covering a real mix of rugged terrain, then these boots are for you. They're wasted on well manicured tracks, but they really come alive when you're tackling gnarly scrambles or properly muddy ascents.

Verdict

The best grip on mixed mountain terrain I’ve ever tested, in a boot that earns every penny of its price.

Read our full La Sportiva Aequilibrium Hike GTX review for more detail on our testing.

About the author

Matt Jones has been one of LFTO's chief testers for the last six years and is one of the most respected reviewers of outdoor gear in the UK. He lives and works in the mountains of North Wales and has used the La Sportiva Aequilibrium Hike GTX boots for 18 months, over several hundred miles across Eryri and beyond.

In most places, you'll want a good pair of walking trousers for hikes throughout the year. If you live somewhere temperate, there's always a chance of chill or rain, and trousers offer extra protection from the elements.

The best hiking trousers are breathable for all-day comfort. They don't have to be waterproof trousers but should ideally be wind- and water-resistant.

A tapered cut will stop them flapping in the breeze, while a bit of stretch adds flexibility for hopping from rock to rock or scrambling up steep gullies. Those designed for use in winter need to up the toughness and protection.

In this guide, we review and recommend our favourite tested range of walking trousers. This includes three-season, winter, and waterproof options.

Best walking trousers at a glance

Best walking trousers overall: Fjällräven Keb Trousers

Best value walking trousers: Forclaz Mountain Trekking Zip-Off Trousers

Best mountaineering trousers: Mountain Equipment Ibex Pant

Editor's note: This article was updated in June 2026, with 3 new products being added for spring/summer, and three out-of-season products being removed.

How we tested

The trousers recommended here were tested by a number of our team including James Forrest, Matt Jones, and Chris Williams.

We've also rounded up the best women's walking trousers, thanks to LFTO tester Fliss Freeborn.

Our experienced gear testers know exactly what to look for in hiking trousers. Not only do we consider fit and comfort, but also aspects like durability, sustainability, and even small details such as where the pockets are placed.

All hiking clothing, including walking trousers, are subject to many miles of use in the conditions they're primarily intended for. This could include leisurely hillwalking through to mountain hiking in mid-winter.

Best walking trousers reviewed:

How do I choose walking trousers?

What material should hiking trousers be?

Most 3-season hillwalking trousers and hiking shorts are made from tightly woven nylon or polyester soft shell, often with elastane for stretch.

They may have a durable water-repellent (DWR) treatment for added water resistance. Other outdoor trousers are made from polycotton, which can often be waxed for additional weather protection.

High-wear areas like the knees, seat and instep often have thicker, reinforced fabric panels. Look for double- or even triple-stitched seams in high-stress areas for added durability.

How should hiking trousers fit? Tight or loose?

Whether tight or loose is a matter of preference, but everyone should have walking trousers that balance a secure fit with a lack of restriction.

An elasticated waist, either with belt loops or an integrated belt, gives all-round adjustability. A soft, lined waistband prevents irritation, especially when wearing a pack, so make sure it's the perfect size.

Generally, a slightly looser fit benefits comfort for long hiking days, but if you're looking for a close fit, ensure the material has plenty of stretch to maintain freedom of movement. Adding elastane (also called spandex or Lycra) to a fabric provides stretch, giving better freedom of movement and a more precise fit.

Two-way stretch fabrics stretch either vertically or horizontally. Four-way stretch fabrics stretch in both directions, crosswise and lengthwise.

Do walking trousers have extra ventilation?

Aside from insulated pairs for winter walking, good hiking trousers should have lots of ventilation features. Thigh vents can help to dump heat and can also be unzipped for better temperature regulation if you're forced to put on waterproof overtrousers.

They should also fit well around the ankle and accommodate your hiking boots. Adjustable cuffs with a press stud or Velcro tab give a closer fit and stop your trousers from flapping around. They also help you to see where you're putting your feet on technical terrain.

Features such as knee darts and a gusseted crotch improve overall fit and articulation, enhancing mobility, especially when scrambling or climbing.

Should you tuck your trousers into your walking boots?

Any decent pair of hiking trousers should offer plenty of protection from fitting over the top of your walking boot and around the ankle. The only reason we've ever bothered to tuck our trousers in is when we didn't want them getting muddy on a week-long trek through the Yorkshire Moors.

Some trousers have an integrated lace or boot hook at the ankle cuff to help stop debris from getting into your boots, but again, this is a fairly rare problem to encounter.

Should I use different walking trousers for winter and summer?

There are benefits to having different walking trousers for different seasons. For example, in the summer you may want some that zip off into shorts, are made of a lighter weight material or have additional venting.

All of those things will help keep you cool in hot weather, while many walking trousers will also come with a UPF rating to demonstrate how much they'll protect your skin against the sun's harmful UV rays.

Of course, it's perfectly acceptable to wear these lighter walking trousers in winter, especially if you intend to do some layering.

For example, you could wear some base layer bottoms underneath them for additional warmth if needed, while a pair of waterproof trousers will offer protection against wind and rain.

Alternatively, you may want to opt for some thicker walking trousers for winter. There are many options made of a softshell material, which can be warmer than summer-weight trousers and they often have a DWR coating.

Thicker options will also be more durable and harder wearing, primed to deal with the rugged terrain you often find when in the mountains in winter.

You can also get lined walking trousers, but we'd only recommend these for properly cold conditions, as it can be very easy to overheat in these when on the go.

Do hiking trousers have extra pockets?

Many do. You'll want to seek out zipped pockets to keep your items safe. We'd say they're an essential for mountain walking or scrambling.

Large pockets that will accommodate a map are particularly practical, but make sure they are sensibly placed so as not to affect leg movement.

How do I clean my walking trousers?

In order to keep the material breathable and maintain its water repellency (if it has a DWR coating), use Grangers or Nikwax gear cleaner (below) instead of regular laundry detergnet, which leaves behind residue and inhibits the peformance of technical fabrics.

And if your walking trousers suffer a tear, broken zip, or some ailment, don't fret. Retailers like Cotswold Outdoor, along with outdoor brands and specialists like Alpkit and Lancashire Sports Repairs, have superb repair services on hand for all types of outdoor gear.

About the author

James Forrest is a prolific peak bagger and long-distance walker who’s one of the most high-profile outdoor writers in the UK. He's perhaps best known for climbing every mountain in the UK and Ireland (all 1,001 of them!) in three years. He wrote about the English and Welsh part of that challenge in his book, Mountain Man. You can follow his adventures on Instagram.

Matt Jones is a vastly experienced gear tester and self-confessed outdoor kit geek based in North Wales. He's was previously editor of Walk and Scouting magazines.

When it comes to hiking jackets, especially mid layers, one fabric rules supreme: fleece. First developed in the late 1970s, this synthetic fabric was lighter and softer than wool. It's also much cheaper than down, and has a great warmth-to-weight ratio due to its large surface area trapping air against the skin.

Most hiking fleeces make a fantastic mid-layer option; cooler than insulated winter jackets, but warm enough - and breathable enough to keep you comfy on the uphills in colder weather.

We think having two or three in your hiking wardrobe is a good idea: a light one for summer breezes, a medium all-rounder and a deep pile one for cosy winter camping or layering under a waterproof jacket.

From lightweight, breathable gridded microfleece tops to uber-cosy, high-loft fleece hoodies, fleeces range from technical outerwear to an everyday wardrobe staple. Almost every outdoor apparel brand makes fleece jackets, which means there are hundreds of different options on the market today.

Plus, of the thousands of options, some brands do women's cuts far better than others, so we've dedicated our female testers to an entire separate group test: check out the best women's fleece jackets.

With an almost overwhelming choice out there, deciding which is best for you can prove difficult - especially as some are only differentiated by the price tag, or logo on the chest. Which is why here at LFTO, we've done the hard work for you, and have put many fleece jackets to the test over the years brining you a roundup of the best on the market right now.

Shortlist: Best fleece jackets of 2026 at a glance

Best in test: Patagonia R1 Air Full Zip Hoody

Highly rated: Rab Evolute Hoody

Best value for those on a budget: Craghoppers CO2 Renu Half Zip Fleece

How we tested the best fleece jackets

These fleece jackets were tested and reviewed by members of the LFTO team. We've been using and abusing fleeces for decades, and have gone though hundreds between us in our time - so we really know what separates the wheat from the chaff.

This article has contributions from all over the team – with the highest scoring jackets from Rob Slade, [Ben Weeks]{href="https://www.livefortheoutdoors.com/author/ross-tugwood/" target='_blank' rel='noreferrer noopener'}, and Fliss Freeborn. We've also had a few submissions from Chris Williams and, finally, Evie Nichols, who has been been testing a huge variety of fleece jackets on a rolling basis over the colder months.

We take them up high into mountain terrain in all sorts of weather, as well as using them in and around campsites and for lower level walks.

Our decision making process on what makes the best fleece jackets takes into account warmth to weight ratios, fit, value, and style - and only the fleeces that balance all of those parameters in some way will make the roundup.

The following, then, includes a mix of our favourites: retro classics, uber-modern materials, and some windproof options for blustery days too.

Find out more about how we test gear.

Editor's note: This buying guide of the best fleece jackets was updated on 5 June 2026, when we added four new reviews into the list and bumped some out that are no longer available.

Best fleece jackets reviewed:

Best of the rest

With so many great fleeces on test, not every favourite could make our top picks – but that doesn’t mean they’re not worth your attention. In fact, many of these “best of the rest” options are lower in stock, often discounted, and still offer brilliant performance for the right user.

If none of the products above quite fit the bill, these honourable mentions might be exactly what you’re after.

For those who like their fleece cosy, tough, and heritage-inspired, the Sherpa Rolpa Eco is a standout. It’s thick, durable, and made for cold days with recycled materials and a design that gives back through Sherpa’s education initiatives.

Prefer a throwback look? The Cotopaxi Abrazo Half-Zip blends retro vibes with a modern fit and solid warmth, making it ideal for cold-weather walks, après-ski, or just looking sharp in the pub. It’s not the most technical fleece here, but it’s definitely one of the most fun.

While these didn’t take top honours, we’d be more than happy to have any of them in our kit cupboard. And if you spot your size in stock, you might just score a cracking deal on a fleece that’ll last you seasons.

What to look for in a fleece jacket

Hang on, what is fleece?

Invented 1979 by Patagonia in tandem with Polartec, fleece is a synthetic fabric, typically made from polyester, designed to mimic the insulating properties of wool - while being lightweight, soft, and moisture-wicking. Fleece is incredibly versatile. It's quicker drying than a heavy wool jumper, and, unlike down jackets, works when wet.

Fleece types

Traditional options include polar fleece, micro-fleece (lightweight and tightly-woven) and high-loft fleece (fluffy and warm). Modern offerings include gridded fleece and Polartec’s super breathable Alpha Direct fluffy mesh tufts.

Fleeces also vary in weight and thickness, too. Thinner fleece jackets work best as mid layers. Sleek, stretchy and technical, they provide better freedom of movement and overall breathability but don’t offer much warmth. Thicker fleeces with a deeper pile trap more heat. They work best as standalone outer layers on dry days, but they are heavier and may feel too bulky underneath a hard shell. We usually categorise these into lightweight, mid-weight and heavyweight layers.

Casual vs performance fleeces

Casual fleece jackets are designed primarily for comfort and everyday wear, often focusing on style over technical features.

In contrast, performance fleece is engineered for active use, offering features like moisture-wicking, extra breathability, and technical fits to accommodate movement, making it ideal for hiking, climbing, or mountaineering.

Choosing between these depends on whether you need a jacket for daily wear or intensive outdoor activities.

What's the difference between cheap and expensive fleeces?

Things like design, durability, and sustainability separate cheap and more expensive fleeces (generally). A cheap fleece will be warm and functional initially, but will wear quickly and won't usually give a thought to the environment.

More expensive and 'technical' fleeces often employ more thoroughly engineered design methods. For example, some feature natural fibres such as merino wool. Others blend in additional synthetic materials like elastane. Hybrid fleece jackets mixing different materials are common. Their ‘zoned’ or ‘mapped’ construction optimises warmth, breathability and stretch.

Durability

Durability varies among fleeces, with thicker fabrics and higher-quality constructions offering better longevity. Performance fleeces often have reinforcements on high-wear areas, like elbows, while casual fleece may be softer but less durable. For long-lasting wear, especially in rugged environments, look for abrasion-resistant materials and reinforced stitching.

Sustainability

In terms of sustainability (more on this below), we consider the use of recycled material the bare minimum these days. Brands should be doing all they can to make fleece jackets more sustainable and durable, which is worth paying for.

Should a fleece be tight or loose fitting?

Ultimately, this is a personal choice. For hiking, a fleece needs to fit over base layers without feeling restrictive, but should also fit comfortably under a hardshell waterproof without being too chunky or boxy. Look for one with a snug, close-to-the-body fit, with warmth sealed-in at the wrist cuffs, waist hem and collar.

Adjustable drawcords or stretchy edging at the waist hem enable a snug fit tailored to your body shape. Adjustable wrist cuffs are rare, but some are elasticated for a closer fit that seals in warmth.

Should a fleece have a hood?

A fleecy hood provides excellent warmth and an essential feature for some. However, they can be annoying under other layers. If you prefer wearing a warm hat, you may not need a hood.

Are fleeces wind or waterproof?

Fleeces are neither wind- nor waterproof and thus need to be paired with a a more protective outer layer in windy or wet conditions. However, some fleeces use high-density, close-knitted yarns or the addition of wind-resistant face fabrics or membranes to keep the breeze at bay.

Otherwise, you'll need to take a look at softshell jackets or a windbreaker like this for added protection from breezy weather.

What about pockets and zips?

A selection of internal and external pockets is handy for storage. Handwarmer pockets are most common, but some jackets also feature Napoleon (breast) and bicep pockets too.

Fleece jackets have full-length, half, or quarter zips. Full length zips are easiest to get off and on, but they are heavier and slightly compromise warmth due to a longer seam.

Fleece sustainability

In these more enlightened times, we’ve now realised that a fabric made from petrochemicals is not so great for the planet. The manufacture of raw fleece material (polyester) emits a lot of CO2. And when put through the washing machine, fleeces release tiny strands and particles called microplastics into the environment.

Some outdoor gear brands are trying to find solutions to these problems and many fleeces are now made from recycled material, which is something but doesn't wholly address the challenge and more needs to be done.

However, innovation continues to amaze. In 2021, New Zealand outdoor gear brand Kathmandu launched a world-first range of fleeces made from Primaloft Bio. This fully recycled fabric looks and performs the same as traditional fleece, but it largely breaks down at an accelerated rate in oceans, wastewater, and landfill, the three places fleece fibres usually end up. Primaloft Bio is now being used by other brands too.

Having a circular/closed loop (i.e., recycled and recyclable) fleece is an important step too. You can also help battle against microplastic release by using a washing bag that catches the dislodged fleece strands.

For something a bit warmer, check out our roundup of the best synthetic insulated jackets.

About the author

This article was assembled by LFTO deputy editor Rob Slade, with product reviews done by himself and LFTO writers Evie Nichols and Chris Williams. Between them, the trio have decades of hiking and product reviewing experience between them, having explored in wild places all around the world.

January in North Wales typically brings the kind of day where clag shrouds the summits and the wind is trying to knock you sideways before you’ve even left the roadside. This is the environment the Mountain Equipment Lhotse was built for, and on days like that – and there have been a lot of them over the six years I’ve lived and worked in Eryri (Snowdonia) – it is an absolute pleasure to be wearing it.

I got my hands on an early sample of the latest model back in January last year as part of a test of the best waterproof jackets and it has barely been off my back since. On Yr Wyddfa (Snowdon) in March snow. A long day on the Nantlle Ridge through an Atlantic front. The full miserable, glorious repertoire of Welsh mountain weather. Not a single leak. Not once.

And that's part of the reason why it's just won a 2026 LFTO Gear Award. Keep on reading to find out more, or find our full list of winners here.

Why the Mountain Equipment Lhotse is our waterproof jacket of the year

I should say upfront that I also owned a previous version of the Lhotse – the older ePTFE-based Gore-Tex Pro model – and wore it for the better part of six years. So, I came to this latest iteration with both high expectations and a fairly critical eye.

Mountain Equipment hasn’t just refreshed the colourways here: the headline change is a switch to Gore’s new ePE membrane, which eliminates PFAS – the so-called ‘forever chemicals’ that have long been an uncomfortable truth about high-performance waterproof fabrics.

It’s a real step forward for sustainability, and the remarkable thing is that the performance hasn’t suffered. If anything, the new membrane feels slightly more supple than the old one, with less of that characteristic crisp-packet rustle. It’s a better jacket to wear, and a cleaner one to own.

The construction formula remains the same one that’s made the Lhotse a benchmark shell for years. Rugged 80-denier nylon on the shoulders and upper arms, where abrasion resistance matters most; lighter 40-denier on the main body and hood, where breathability and packability take priority. YKK Aquaguard zips, taped seams throughout, storm guard pockets – every detail designed to fend off the worst the mountains can produce. The pit zips and two-way front zip give you ventilation options when you’re working hard.

At 510g it sits in a sensible middle ground: not ultralight, but not too bulky to think twice about packing it.

What separates the Lhotse from similarly specced rivals is the cut and articulation. Mountain Equipment’s alpine fit is generous enough for a full layering system underneath, while the pre-shaped sleeves and gusseted underarms mean you can move freely – arms overhead, even with ice axe in hand, scrambling up something steeper than anticipated – without the jacket riding up or bunching.

The helmet-compatible hood is one of the best I’ve used: three points of adjustment, a laminated wired visor, and it actually stays put in high winds rather than billowing out like a windsock.

One caveat worth flagging: the PFAS-free DWR finish, in common with all the newer eco-friendly water-repellent treatments, doesn’t last as long as the old fluorocarbon-based versions. You’ll need to clean and reproof more regularly to keep performance at its peak. It’s not a flaw in the jacket – it’s the new reality of sustainable waterproof technology – but it’s worth factoring into your gear maintenance routine.

Admittedly, at £550 the Lhotse is a serious investment (though it's currently on sale). There are capable winter shells at less than half the price (such as the Keela Stratus, Highlander Munro) that will keep most hillwalkers perfectly dry. But the Lhotse isn’t really competing with those jackets – it’s right up there with the ultra-technical Arc’teryx Alphas and Betas, the Rab Latoks, the Norrøna Trollveggens of this world, and on that basis it holds its own comfortably.

This is a jacket you buy once and wear for the better part of a decade. I’ve done it twice (and my first Lhotse never actually gave up, I just, er, outgrew it).

As it happens, my other half Ellie also happens to own the women’s equivalent – the Manaslu – which shares the same construction, fabrics and feature set in a women’s-specific cut. Everything said here applies equally.

Who should buy it?

If you’re after a waterproof jacket to keep you sheltered from properly rough weather, this is up there with the best of them. It pretty much gets everything right – from the hood to the venting and the cut. It’ll be overkill for more casual or occasional hikers, but if you intend to spend all day in the mountains no matter the weather, buying this won’t be a mistake.

Verdict

The benchmark mountaineering shell, now cleaner, more supple and still completely unbeatable in truly bad weather.

Read our full Mountain Equipment Lhotse review for a longer verdict on this incredible jacket.

About the author

Matt Jones has been one of LFTO's chief testers for the last six years and is one of the most respected reviewers of outdoor gear in the UK. He lives and works in the mountains of North Wales and has used the Mountain Equipment Lhotse over 18 months, including on winter summits, stormy days and everything in between.

The Osprey Tempest 22 is officially a winner in our 2026 Gear Awards – I've been testing it over the past few months, and it's hands-down the best hiking daypack I've ever used.

In an era obsessed with ultralight numbers and stripped‑back minimalism, it’s easy to forget what most hikers actually need: comfort that lasts all day. While many brands race to shave grams, the Osprey Tempest 22 takes a more balanced approach, and that's exactly why it stands out.

I didn’t expect it to win. If anything, I assumed something lighter would edge it out. But after months of switching between contenders in mixed terrain and weather, this was the one I kept instinctively grabbing.

Why the Osprey Tempest 22 is our daypack of the year

If there’s one feature that elevates this pack above its rivals, it’s the fit. Osprey’s adjustable torso system allows you to fine-tune the back length, instead of settling for a vague size label and hoping it works. The fit of the Tempest is female-specific too (the brilliant men's version is called the Talon 22). I really appreciated this, as I always find 'unisex' backpacks are too large around the shoulders and waist – and I'm not even small.

This pack really excels for carrying full, heavy loads – in this respect, it's far superior to lightweight (less structured) alternatives that I've tested. The hip belt wraps securely without feeling restrictive, and it really helps to stabilise the load, instead of simply existing for show. On technical sections, the pack hugs your back and moves with you rather than swaying or pulling away.

"Never felt too sweaty"

Back ventilation is one of those features that sounds impressive in marketing copy but often feels underwhelming on the trail. Unlike some trampoline-style systems that push the pack away from your back and can alter balance, this design feels stable. And despite that, on warm spring climbs it never felt too sweaty.

Something a bit different is going on here features-wise. There's pretty much every feature you could ever dream of in a daypack – including eight extra pockets/compartments beyond the main compartment. If you're a hiker who hates storing snacks next to sun cream, you'll be eternally grateful for the Tempest 22.

The features are very well considered. The stretch side pockets secure water bottles and are accessible with a bit of flexibility. The trekking pole attachment works without fuss. The top pocket is perfectly positioned for essentials like hiking snacks or sunglasses, and the internal hydration sleeve is straightforward and practical.

For some this might be a bit too much – it's certainly not minimalist. The word we've previously used to describe it is "fussy". But for me, there’s enough organisation to keep your kit sensible, without it feeling unnecessary.

Expensive... but worth it

It’s not cheap – it’ll set you back by £125 (unless you find it on offer) – but part of what makes the Tempest 22 such good long-term value is how well it's built. The main body uses 100D high-tenacity nylon with a ripstop pattern for abrasion resistance, while the base, the area that gets the most wear and tear, steps up to 420D nylon for extra strength in high-wear areas.

I'm admittedly impatient when it comes to zips, and have been known to yank them/use brute force on them when they're not closing. Despite this, the zippers haven't snagged once, and they show no sign of wear and tear. Osprey also backs it with the brand's All Mighty Guarantee – free repair of any damage or defect, no matter how old the pack; another excellent feature that makes it worth the price.

The one I trust

On paper, the Tempest 22 isn’t chasing extremes. It isn’t the absolute lightest in its class; it sits comfortably in the lightweight-but-supportive category, weighing just under a kilogram depending on size. But what it does exceptionally well is carry a realistic day load comfortably for hours. After extended climbs and long descents, I'd argue that matters far more than shaving a handful of grams at the start of the day. That consistency is what ultimately earned it the award.

Who should buy the Osprey Tempest 22

For hikers who've never quite found the right daypack, the Osprey Tempest 22 might just be a dream come true. If you walk on varied terrain, struggle with pack fit and want something that'll handle whatever you throw at it, it's a very easy recommendation.

It's particularly well suited to walkers who like to be organised on the move – multiple pockets, everything in its place, nothing buried at the bottom of one cavernous compartment.

Verdict

It’s not flashy or revolutionary, but it's thoughtfully designed, reliable and robust. For most hikers heading out for a full day on the trail, that's exactly what you want – and it’s why the Tempest 22 continues to be the pack I trust most.

See our list of the best backpacks for women for more options.

About the author